WinSen Property Manager Operations Manual

WinSen Property Manager Operations Manual
Operations Manual
WinSen Property Manager
TM
Sentinel Systems Corporation
Copyright © 1996-2007 Sentinel Systems Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Sentinel Systems Corporation
1620 Kipling Street
Lakewood, CO 80215
(800) 456-9955
http://www.SentinelSystems.com
The WinSen Property Manager Operations Manual is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. No part
of this manual may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic
medium or machine readable form without the prior written consent of Sentinel Systems Corporation.
The names of persons and entities referenced in this manual are for illustrative purposes only.
Similarity to any person or entity is unintended and purely coincidental.
Version 3.30
Revised 11/28/2006
Contents at a Glance
Introduction...............................................................................................................1
Daily Operations .....................................................................................................25
Other Tenant Operations .......................................................................................83
General Operations ................................................................................................99
Report & Graph Menu ..........................................................................................117
Maintenance..........................................................................................................145
Utilities ..................................................................................................................201
Appendices ...........................................................................................................207
Startup ...................................................................................................................259
Glossary of Terms ................................................................................................265
Index ......................................................................................................................267
i
Table of Contents
Introduction...............................................................................................................1
Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 1
Special Features ....................................................................................................................................... 2
Other SSC Products ................................................................................................................................. 3
Windows Based Software.......................................................................................................... 3
DOS Based Software ................................................................................................................. 3
Access Control and Alarm Systems........................................................................................... 4
The WinSen Property Manager Family of Software Systems.................................................................. 4
Manual Conventions ................................................................................................................................ 4
Installation from CD-ROM ...................................................................................................................... 5
Installing on a Network............................................................................................................................ 6
Peer-to-Peer Networks............................................................................................................... 6
Server based Networks .............................................................................................................. 6
Running the Program ............................................................................................................................... 7
WinSen Main Menu................................................................................................................... 7
Licensing.................................................................................................................................................. 7
Organization of the Menus....................................................................................................................... 9
How to Make Menu Selections .............................................................................................................. 14
Password Protection............................................................................................................................... 15
Data Entry Forms ................................................................................................................................... 15
Printers and Report Viewing Forms....................................................................................................... 16
Select Printer Form .................................................................................................................. 16
Report Viewing Form .............................................................................................................. 18
Special Documentation Help File .......................................................................................................... 20
The Demonstration Database ................................................................................................................. 20
Site Customization Guide and Site Setup .............................................................................................. 20
Predefined Letters .................................................................................................................................. 21
Overview of a Typical Day .................................................................................................................... 22
Our recommendation for the specific steps to follow each day: .............................................. 22
Regarding backups................................................................................................................... 23
How to get Additional Help ................................................................................................................... 23
Daily Operations .....................................................................................................25
Running the Program ............................................................................................................................. 25
Running the Daily Charger .................................................................................................................... 25
Printing the Lock/Unlock Report ........................................................................................................... 26
View/Edit Tenant - Table and Form Views ........................................................................................... 27
The Toolbar ............................................................................................................................. 27
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Table” Window ...................................................................................... 28
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window....................................................................................... 30
Tenant Info tab (View/Edit Tenant Data) ................................................................................ 31
2nd Contact tab ........................................................................................................................ 32
Billing tab ................................................................................................................................ 32
Automatic Debit Information................................................................................................... 34
iii
Demo/Adv. Tab .......................................................................................................................34
Insurance Tab...........................................................................................................................35
Security Tab.............................................................................................................................35
Unit Status tab..........................................................................................................................37
Returned Check tab..................................................................................................................39
Balance tab...............................................................................................................................40
Other tab ..................................................................................................................................41
Canceling a Transaction .........................................................................................................................42
Insurance Policies: Adding, Changing or Canceling..............................................................................43
Payments ................................................................................................................................................45
The Basic Steps for Posting a Payment....................................................................................46
Rent Payments and the Paid to Date ........................................................................................46
Rate Changes After Rent has Been Charged............................................................................46
Additional number of months to pay .......................................................................................47
Prior Credit ..............................................................................................................................47
Miscellaneous Credits..............................................................................................................48
Giving Credit to be Used at a Future Time ..............................................................................48
Posting a Full Payment ............................................................................................................48
Posting Partial or Over Payments ............................................................................................49
Miscellaneous Charges During Payments................................................................................50
Posting a Multiple Unit Payment .............................................................................................51
Assign Tenant ........................................................................................................................................53
Notes & Reminders..................................................................................................................54
Tenant Information Tab ...........................................................................................................54
2nd Contact Information tab ....................................................................................................57
Billing Information tab ............................................................................................................57
Demographics/Advertising Effectiveness tab ..........................................................................59
Insurance Information tab ........................................................................................................61
Security Information tab ..........................................................................................................61
Other tab ..................................................................................................................................62
Amount Due tab.......................................................................................................................63
Moveouts................................................................................................................................................67
Misc. Charges and Credits .......................................................................................................67
Completing the Moveout .........................................................................................................67
Transfers.................................................................................................................................................69
Transfer Fee .............................................................................................................................70
Transfers Without Payment .....................................................................................................70
Transferring A Delinquent Tenant...........................................................................................70
Completing the Transfer ..........................................................................................................71
Late Letters & Mailings .........................................................................................................................71
How the System Determines When to Print a Late Letter .......................................................71
Selecting/Deselecting Notices..................................................................................................72
Print Second Contact Letters ...................................................................................................72
Letters for Units in Lien...........................................................................................................72
Sort Options .............................................................................................................................73
Printer Button...........................................................................................................................73
Refresh Button .........................................................................................................................73
Print Selections ........................................................................................................................73
Special Mailing ........................................................................................................................73
End of Period Processing .......................................................................................................................75
Proof Edit Reconciliation.........................................................................................................76
Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly and Yearly Closes ...........................................................76
Backing up Your Database ......................................................................................................77
Site Summary Report...............................................................................................................78
Moveout Ledger.......................................................................................................................80
Report Settings and Output Options ........................................................................................80
iv
Reprinting a Closing or Charger report ................................................................................... 82
Other Tenant Operations .......................................................................................83
View Transactions ................................................................................................................................. 83
Tenant History ....................................................................................................................................... 84
Print a Letter .......................................................................................................................................... 85
Change Due Day .................................................................................................................................... 86
Change Unit Status................................................................................................................................. 87
Multiple Units ........................................................................................................................................ 88
Multiple Unit Considerations................................................................................................... 88
Working with the Multiple Unit Dialog................................................................................... 88
Change Security Information ................................................................................................................. 89
Lock or Unlock a Tenant ....................................................................................................................... 91
Process Lien Status ................................................................................................................................ 92
Load Default Lien Information................................................................................................ 93
Lien Charges, Inventory, and Auction Info Tabs..................................................................... 93
Tax on Auction Revenue ......................................................................................................... 94
Posting a Returned Check ...................................................................................................................... 95
Pictures................................................................................................................................................... 96
General Operations ................................................................................................99
Miscellaneous Account Windows.......................................................................................................... 99
The Paid By Window........................................................................................................................... 100
Payments by Credit Card ....................................................................................................... 101
Credit Card Processing .......................................................................................................... 101
Find Unit Function ............................................................................................................................... 101
Field ....................................................................................................................................... 102
Operator ................................................................................................................................. 102
Entry ...................................................................................................................................... 102
Save Find Settings ................................................................................................................. 102
Find Next and Find Previous Buttons.................................................................................... 102
Find Vacant Unit Function................................................................................................................... 103
Size Code............................................................................................................................... 103
Find Tenant / Prelease / Prospect Function.......................................................................................... 103
Sort Options Window........................................................................................................................... 104
Possible and Selected Fields Boxes ....................................................................................... 105
Action Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 105
Sort Direction ........................................................................................................................ 105
OK Button.............................................................................................................................. 106
The Calculator...................................................................................................................................... 106
Notepad................................................................................................................................................ 106
Reminders ............................................................................................................................................ 107
Entering a new Reminder ...................................................................................................... 108
Entry Date.............................................................................................................................. 108
Reminder Date ....................................................................................................................... 108
Type of Reminder .................................................................................................................. 108
Notes...................................................................................................................................... 108
Editing or deleting existing Reminders.................................................................................. 108
Reminders Report .................................................................................................................. 108
Waiting List ......................................................................................................................................... 108
Prospective Tenants ............................................................................................................................. 110
Entering, Editing, and Deleting Prospective Tenants ............................................................ 110
Prospective Tenant Mailings ................................................................................................. 113
Prospective Tenant Reports ................................................................................................... 115
v
Report & Graph Menu.......................................................................................... 117
Compiling & Printing Reports & Graphs.............................................................................................117
Report Selections ...................................................................................................................118
Site Selection .........................................................................................................................118
Print Selections ......................................................................................................................118
Output Options.......................................................................................................................118
Tenants...................................................................................................................................119
Sort Options Button ...............................................................................................................119
Printer Button.........................................................................................................................120
Report Descriptions..............................................................................................................................120
Financial Reports ...................................................................................................................120
Tenant Reports.......................................................................................................................125
Management Reports .............................................................................................................128
Graph Descriptions...............................................................................................................................141
Distance from the Facility Graph...........................................................................................141
Non-Standard Rate Graph......................................................................................................141
Number of Employees Graph ................................................................................................141
Purpose for Storage Graph.....................................................................................................141
Sentinel Activity by Hour Graph ...........................................................................................141
Size and Rate Graph...............................................................................................................142
Square Footage by Size Graph...............................................................................................142
Tenant Longevity Graph ........................................................................................................142
Tenant Movein Breakdown Graph.........................................................................................142
Tenant Gender Graph.............................................................................................................142
Top 20 Zip Codes Graph........................................................................................................142
Type of Business Graph.........................................................................................................142
Type of Office Graph.............................................................................................................142
Type of Residence Graph.......................................................................................................143
Type of Tenant Graph............................................................................................................143
Unit Status Breakdown Graph ...............................................................................................143
Unit Status by Size Code Graph ............................................................................................143
Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 145
Site Information ...................................................................................................................................145
Site Setup .............................................................................................................................................145
WinSen Electronic Manager Site Setup.................................................................................146
Site Setup Tabs ......................................................................................................................147
Site Name Tab .......................................................................................................................147
System Dates Tab ..................................................................................................................150
Late Cycles/Fees ....................................................................................................................151
Printer Setup Tab ...................................................................................................................154
General Tab............................................................................................................................156
Auction Information Tab .......................................................................................................163
Lien Charges Tab...................................................................................................................163
Insurance Tab.........................................................................................................................164
Premium Amounts Tab ..........................................................................................................165
Other Tab ...............................................................................................................................167
Accounts Setup.....................................................................................................................................175
Advertising Categories.........................................................................................................................177
Demographic Categories ......................................................................................................................177
Inventory Control .................................................................................................................................178
Inventory Adjustments...........................................................................................................179
Reports...................................................................................................................................180
Inventory Items ......................................................................................................................182
vi
Size Codes............................................................................................................................................ 183
Add/Remove Units............................................................................................................................... 185
Unit Types............................................................................................................................................ 188
Rate Change Options ........................................................................................................................... 189
Entering the Rate Change information .................................................................................. 190
Editing and Removing Rate Change records ......................................................................... 193
Tax Rate Changes ................................................................................................................................ 193
Password Maintenance......................................................................................................................... 194
Password Access Levels ...................................................................................................................... 195
Database Operations ............................................................................................................................ 196
Restore Database ................................................................................................................... 196
Rebuild and Compact Database File...................................................................................... 198
Compact Database File .......................................................................................................... 198
Verify Database Consistency................................................................................................. 199
Purge Old Information ........................................................................................................... 200
Utilities ..................................................................................................................201
Daily Charger....................................................................................................................................... 201
Calendar ............................................................................................................................................... 201
Change Date/Time ............................................................................................................................... 202
System Information.............................................................................................................................. 203
Show Vacant Units............................................................................................................................... 203
Quick View .......................................................................................................................................... 204
WinSen Online..................................................................................................................................... 205
Appendices ...........................................................................................................207
Appendix A - System File Names........................................................................................................ 207
Late Letters & Notices File Names........................................................................................ 207
General File Names ............................................................................................................... 208
Appendix B - Explanation of Transaction Codes................................................................................. 209
Appendix C - Transaction Code Table................................................................................................. 211
Appendix D – Unit Status Codes ......................................................................................................... 215
Appendix E - Gatetest Program ........................................................................................................... 216
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup................................................................................................ 219
DCOM Setup ......................................................................................................................... 219
NetDDE Setup ....................................................................................................................... 225
Appendix G – The Timezone.txt File................................................................................................... 229
Appendix H – Initialization File Variables .......................................................................................... 230
Appendix I – Adding Reports to the Report Menu .............................................................................. 232
Appendix J – Using WinSen with ICVerify......................................................................................... 233
Tips for Using WinSen with ICVerify................................................................................... 233
Supported Card Readers ........................................................................................................ 233
Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................... 234
Details of the Interface........................................................................................................... 234
Appendix K – Using WinSen with PCCharge ..................................................................................... 235
Tips for Using WinSen with PCCharge................................................................................. 235
Supported Card Readers ........................................................................................................ 235
Appendix M - WinSen Lite Reports Listing ........................................................................................ 236
Appendix N – Editing Microsoft Word Documents ............................................................................ 237
Appendix O – WinSen Passcodes / Maximum Digits.......................................................................... 238
Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen......................................................... 239
Installing the ScanShell 800 .................................................................................................. 239
Driver’s License Scanner Options ......................................................................................... 239
Appendix Q – WinSen MapPoint Interface ......................................................................................... 243
vii
Introduction............................................................................................................................243
System Requirements.............................................................................................................243
Licensing................................................................................................................................243
Installation .............................................................................................................................243
Operation ...............................................................................................................................243
Viewing..................................................................................................................................244
Toolbars .................................................................................................................................244
Radius Rings ..........................................................................................................................244
Printing ..................................................................................................................................245
Saving ....................................................................................................................................245
Help........................................................................................................................................245
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service.................................................................................................246
Introduction............................................................................................................................246
Security ..................................................................................................................................247
Tenant Online Experience......................................................................................................247
Manager Online Interface ......................................................................................................248
WinSen Interface ...................................................................................................................250
Security Info ..........................................................................................................................253
Online Status..........................................................................................................................253
Setup Procedure .....................................................................................................................254
General Instructions ...............................................................................................................255
Email Notification..................................................................................................................256
URL Configuration ................................................................................................................257
System Requirements.............................................................................................................257
Trouble Shooting Tips ...........................................................................................................257
Startup .................................................................................................................. 259
Startup Procedure .................................................................................................................................259
Installing Your Existing Tenants..........................................................................................................261
The Editor Program..............................................................................................................................263
Glossary of Terms ............................................................................................... 265
Index ..................................................................................................................... 267
viii
Introduction
Thank you for selecting the WinSen Property Manager system. This software is written
specifically for the Property Management application and contains all the features and capabilities
you need for complete control of your investment.
Overview
WinSen Property Manager is a menu driven property management system designed to run under
Microsoft Windows. It is available in “single-site” or “multiple-site” versions. The single site
version allows management of one facility. The multiple site version is called WinSen Electronic
Manager and handles multiple facilities within the same program and database. Program setup and
operation is essentially the same for both versions, with some minor differences that will be detailed
when appropriate.
Rents and Monthly Charges are automatically posted by the system and a full complement of
customized tenant notices can be printed and/or e-mailed with a simple command by the system
operator.
Opening reports are provided daily reflecting the current status of the site, identifying the actions
taken by the system (rents and monthly charges posted, customer notices queued for printing, etc.),
and alerting the system operator to activities that need to be accomplished that day, e.g., pre-lease
deposits that are to be forfeited.
Closing reports (Daily, Monthly, and Yearly) are also automatically generated. Weekly and
Quarterly closing reports are also available on an optional basis. Each report provides specific
information about its respective period and accumulates data for the next period. For example, the
Daily Close identifies today’s activity and accumulates this same information on a month to date
basis. Additional reports (e.g., Bank Deposit Log, Transaction Log, etc.), can be designated to print
along with the appropriate Close.
WinSen Property Manager provides you with powerful, flexible report generating and data export
capabilities. The system comes with a full set of predefined “on-demand” reports which can be
printed, viewed in a window or scheduled to print after the Rental Office Closes. If the standard
reports don’t give you all the information you want, you have the ability to define your own reports,
using the Crystal Reports Program. The system can export information to a variety of other
formats, for example to a spreadsheet program, word processor, database program, etc.
Complete histories are maintained on all current and former tenants and can be accessed on the
computer screen for review. Histories can also be printed in total or on a transaction by transaction
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Overview • 1
basis. When a customer is moved out, tenant histories will be retained in the system. Optionally, the
tenant history can be printed for the site files on moveout.
The system will print Lease, Pre-Lease and Transfer Agreements (or fill in the blanks on your preprinted Agreements) as well as detailed receipts for each transaction. Multiple copies of the receipts
can be printed if the facility desires to maintain a copy. In addition, a given receipt can be reprinted
at any time.
Taxes, if applicable, are automatically calculated and posted on any of the revenue accounts
according to your local regulations. The system will automatically “pro-rate” recurring charges on
move-ins, transfers and move-outs. The system operator can accept or change pro-rated amounts per
the operational guidelines at the site.
A full Lien Process is included in the system allowing you to print lien notices, maintain unit
inventory, record auction information, etc. All information regarding your facility database can be
changed on-site by individuals having the appropriate passwords. This includes your notices, tax
rates, unit mix, unit rates, system passwords, etc.
Rate Changes are easily scheduled and accomplished on-site. Rate change notices can be printed in
advance and multiple rate changes can be queued for processing at different times. Many options are
available, e.g., changing rates on only vacant units, raising rates automatically after a set amount of
time, raising rates only on units that meet a specific criteria, etc.
The Late Charge and Notice process can be easily arranged to meet the needs of your facility. In
addition, you can selectively exclude a tenant from late charges and/or notices. Late charges can be
assessed on a fixed amount or on a percentage of the rent basis, or a specified amount per day.
Billing statements can be automatically printed for selected tenants.
The system can be setup to automatically process credit card payments, when used in conjunction
with the PC Charge or ICVerify programs and an authorized financial institution.
If you have a digital camera or scanner, you can associate digitized pictures with a tenant, or with a
unit.
Special Features
The WinSen Property Manager system contains many special features which enhance the capability
of the software and assist the Manager or Operator in running the system. A few of these features
are:
Inventory Control: the system has inventory control capability built in. You can keep track of any
number of inventory items: how many were sold, how many are on hand, and so on. Inventory items
are linked to one or more inventory accounts, giving you complete control over how much or how
little inventory detail is to be printed on the closing reports.
Monthly Charges: An unlimited number of accounts can be used to identify recurring charges
which will be charged on a monthly basis in addition to the rent. These accounts can be specified by
the site, changed at anytime, and appropriate tax is calculated along with the basic charge.
Misc. Charges: An unlimited number of accounts can be used to handle “one time” charges, e.g., the
sale of locks, packing materials, etc. These can be specified by the site and the appropriate tax will
be calculated.
Misc. Credits: An unlimited number of accounts can be used for processing any credits the site
requires, e.g., coupons, discounts, etc.
2 • Special Features
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Printing Lease Agreements: The system has the capability to “fill-in the blanks” on your preprinted Lease Agreements. Any variable data captured during the move-in process (e.g., tenant
name, address, unit number, rate, etc.) can be printed directly by the system.
Customer Receipts: The system can generate one or more printed receipts for your customer,
detailing the transaction just completed. Additional receipts can also be generated for the site.
Rate Charge Methods: The system has six rate charge methods which can be used: Anniversary,
First of the Month, 28 Day Cycle, Second Month Prorate, By the Week, and By the Day. You
can designate the “rate charge method” for your tenants individually if need be. For example, the
majority of your tenants can be renting on a “first of the month” basis, while certain tenants can rent
“by the week”. For further information, see “Assign Tenant”.
Other SSC Products
Windows Based Software
•
WinSen Lite – WinSen Lite incorporates only basic WinSen features.
•
WinSen Sentinel – access control and alarm software. Operates in conjunction with
keypads, card readers, and alarm system multiplexers to give you maximum access control
over your facility.
•
WinSen Site Graphics - graphically displays your site on your main computer or on a
separate computer. Units are displayed in the appropriate color according to their status
(rented, overlocked, vacant, etc.).
•
WinSen RSCM - “WinSen Remote Site Control Module”, a remote control program which
communicates with stand-alone keypads at unattended storage facilities. It works in
conjunction with WinSen Property Manager or as a stand-alone application.
•
WinSen Home Office - this software package is designed for the owner or Management
Company with one or more sites running WinSen Property Manager. It allows you to
automatically generate reports at your sites, and then transfer them to the home office via EMail, modem, or fax. Unless they are faxed, the transferred reports can then be viewed on
the computer screen, printed, and archived for later printing.
DOS Based Software
•
Property Manager II - the DOS version of our Property Management program.
•
Electronic Manager - multiple site version of Property Manager, this program allows you
to track multiple facilities on the same computer and within the same software package.
•
Home Office Package - this software package is designed for the owner or Management
Company with one or more sites running Property Manager II. It allows you to
automatically dial your sites and download reports via modem for viewing, printing, and
archiving.
•
Site Graphics Display - graphically displays your site on your main computer or on a
separate computer. Units are displayed in the appropriate color according to their status
(rented, overlocked, vacant, etc.).
•
RSCM - “Remote Site Control Module”, a remote control program which communicates
with stand-alone keypads at unattended storage facilities. It works in conjunction with
Property Manager or as a stand-alone application.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Other SSC Products • 3
•
Property Sentinel III - access control/alarm system software. This program controls the
access system through your computer’s serial port. It can be used in conjunction with
Property Manager or as a stand-alone program.
•
SBACK - this program is used to backup the Property Sentinel II, a stand-alone,
microprocessor based access control/alarm system. SBACK will save the information to
your computer hard drive.
Access Control and Alarm Systems
SSC also manufactures access control and alarm system products. Among them are:
•
Property Sentinel II - a stand-alone microprocessor based access control/alarm system that
can be interfaced to a variety of property management software systems.
•
Keypads - used to control access to a gate or door, these are available with rubber or metal
keys.
•
Card readers - also used for access control, these allow your tenant to enter or exit with a
cardkey that is laid against the card reader briefly. These are very convenient for your
tenants.
•
Alarm system components - door switches, multiplexer circuit cards, and related items.
When you have an alarm system it gives your tenants extra peace of mind and can command
higher rental rates.
The WinSen Property Manager Family of Software
Systems
WinSen Property Manager is available in the following configurations:
•
WinSen Property Manager 100........ for facilities with up to 100 units.
•
WinSen Property Manager 200........ for facilities with up to 200 units.
•
WinSen Property Manager 300........ for facilities with up to 300 units.
•
WinSen Property Manager 400........ for facilities with up to 400 units.
•
WinSen Property Manager............... for facilities with over 400 units.
Manual Conventions
¾ Example Commands
When a command needs to be typed or a key pressed, this manual will enclose the command or the
key description with angle brackets as shown:
< >
The brackets are for clarifying what command is to be entered or key pressed and are not part of the
command. For example, when you see something like:
Press the <F9> key to save your changes
This would mean to press the F9 key. The angle brackets are only for clarification.
4 • The WinSen Property Manager Family of Software Systems
Chapter 1 - Introduction
¾ Example Screens
The screen shots in this manual were taken on a computer running Windows 95/98. If your
computer is running a different version of Windows, your screens may look slightly different.
¾ Selecting Items from the Menus
To describe selecting a menu item, menu items will be separated with a pipe symbol, “|”. For
example, to denote selecting “View/Edit Tenant – Table” from the Main Menu, it will be shown as
Main|View/Edit Tenant – Table
Selecting “Site Setup” from the “Site Information” submenu of the Maintenance Menu would be
shown as
Maintenance|Site Information|Site Setup
¾
Indicates this feature is not available in WinSen Lite
Installation from CD-ROM
1. Before installing, we recommend that you close all open applications.
2. Insert the WinSen CD into your CD-ROM drive. After a few seconds, the “WinSen
Installation System” will run automatically. Select the “Install WinSen” option to run the
WinSen Setup program.
3. If for some reason the WinSen Installation System does not run automatically, point to the
Start button to display the Start Menu. You can also bring up the Start Menu by pressing
<Ctrl+Esc>. From the Start Menu, choose “Run”, then type D:\Setup and click OK. This
assumes D: is your CD-ROM drive, if this is not the case use the appropriate drive letter.
The WinSen setup program will run.
4. An introductory message will be displayed, recommending that you backup your data before
installing an update. If you are installing an update and have not backed up your database,
we strongly suggest that you do so before continuing. Click OK to display the Welcome
dialog. After reading the messages in the Welcome dialog, click Next.
5. The Software License Agreement dialog will be displayed. After reading the Software
License Agreement, click Next to continue. You must click Next, indicating your
acceptance of the agreement, to install WinSen.
6. The Choose Destination Location dialog will be displayed. This allows you to select the
installation location for WinSen. If you have previously installed WinSen the previous
installation folder will be selected. The default location is C:\Winsen. Click Next to
continue.
7. The Select Components dialog will be displayed. In this screen you can select or deselect
which WinSen components to install. A default set of components will already be selected.
The “Updated Reports” and “Updated Word Templates” options install the latest reports and
Word templates. If you have customized reports or letters, note that the installation program
will make backup copies of the reports (in a folder called RPTBKUP) and Word letter
templates (in a folder called DOTBKUP) before installing the standard ones. This allows
you to restore any custom reports and/or letters after the installation is completed. Click
Next to continue.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Installation from CD-ROM • 5
8. The Select Program Manager Group dialog will be displayed. This allows you to specify
the name of the folder under the Start Menu where you wish the WinSen program shortcut
icons to be created. The default name is WinSen. Click Next to continue.
9. The Start Installation dialog will be displayed. Click Next to install the selected WinSen
components.
10. The Installation Complete dialog will be displayed. Click the Readme button if you wish
to read the latest WinSen release notes. When you are ready, click Finish.
11. You will now have a new program group called “WinSen” (this may be different if you
chose a custom installation). Within this program group will be icons for the WinSen
programs you installed.
12. You must now license your WinSen program. Please contact your Sentinel Sales Team
member or our Technical Support Department at 1 800 456 9955.
This concludes the CD-ROM program installation.
Installing on a Network
Since setting up and configuring a network is beyond the scope of this manual, it is assumed that the
reader already has knowledge of these procedures. Once the network is setup and operating
correctly, the network installation of WinSen is not significantly different from installing to a local
hard drive.
Before beginning, setup and configure the network as necessary, and ensure that it is functioning
correctly.
Peer-to-Peer Networks
1. If WinSen is going to be run on the machine acting as the server, install WinSen as noted in
the preceding sections to the local hard drive on the server. If not, setup a folder on the
server to be used as the common WinSen folder. A folder named “WinSen” is suggested.
2. Share the folder created in step 1 on the network. Alternatively, share the entire server hard
drive. Network users will need read, write, and file scan access to the shared resource.
3. On each workstation, map a network drive to the shared WinSen folder or hard drive on the
server.
4. On each workstation, install WinSen to the mapped network drive. For example, if the
server hard drive is mapped as F:, install WinSen to the F:\WinSen folder. If the network
share is at the folder level, the installation drive would be F:\.
Server based Networks
1. Setup a folder on the server to be used as the common WinSen folder. Users will need read,
write, and file scan access to this folder. A folder named “WinSen” is suggested.
2. On each workstation, map a network drive to the WinSen folder on the server.
3. On each workstation, install WinSen to the mapped network drive. For example, if the drive
is mapped as F: to the server, install WinSen to the F:\WinSen folder.
If you will be running WinSen Sentinel on the network, additional setup is necessary to enable
interfacing to it over the network. These instructions are found in “Appendix E - Gatetest Program”
on page 216.
6 • Installing on a Network
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Running the Program
Point to the Start button, then Programs, then WinSen. Then select “WinSen Property Manager”.
If you are running the trial version of WinSen for the first time, it will display an introductory
message saying that the trial period is 30 days. The program will run for 30 days from the first time
it is run. To obtain a license key to enable the full version, please refer to the following section,
“Licensing”.
WinSen Main Menu
Licensing
The WinSen licensing program is used to enter the user registration information, and change the
WinSen licensing options. The WinSen CD-ROM contains all WinSen programs. You can install
any of the programs on the CD, but if a particular program has not been purchased, it becomes a trial
version which will run for 30 days from the date of installation. The WinSen Licensing program
allows you to enter a software key which changes purchased software from trial to fully enabled
versions.
There are two ways to run the WinSen Licensing program. You can either select the Licensing
option from the Help menu, or point to the Start button to display the Start Menu, select the “Run”
option, type in c:\winsen\license, and then click OK. The following form will be displayed:
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Running the Program • 7
If you do not already have a license key, contact Sentinel Systems (SSC). You will be asked for the
Computer ID number displayed by the Licensing form. Based on the Computer ID and the
software you have purchased, SSC will create a license key consisting of a sequence of characters
you will enter in the License Key field. The key can be received from SSC via telephone, fax, mail,
or electronic mail. When you receive it, write it down in a safe place in case you ever have to
reinstall the software. Note that the key is good only for the original computer; if you need to
transfer the WinSen software to a new computer, contact SSC for a new license key.
The Registered Programs, Options, Unit Limit, and Net Licenses fields show the programs and
options that have been purchased, the number of units allowed in WinSen Property Manager, and the
number of network licenses purchased. These fields are for display only and cannot be directly
changed.
The Trigger Codes fields are used for special situations. For example, if you are running WinSen
on a trial basis, the trial period has expired, and you would like another 30 day trial period, SSC can
issue a trigger code to accomplish this. In cases like this, contact SSC and give the technician the
Code Entry Number and the Computer ID. You will then be given one or two trigger codes.
In the Name and Company fields, enter the name of the person who owns the software, and the
company name. The Serial Number field cannot be edited; it will be set appropriately by the
license key. Enter the license key or trigger code(s) received from SSC in the appropriate field, then
click OK. All appropriate software options will be enabled according to the entered license key or
8 • Licensing
Chapter 1 - Introduction
trigger code(s), and the Licensing form will close. The changes will not take effect until you close
and reopen the affected WinSen program(s).
Organization of the Menus
Following is the organization of the menus and a brief explanation of each menu selection. The
various options will be explained in detail later on in this manual.
The menu system in WinSen can be configured in different ways to accommodate the user. A screen
with large buttons of the most commonly used functions can be displayed by resizing the menu bar
up or down to show the buttons desired as shown below.
By right clicking on the form (other then a button) a context menu will appear that allows you to
select which menu items are to be displayed:
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Organization of the Menus • 9
All the selections except the Button Bar will add an Icon menu with sub menu icons in a “CoolBar”
on the top of the form. The screen below shows the Main and Maintenance menu were selected and
added to the CoolBar.
When the Button Bar is selected from the list of options, an Outlook-style button bar will appear on
the left side of the form where you can click on the menu item then click on the sub menu item.
10 • Organization of the Menus
Chapter 1 - Introduction
The menu items selected to be shown on the form and the form size is all selectable by the user. If
the main menu bar is all that you would like displayed, right click on the form (other then a button)
and a list will appear that will allow you to unselect all the menu items, then resize the main form by
dragging the bottom of the form up until only the main menu bar is visible. WinSen will remember
and reload these settings when the program is started.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Organization of the Menus • 11
Main
View/Edit Tenant-Table: view and/or edit tenant information in a “table” format.
View/Edit Tenant-Form: view and/or edit tenant information in a “form” format.
Assign Tenant: assign a new tenant.
Late Letters and Mailings: print late letters and other notices, including special mailings, to one or
more tenants.
Report & Graph Menu: print reports and graphs. The reports can be viewed on the screen, sent to
the printer, or exported to a spreadsheet or word processing program.
End of Period Processing: perform the end of period closes, e.g. Daily, Weekly, Quarterly, and
Yearly Closes. The closing documents will summarize the activity for the appropriate period. This
is also where you backup your database each day.
Waiting List: place tenants on a waiting list if your facility is full or you don’t have units in the
desired size.
Prospective Tenants: enter, edit, and delete prospective tenants.
Prospective Tenant Mailings: print and / or email followup letters to prospective tenants.
Prospective Tenant Reports: print prospective tenant reports.
Exit: exits the program. <Alt-F4> will also exit from WinSen Property Manager.
12 • Organization of the Menus
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Maintenance
Site Information: establishes the informational and operating parameters for the facility including
the facility name and address, late cycle schedule, tax information, miscellaneous charge, credit and
monthly charge accounts, system accounts, inventory control, days to overlock, etc.
Size Codes: add, remove, and edit size codes at the site. Size codes are used to designate your
different unit sizes.
Add/Remove Units: edit, add, and remove units at the site.
Unit Types: edit, add, and remove unit types.
Rate Change Options: set up automatic unit rate changes.
Tax Rate Change Options: set up automatic tax rate changes.
Password Maintenance: allows the site to change the system access passwords.
Password Access Levels: allows the owner to configure which program functions are available to
which password. For example, the owner can configure the “Add/Remove Units” option to be
available only to the owner password.
Database Operations: allows the following operations on the program database:
1. Restore Database: restores a backup of your database. CAUTION: use this option
carefully, since it will overwrite the current data with the data from the backup. Do not
confuse this option with the “backup all data” option in End of Period Processing. If you
were to accidentally restore an old backup it could be a disastrous situation.
2. Rebuild and Compact Database file: repairs your database if it has become damaged.
CAUTION: you should backup your data before using this option.
3. Compact Database file: compacts your database. This is desirable from time to time due to
the nature of the database format. CAUTION: you should backup your data before using
this option.
4. Verify Database: checks your database for inconsistencies. Use this option if you are
receiving error messages when operating the program.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Organization of the Menus • 13
Utilities
Daily Charger: runs the very important Daily Charger function. The Daily Charger charges rent
and late fees to your tenants as appropriate, along with numerous other important program functions.
Calendar: displays a calendar on your computer screen for reference.
Change Date/Time: allows you to change the computer date and/or time. The computer date and
time are displayed near the upper right hand side of the WinSen Property Manager window.
System Information: displays information about your computer system, such as your DOS and
Windows versions, hard drive capacity, free system resources, etc.
Show Vacant Units: displays the vacant units at your facility.
Quick View: allows you to quickly view the status of any unit.
Winsen Online: allows you to interface to the Winsen Online Service to import online payments
and reservations.
Special
The Special menu allows you to launch other applications from within WinSen Property Manager. It
will contain different options depending on your installation. For example, if you have installed
Crystal Reports, that option will appear in the Special menu, allowing you to launch it directly
without having to go to the Windows Program Manager.
Window
The Window menu allows you to manage child windows spawned by WinSen Property Manager.
For example, you could have the Site Setup window and the Calendar window open at the same
time. This menu allows you to select which of the open windows will be the active window, and to
arrange them in an orderly manner.
Help
This menu allows you to obtain “on-line” help. You can also press “F1” at any time for contextsensitive help.
How to Make Menu Selections
To display one of the “Pull-Down” menus, you have two ways to do so: either click once on the
desired menu with your left mouse button, or press the “Alt” key and the underlined letter of the
desired menu at the same time. For example, to bring down the “Maintenance” menu, press
“Alt+T”. Note that each menu selection has an underlined letter, which is the “hot key” to select that
item. Thus, when a menu is displayed, press the underlined letter for the desired option, and the
program will immediately move to that item. You can also select an item by clicking on it with your
14 • How to Make Menu Selections
Chapter 1 - Introduction
mouse, or by using the arrow keys to place the highlight on a selection, then pressing the ENTER
key.
Note that some of the menu selections are followed by 3 periods (...). This means that when you
select this option, you will be presented with a data entry form for further input, as explained in
“Data Entry Forms” on page 15.
Password Protection
WinSen Property Manager is “password protected”. It does not require a password when you first
start the program, but when certain menu items are selected, it will prompt for a password, and will
not allow access unless the proper password is entered.
As the system comes “out of the box”, three levels of password protection are provided.... Operator,
Manager and Owner. The operator password is permitted to access the software and the functions
needed for day to day operations, e.g., posting payments, renting units, etc. The manager password
is permitted to access all functions except those which change size codes and add/remove units. The
owner password can access all program functions.
The owner can customize the program as to which password can access which program functions
using the “Configure Access Levels” option under the “Maintenance” menu. The program can also
be configured to require no passwords at all if you prefer. For complete details, refer to “Password
Access Levels” on page 195.
The program initially contains three pre-set passwords as follows:
Operator
XXXXXXX (Seven X’s)
Manager
YYYYYYY (Seven Y’s)
Owner
ZZZZZZZ (Seven Z’s)
To change the preset passwords, see “Password Maintenance” on page 194.
Data Entry Forms
Shown below is a typical data entry form. An explanation of the various buttons follows.
Add Button: pressing this button allows you to add a new record. After pressing the “Add” button,
it changes to an “Update” button. Then when you press it, the record you are currently working on
will be saved.
Delete Button: this button will delete the current record.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Password Protection • 15
Cancel Button: press this button to abandon any changes you have made and exit from the form.
Close Button: this button will save any changes you have made, and then exit from the form.
Help Button: runs context sensitive help for WinSen Property Manager. “Context sensitive” means
that the help window will be displayed with the topic of whatever function you are in at the time. For
example, if you are in Site Setup, and you press “F1” or the “Help” button, the help window will be
launched displaying the “Site Setup” topic.
Data Control Bar: This portion of the form allows you to change the record number currently being
edited. Use your mouse to click the buttons and perform the following actions:
Moves to the last record.
Moves to the next record.
Moves to the previous record.
Moves to the first record.
Printers and Report Viewing Forms
In several areas of the program, for example when printing a letter to a tenant, you can select to have
the report/letter sent to a different printer, or to a window. In either of these two situations, you will
be presented with a data entry form. Following are instructions on using these forms.
Select Printer Form
When printing a report or a letter, you can change the destination printer by choosing the “Printers”
button. When you do this you will see the following form:
16 • Printers and Report Viewing Forms
Chapter 1 - Introduction
All printers that have been set up within your Windows installation will be listed. Select the desired
printer by double clicking on it, or by highlighting it and choosing Print.
Setup button
Choose this button to setup the currently highlighted printer. A form similar to the following will
appear:
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Printers and Report Viewing Forms • 17
This form lets you setup printer options such as the resolution, paper size and source, amount of
memory installed, etc. The exact format and options of the form will vary depending on the printer.
For additional help using the Printer Setup form, press <F1> while it is active, or consult your
Windows documentation.
Report Viewing Form
When printing a report or a letter, you can choose to have the output sent to a window. When you do
this, the document will be displayed in a window as follows:
18 • Printers and Report Viewing Forms
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Note the buttons at the top of the report viewing window. These buttons allow you to perform
various operations as follows:
Prints the report.
Document exporting options.
Text Search.
Zooms in or out.
Moves to the first page.
Moves to the previous page.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Moves to the next page.
Moves to the last page.
Stops compiling
the report.
Printers and Report Viewing Forms • 19
Special Documentation Help File
WinSen Property Manager comes a special documentation help file, called README.HLP. This
file will contain changes made to the program since the manual was printed. To view the file, double
click on the “Readme” icon in the WinSen program group. This will launch Windows Help,
displaying the file. You can then browse the file in the usual manner.
The Demonstration Database
Every WinSen Property Manager system comes with a 100 unit demonstration database, which will
be installed the first time you install the program. This database is provided for training and tutorial
purposes. The data is complete, i.e., it contains fictitious tenants, units, letters, etc. We recommend
that you spend the time to completely familiarize yourself and your staff with the system operation,
using the demonstration database.
Run the system as if you were operating it in a “live” manner at your facility. As you review this
manual, take the time to perform each transaction as described. If you encounter a difficulty, don’t
understand a transaction, have a situation unique to your operation, etc., call us and we will gladly
assist you. Remember, the only inappropriate questions are the ones you don’t ask.
After you are comfortable with the program and its operation, you will need to delete the
demonstration database and begin the process of “customizing” the software to match your facility as
described in the following section and in “Startup” on page 259.
Site Customization Guide and Site Setup
The Site Customization Guide provided with your software consists of a series of forms which will
need to be completed, detailing your Site Information, e.g., site name and address, days to overlock,
late fees to be charged, unit sizes and rates, unit mix, etc. The information will be needed to
customize the software for your facility.
The Site Customization Guide will assist you in gathering this required information and making
certain key decisions as to how you will operate your facility with the WinSen Property Manager. It
is also a convenient place to store all of the necessary data.
Site Setup
Entering your Site Information, unit sizes and rates, and units will normally be accomplished by
Sentinel Systems based on the information you return in the Site Customization Guide. You may
also elect to input this information yourself. In either case, the Startup section beginning on page
259 will greatly assist you in this process.
If you would prefer to have SSC do the Site Customization:
We will supply you with a diskette labeled “Site Customization Disk”. If the Site Customization
Guide was sent in prior to the shipment of your software, it should be with the distribution diskettes.
If you sent it in after the shipment of your software, it will be shipped out separately. Instructions for
installing the Site Customization disk follow.
1. Place the Site Customization disk into your floppy drive. This will typically be the A: drive.
2. Choose “Run” from the Start button.
20 • Special Documentation Help File
Chapter 1 - Introduction
3. You will be presented with a form asking for the command line. Type in <A:SITE> (or B:
if installing from the B: drive) and press <ENTER>. Remember; do not include the angle
brackets in the command line.
4. The installation program will run, and inform you that the current WinSen database will be
overwritten. It will ask if you want to continue. Choose <Yes>.
When the installation program has completed, your next step will be to run the Install Customer
program and begin installing your existing customers as detailed in the “Startup” section on page
259.
If you prefer to do the Site Customization yourself:
If you have chosen to do the Site Customization yourself, it is EXTREMELY important that you
delete the demonstration database before you begin to install any “live” information. Please refer to
the Startup section on page 259 for complete instructions on how to do this and how to customize the
software for your facility. By reviewing the Startup section and filling out the Site Customization
Guide, you will have all the information necessary to perform your own customization and
installation.
Predefined Letters
WinSen Property Manager comes with a complete set of late & lien letters, billing letters, movein
contract, transfer contract, etc. The letters are supplied in Crystal Reports and Word format (in the
form of document templates (.dot) files). Since the late letters and other documents supplied with
the system are not specific to a location, we cannot guarantee that the letters are applicable for every
locality or that they meet local legal requirements. You may need to have them modified to meet
your local legal requirements.
The “generic” letters can be customized for the facility, either at the site using Crystal Reports or
Microsoft Word, or by Sentinel Systems as part of the “Site Customization and Site Setup” described
above. If desired, send us a copy of your letters along with your Site Customization Guide.
Please note the following guidelines concerning the customization of late letters by Sentinel
Systems:
•
The contracts, late letters, and other mailings provided with WinSen Property Manager are
examples only but may be used as starting points for customizing your letters.
•
A one-time customization of the letters and contracts, which are included with WinSen*,
will be done at no charge to the customer (except for the cost of shipping and handling), as
long as they remain one 8½” x 11” page in length. Additional or larger pages will be done at
the prevailing hourly rate.
•
This one-time, no-charge customization process must be done within 60 days of the shipping
date of the software.
•
“Other” letters (not included with WinSen), which need to be created or customized to work
with WinSen, will be done at the prevailing hourly rate, and should be submitted on 3½”
floppy disk in one of the following formats:
Microsoft Word (Version 6.0 or higher)
Microsoft Works (Version 3.0 or higher)
WordPerfect (Version 5.0 or higher)
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Predefined Letters • 21
ASCII Text
•
After the initial 60 day period, all customization of letters and contracts will be at the
prevailing hourly rate.
*WinSen Letters:
Contract.let
Iforfeit.let
Late1.let
Late2.let
Late3.let
Late4.let
Late5.let
Lien.let
Mbill.let
Partial.let
Prefor.let
Prelease.let
Prelien.let
Qbill.let
Ratechg.let
Rcheck.let
Sbill.let
Thankyou.let
TMSA.let
Transfer.let
Welcome.let
Ybill.let
Overview of a Typical Day
Understanding the software is best accomplished in the context of the daily operation of the facility
when using the system. A typical day can be divided into three major areas:
1. Opening for the day: You arrive at the site, open the office, turn on the computer and
access the WinSen Property Manager system. The system will run the Daily Charger which
“posts” every activity that is due on that day, e.g., rent, late fees, forfeit of pre-lease deposits,
lien processing, etc.
As part of the charger routine, the system will also “queue up” the required notices and
letters associated with the posting activities, e.g., late letters, billing statements, etc. These
notices and letters can be printed at any time during the day. You may also have the system
print these notices automatically with the Daily Charger. The Daily Charger will print a
report of its activity for the day and provide summary information about the site.
2. Daily activities: After initializing the system and running the Daily Charger, you will
proceed with normal activities, i.e., renting units, making payments, transferring tenants,
etc., for the balance of the day. At a convenient time, you will also print your notices and
letters (if they were not printed with the Daily Charger), print copies of required reports, etc.
3. Daily closing: Prior to leaving for the day, you must run your End of Period Processing.
This normally consists of a Daily Close, but may also consist of Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly
and Annual Closes. The system will provide closing reports reflecting the appropriate
period’s activity.
Before closing, you should always BACKUP YOUR DATABASE. This very important
step insures that you always have a current copy of your data. Making backups is
EXTREMELY important, and should be done each day before the close is completed.
Our recommendation for the specific steps to follow each day:
•
You arrive at the site, open the office and turn on the computer, making sure that the
computer date and time are set correctly.
•
Access WinSen Property Manager by double clicking on its icon.
22 • Overview of a Typical Day
Chapter 1 - Introduction
•
The system will display the Daily Charger window and indicate that the Charger is set to run
for today and the last date that it was run (yesterday in most cases).
•
Click on <OK> and the Daily Charger will process your database. The Daily Charger will
post charges (e.g., rent that is due today, late charges that are to be assessed today, etc.), and
depending on how the system is configured, print or “queue up” any notices (e.g., late
letters, billing statements, etc.), associated with the posted charges and other instructions
retained in the system. It also processes any rate changes that may be scheduled for the day.
•
Print the Lock/Unlock report. This report will specify, per the parameters of the system,
which units should be overlocked today, and which should have the overlock removed.
•
Walk the site and perform the lock/unlock task as well as check for trash, damage, etc.
•
Access the Reports Menu and print any of the reports you will require for the day.
•
If you do not do this with the Daily Charger, print your late notices, billing statements,
returned check notices, etc., if required. The Daily Charger will print a message on the
bottom of the “Charger Summary Report” indicating if there are any notices to be printed for
that day.
•
Remove your “reports” paper from the printer and replace with your “Lease Agreements”.
(This step is only required if you are using WinSen Property Manager to “fill in the blanks”
on your pre-printed Lease Agreements).
•
Handle your regular business throughout the day.
•
Remove your Lease Agreements and replace with “reports” paper.
•
BACK-UP YOUR DATA. THIS STEP IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT. The
importance of making backups cannot be overstated. If you do not make backups, and your
hard drive goes out (or some other disaster), you could lose all of your data.
•
Close for the day (Daily Close and all other appropriate closes).
Regarding backups
We recommend that multiple sets of diskettes be used for your backups. For example, a set for even
numbered days and a set for odd numbered days. It is even better to have a set of backup disks for
each day of the week, e.g., on Monday you backup on your Monday disks, Tuesday on your Tuesday
disks, and so on. Handling your backups in this manner will give you an extra measure of protection
for this vital financial information.
We further recommend that separate diskettes be used for Monthly, Quarterly and Yearly Closes.
This allows separate archiving for these important dates.
You should replace your backup disks about every six months. The cost of new diskettes is small
compared to the cost of potentially having to re-enter your entire database!
For information on performing a backup, see “Backing up Your Database” on page 77.
How to get Additional Help
Should you encounter a problem:
•
Read the appropriate section in the manual.
•
Call, fax, or write us at:
Chapter 1 - Introduction
How to get Additional Help • 23
Sentinel Systems Corporation
1620 Kipling Street
Lakewood, CO 80215
Voice: (303) 242-2000
Toll-free: (800) 456-9955
Fax: (303) 242-2011
Internet: www.SentinelSystems.com
Facilities covered under warranty or with a current software support agreement will receive free
telephone support. Other sites will be charged at the prevailing hourly rate in ten minute increments.
Modem support is also available.
24 • How to get Additional Help
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Daily Operations
Running the Program
Go to the Windows Desktop and “double click” on the WinSen Property Manager icon:
WinSen
Alternatively, point to the Windows Start button, then Programs, then WinSen. Then select
“WinSen Property Manager”.
Running the Daily Charger
Before continuing, check your computer date and time to be sure they are correct.
The Daily Charger performs a number of functions which are vital to the performance of the facility.
It must be run every calendar day (even those days on which the site may be closed) and is normally
done first thing each morning.
Normally the Daily Charger window will automatically be displayed the first time you start WinSen
Property Manager each day:
Choose <Continue> to run the Charger. You may also abort the Charger if you need to by choosing
the <Cancel> button, however, you should not skip the Charger unless there is a good reason to do
so.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Running the Program • 25
Special Note: If you have not done the close for the previous day, there are two things that could
happen, depending on the “Auto System Catchup” option (see “Site Setup” for further explanation of
this option). If the “Auto System Catchup” option is enabled, and the missed close(s) are not a
monthly or a yearly close, you will be given the option to “catch the system up”. Choosing to do this
allows you to update the system database without changing the computer date.
If the “Auto System Catchup” option is not enabled, and you have not done the close for the previous
day, the Daily Charger window will not be displayed. Instead, you will see a window with a
message that the close hasn’t been done, and the system will proceed to the main menu. In this case,
you should change the system date back to the appropriate day (the day you are doing the close for),
print the close, make a backup, then change the date back to today and run the Charger. To return to
the charger screen after you have accomplished the above steps, select the “Daily Charger” option
under the Utilities menu.
The Charger will post charges to accounts within the system that are due on that day, e.g., Rent, Late
Fees, Rate Increases, etc. The Charger will also place tenants into “lien” status if the system is
configured to do so. In addition, the Charger “queues up” Late Letters and Billing Notices to be
printed during the day. It also locks out delinquent tenants access code (if you have a compatible
gate access system), according to the “days to overlock” number in Site Setup. All charges posted
and all mailings which are queued up are done so in accordance with the parameters established in
Site Setup under the Maintenance menu. The single exception is Billing Notices which are
established on a tenant by tenant basis, normally as part of the Assign Tenant process.
The Daily Charger will always print a Daily Charger Summary and identify the date on which it was
printed. This summary lists the activities performed by the Daily Charger for that day, e.g., “Total
Rents Charged”, “Total Monthly Charges”, etc.
Next Auction Date
The next scheduled auction date will be shown in this field. This information is used by the system
when it is placing tenants into “Lien Status” automatically (for details on the automatic lien
processing option, see “Late Cycles/Fees” on page 151), or when using the manual lien process (see
“Process Lien Status” on page 92). If you know when the next auction date will be, enter it at this
time before continuing.
Printer button
The Printer button on the daily charger window allows you to choose which printer you would like
the charger report to print on. Press it to display the Select Printer form. For instructions on the use
of this form, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
Printing the Lock/Unlock Report
Access the Report Menu and select the Lock/Unlock report. For specific details on how to print
reports, see the “Report & Graph Menu” section of the manual. The Lock/Unlock report will
provide you with specific recommendations on which units need to be unlocked or locked that day.
For example, if the system has locked out a unit from the gate access system that morning because
they did not pay the rent, the system will recommend that you overlock (double lock the unit) that
tenant.
26 • Printing the Lock/Unlock Report
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
View/Edit Tenant - Table and Form Views
Both of these options are found under the Main Menu. All tenant operations except for moveins are
done from either of them. The only difference is the format the information is presented in. In the
View/Edit Tenant - Table form, your tenant information is displayed in a tabular format, allowing
you to quickly view and/or edit information about numerous units very quickly. In the View/Edit Form, you look at one unit at a time in a “single record view” format.
It is important to realize that both forms allow you to perform all tenant operations (except moveins).
If desired, you can have both of these forms open in separate windows at the same time, allowing
you to view your tenants in both formats at once. Merely select one of the view/edit options from
the Main Menu, and then select the other. You will then have both windows open on your desktop at
once. They are closed in the normal Windows manner, e.g., by pressing <Alt-F4> or by selecting
Close from the control menu.
The Toolbar
Both of the tenant forms have a Toolbar at the top of the form. The Toolbar has a series of buttons
with an icon and descriptive text showing the function of that button. The Toolbar allows you to
quickly perform an operation by clicking the appropriate button with your mouse.
As you change records using the data control bar you’ll note that some of the Toolbar options will
be “grayed out”, meaning that particular function is not available for this unit. For example, if the
currently selected unit is vacant, the options available on the Toolbar are limited to operations that
can be performed on vacant units. If the currently selected unit is occupied, all Toolbar options are
enabled.
The buttons on the toolbar (from left to right) perform the following operations on the currently
selected unit:
•
Make a payment. See “Payments” on page 45.
•
Move out a tenant. See “Moveouts” on page 67.
•
Transfer a tenant from one unit to another. See “Transfers” on page 69.
•
Use the Notepad feature. The Notepad allows you to put in extensive notes on a unit. See
“Notepad” on page 106.
•
Use the Reminders feature. Reminders associated with a unit will print on the Daily
Charger on the day that the reminder is scheduled. See “Reminders” on page 107.
•
Print a letter to a customer. See “Print a Letter” on page 85.
•
Print a tenant history report, which can be viewed in a window, or sent to your reports
printer. See “Tenant History” on page 84.
•
Review a tenants transactions. See “View Transactions” on page 83.
•
Change the rent due day for a tenant. See “Change Due Day” on page 86.
•
Change a tenants passcode. See “Change Security Information” on page 89.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
View/Edit Tenant - Table and Form Views • 27
•
Lock out or readmit a tenant. See “Lock or Unlock a Tenant” on page 91.
•
Cancel a transaction. See “Canceling a Transaction” on page 42.
•
Initiate or close out a lien for seriously delinquent tenants. See “Process Lien Status” on
page 92.
•
Change the status of a unit. For example, make a unit unrentable, or complimentary. See
“Change Unit Status” on page 87.
•
Issue, change, or cancel insurance policies. See “Insurance Policies: Adding, Changing or
Canceling” on page 43.
•
Post a returned check. See “Posting a Returned Check” on page 95.
•
Associate a picture with the unit. See “Pictures” on page 96.
•
Run the Windows Calculator. See “The Calculator” on page 106.
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Table” Window
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
Information about your tenants will be displayed in a tabular format, starting with the unit number.
Not all of the data can be seen at once. To see information in the table that is not currently visible,
use your mouse to press on the horizontal or vertical scroll bars at the bottom and side of the window
to scroll the table. You can also use the arrow keys and the <PgUp>, <PgDn> keys to scroll the
display. In addition, the <Home> key will move the display to the first column, while the <End>
key will scroll the display to the last column.
Note the five buttons on this form:
28 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Table” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Close: closes the form. If you have made changes that have not been saved, the system will
ask if you want to save your changes before closing.
Cancel: cancels the form. If you have made changes that have not been saved, the system
will ask if you want to save your changes before closing.
Find: allows you to search for a unit or customer. For instructions on the use of the Find
function, see “Find Unit Function” on page 101.
Old Tenants: pressing this button will cause the system to display your former tenants.
When this is done, the button changes to “Current Tenants”, and you would press it again to
return to viewing and editing your current tenants.
Help: displays “on-line” help. You may also press the <F1> key at any time to access the
help file.
To edit customer data: click with your mouse on the field you wish to edit. The mouse pointer will
change to an “anvil” shape, allowing you to make changes. Note that not all fields can be edited. If
you make changes and decide you don’t want to keep them, press <Esc> to abandon them.
Otherwise, the changes you make will be saved when you move the mouse pointer to a new row or
click the Close button.
To rearrange the order of the displayed fields: move your mouse pointer to the heading of the
column that you want to move, then click and hold the left mouse button. When you do this, your
mouse cursor turns into a horizontally oriented “double arrow”, denoting that you can move left or
right. While holding the mouse button down, drag the column to its new location, then release the
button at the desired position. You can also click on the “drop down list” that appears when the
column heading is clicked to display a list of fields. Then select the field that you want to appear in
that column position.
To resize or hide a column: note that as you move your mouse pointer across the headings in the
table, the pointer changes to a “double arrow” when it is on the border between two columns. Click
and hold the left mouse button, then drag the mouse pointer left or right. If you drag left, you’ll be
resizing the column to the left of the pointer. If you drag right, you resize the column to the right.
Release the mouse button when the column is the desired size. You can resize a column to zero
width to hide it.
By rearranging, re-sizing and/or hiding columns in the manner described in the preceding two
paragraphs you can quickly arrange the displayed customer data in any order you wish. The form
will save and restore these settings when it is closed and then reopened. To go back to the ‘factory
default” settings, hold down the Shift key when opening the form.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Table” Window • 29
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Information about your tenants will be displayed in a “single unit” format. Note that immediately
below the Toolbar is found the Unit #, Size, Customer ID, and Status of the unit currently
displayed. Below this line is a series of Tabs that you click with your mouse to display specific
information about the unit.
Note the five buttons on this form:
Save: closes the form and saves any changes that you have made.
Cancel: cancels the form. If you have made changes that have not been saved, the system
will ask if you want to save your changes before closing.
Find: allows you to search for a unit or customer. For instructions on the use of the Find
function, see “Find Unit Function” on page 101.
Help: displays “on-line” help. You may also press the <F1> key at any time to access the
help file.
Old Tenants: pressing this button will cause the system to display your former tenants.
When this is done, the button changes to “Current Tenants”, and you would press it again to
return to viewing and editing your current tenants.
The Tabs and the information they display for viewing/editing are arranged as follows:
30 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Tenant Info tab (View/Edit Tenant Data)
Click this tab to display and/or edit the basic customer information.
Name & Address
The basic name and address information. Information shown is the Name, Address Lines 1 and 2,
City, State, and Zip Code. Fill in the data as appropriate.
Phone Numbers
These fields are for the home phone, business phone, fax phone, and mobile (cellular) phone
numbers. Fill in the data as appropriate.
License and Tracking Number
Use the License Number field for the tenant’s license number. The Tracking Number can be used
to record any information, e.g., lease agreement number, social security number, etc.
E-Mail Address / EMail Notices
Fill in the tenant’s E-Mail address, if applicable. If Winsen is properly configured, a valid E-Mail
address is filled in, and the EMail Notices checkbox is selected, WinSen can E-Mail notices and
receipts to tenants.
RV Length
The RV length is used to calculate the unit rate during a move-in, if you charge “by the foot” for RV
storage.
Language
The language option is used if you wish to print different late letters for some tenants than others.
For example, you could have tenants who prefer to receive mailings in Spanish. To support this, you
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window • 31
would create a sub-folder named “Spanish” in your WinSen installation folder. You would then
copy your Spanish language letters into that sub-folder, and select the “Spanish” option in the
Language drop-down list for the applicable tenant(s). Those tenants would then receive the Spanish
language letters. This feature also supports receipts.
To establish a list of language options, it is necessary to modify the langn variables in the winsen.ini
file. Details on modifying the winsen.ini file are found in “Appendix H – Initialization File
Variables” on page 230.
2nd Contact tab
Click this tab to enter, edit, and display the 2nd contact information about a unit, i.e., the party that is
listed as a second contact to the primary tenant.
Send Duplicate Notices
If you would like to send a duplicate of all notices generated by WinSen Property Manager to the
2nd contact party, check this box. Each 2nd contact notice will be customized, referencing the
primary tenant and situation, but will be addressed to the 2nd contact party.
Billing tab
Click this tab to show and edit billing information about a unit.
32 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Taxable
Check this box if this tenant is taxable. In most cases you should check this box, unless the tenant is
a tax exempt entity such as a religious organization. If your facility doesn’t have to charge tax, your
tax rates should be set to “0.00%” in Site Setup. Do not clear the taxable status check box unless the
tenant is truly tax exempt. Thus, if your situation changes and you have to start charging tax, you
won’t have to update each customer record to change their taxable status; instead you would only
have to make a change to your tax rates.
Send Bill and Next Bill
WinSen Property Manager has the ability to send bills to your tenants on a recurring basis. These
two entries define what type of billing is to be done for this unit, and when the next bill is to be
printed. The Send Bill field has the following choices: None (no bills are to be sent), Monthly (send
bills each month), Quarterly (send bills every three months), Semi-Annually (send bills twice a
year), and Annually (send bills once a year). Select the desired choice from the drop down menu,
then fill in the Next Bill date (the next time you want the system to print a bill for this tenant).
Actually printing the bills is handled in Late Letters & Mailings. Note that the Daily Charger will
update the Next Bill date from then on, so that the billing process is handled automatically by the
system.
Credit Card Information
The next four entries are for credit card information. If the customer desires to have their storage
unit rental billed to their credit card automatically, fill in the Credit Card Type, Number,
Expiration Date, check the Automatic billing box, and set the number in the AutoBill Periods to
the number of periods the credit card will be charged (For example, when the rate charge method for
a tenant is set to Anniversary and the Autobill Periods is set to 3, the customer credit card would be
charged for 3 months of rent.). When that tenants rent is due, and if the credit card expiration date
is valid, the system will automatically generate a transaction and advance the paid-to-date on the unit
when the Daily Charger is run. An “autobill notice” will be printed on the charger report, alerting
you to process the credit card transaction through the credit card company. If the credit card
expiration date has passed the paid-to-date will not be advanced and a notice will be printed on the
charger report warning you of this.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window • 33
Note: If you have the ICVerify or PCCharge program and the proper arrangements with your
financial institution, the system will process autobill transactions automatically during the System
Charger by passing these transactions to the ICVerify or PCCharge program. If you are not using
ICVerify or PCCharge and the system generates an autobill transaction, and the credit card is then
declined, you should cancel the transaction as explained in “Canceling a Transaction” on page 42.
For more information regarding using WinSen and ICVerify or PCCharge, see “Appendix J – Using
WinSen with ICVerify” on page 233.
Automatic Debit Information
Immediately to the right are the automatic debit information fields. If a customer chooses to have
their savings or checking account debited as payment for the rental unit, enter the routing number
of the financial institution, then enter the checking or savings account number. Then check the
automatic billing box. For more information on this feature contact the Sentinel Systems sales
department.
Late Type
The system provides three options for charging late fees and printing notices for a tenant:
1. Normal - all late fees are charged and all notices are printed.
2. Reminders - late fees will not be charged, but all notices will be printed.
3. None - no late fees are charged or notices printed.
Select the desired option from the drop down list. Note that changing the late type for a unit does not
change the balance.
Late Fee Cycle
There will be one or more late fee cycles to choose from depending on how the facility is configured.
Select the desired option from the drop down list. Note that changing the late fee cycle for a unit
does not retroactively change the balance. Any late fees that have been charged will remain. For
more information about configuring late fee cycles see “Late Cycles/Fees” on page 151.
Rate Charge Method
This field displays the Rate Charge Method for this tenant. This is normally established during the
move-in process, and should not be changed after move-in except in unusual situations. For further
information, see “Amount Due tab (Assign Tenant)” on page 63.
Demo/Adv. Tab
Clicking this tab displays the Demographics and Advertising Effectiveness entries for this
customer.
34 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Information on this form is normally captured during the move-in process, and can be edited here if
necessary. For more details on the various options see “Demographics/Advertising Effectiveness
tab” on page 59.
Insurance Tab
Click this tab to display information about this customers insurance policy, if any.
The policy number, monthly premium, coverage, start date, and paid to date will be displayed. Note
that only the policy number field can be edited. To add, change, or cancel the tenant’s coverage, see
“Insurance Policies: Adding, Changing or Canceling” on page 43.
Security Tab
Click this tab to display security information about the unit.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window • 35
Other Parties
Listed here are “Other parties with access”; other parties who the tenant has notified you are also
allowed access to the storage unit. You can edit the data if needed.
Passcode
The tenant’s passcode for gate access is listed for reference. To change it, see “Change Security
Information” on page 89.
Card Number
This is the tenant’s card number. This field applies if you are using card readers for access control.
To change it, see “Change Security Information” on page 89.
Time Zone & Access Level
The tenant’s time zone and access level assignment. Time zones allow you to define your gate hours
for tenants, while access levels allow you to restrict tenant’s access to certain parts of your storage
facility. To change the time zone or access level assignment for this tenant, see “Change Security
Information” on page 89.
Note: For more information on Time Zones and Access Levels, or if you need to change the actual
gate hours or the access level definitions, see the WinSen Sentinel manual.
Interface Number
This is the unit number that will be sent to certain access control systems whenever there is a
transaction involving the gate, e.g., move-in, move-out, transfer, lock-out or re-admit. This is a
separate field to provide support for alpha-numeric unit numbers. To change it, see “Add/Remove
Units” on page 185.
36 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Additional Fields
In addition to the above fields, the system displays on this form a number of other variables within
the database relating to this tenant record. These fields are for viewing only and appear as follows:
•
Leased: a checkmark indicates that the unit is leased.
•
Locked: if checked, indicates the unit is locked out (their gate code is deactivated).
•
On site: if checked, the tenant is “on-site” (they have keyed in to the site but have not
exited).
The next three fields only apply if your installation is a door alarm system.
•
Permanently disabled: if checked, the alarm on this unit is a permanently disabled alarm
(PDA). This means the alarm is disabled on this unit until it is re-armed by the system
operator. To disable or enable this unit alarm on a permanent basis, see “Change Security
Information” on page 89. For more information, see the WinSen Sentinel manual.
•
Timed disabled: if checked, the alarm on this unit is a time disabled alarm (TDA).
Normally, unit alarms are enabled or disabled by keypad or card reader access or by operator
intervention. In some instances, though, it may be desirable for certain alarms to be
automatically enabled or disabled on the basis of time of day. For example, building access
doors are best alarmed on a timed basis. The system provides a feature for designating
certain units as time disabled alarms. Note that for this option to be functional, it must be
enabled in “Setups” in WinSen Sentinel. To change this option, see “Change Security
Information” on page 89. For additional information on time disabled alarms, see the
WinSen Sentinel manual.
•
Door open: if checked, the door on this unit is open (the door status switch circuit is open).
The next two fields address the tenants locked/readmit status:
•
Locked today: when checked, this field means the tenant was overlocked today, either by
the Daily Charger or manually by the system operator.
•
Unlocked today: when checked, this field indicates that the tenant has been unlocked today,
e.g., they were overlocked but have been re-admitted, either by making their delinquent rent
payment or by the system operator manually unlocking the unit.
Unit Status tab
Select this tab to display the Unit Status form:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window • 37
Expected Vacancy
An optional entry, this is the date the tenant has given you when they are planning to move out. If it
is filled in the unit will appear on the Expected Vacancy Report (see “Report & Graph Menu” on
page 117).
Prelease Till
If this unit is Preleased, this is the date on which the Prelease Deposit will be forfeited. To extend a
prelease, merely edit the Prelease Till date.
Unit Rate
The monthly rental rate for this unit. You can only edit the unit rate if the “Allow view/edit rate
change” option in Site Setup is checked. Note that changing the unit rate will not change the unit
balance until the rent comes due again.
Monthly Charges
The amount of recurring charges to be assessed to this unit along with the rent each month. For
example, items such as electricity, late access, recurring use of your dumpster, etc. Note that
changing this amount will have no effect on the tenant’s balance until the rent comes due again.
Automatic Rate Change & Last Rate Change
Check the Automatic Rate Change box if the tenant is subject to automatic rate changes. This option
will have no effect unless you have set up automatic rate changes as specified in “Rate Change
Options” on page 189. If the box is not checked, automatic rate changes will not affect this unit.
The Last Rate Change date shows the last time the rate was changed on this unit. It is for reference
only and cannot be changed here.
38 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Walk Number
This is the “walk number” for this unit. The walk number designates the order you would “walk the
site”. Each unit is assigned a walk number in the add/remove units option. For more explanation,
or to change the walk number for this unit, see “Add/Remove Units” on page 185.
Last Receipt
The date of the last payment on this unit.
Move-in
The date the tenant moved in (if unit is occupied).
Move-Out
The date the tenant moved out (if unit is vacant).
Prelease Deposit
If this unit is preleased, this is the amount of deposit to hold the unit. See “Prelease Till” above.
Deposit
The amount of security deposit being held on this unit. If the unit is not occupied, this is the
“standard deposit” for the unit.
Times Late
The number of times this tenant has been charged a late fee.
Previous Rate
The last rate for this unit, e.g., the rate in effect before the last increase.
Returned Check tab
Click this tab to display returned check information on this unit:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window • 39
At the top of this form will be the number of Returned Checks, followed by information about the
most recent returned check, if any. The Check Date, Check Number, Check Amount, and NSF
Amount will be displayed.
The information on this form is for viewing only and cannot be edited. If you need to post a returned
check to this tenant, click the Return Check button on the Toolbar as detailed in “Posting a
Returned Check” on page 95.
Balance tab
Click this tab to display the balance information on this unit:
The data is for display only and cannot be edited. All amounts due on the unit will be shown. The
fields are arranged as follows:
40 • Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Rent due: The amount of rent due will be displayed in its aging categories. The Current amount is
rent due for the current month, while 30 days is the amount of rent 30-59 days past due. The 60
days amount is rent 60-89 days past due, and 90 days is rent due over 90 days.
Late Charges: The amount of late charges due.
Use & Sales Tax: The amount of Use Tax (tax on rent in most cases) and Sales Tax (normally tax
on merchandise) past due.
Lien Charges: The amount of lien charges due.
Insurance: The past due insurance premium.
Monthly Charges: Past due monthly charges will be shown here.
Admin. Fee: The amount of unpaid Administration fee. The administration fee is a non-refundable
charge collected during a move-in. If the fee is not paid on the move-in, it will show up here.
Misc. Charges: Unpaid Miscellaneous charges will be displayed in this field. Miscellaneous
charges are one-time charges for items such as locks, boxes, etc.
Misc. Credits: If the customer has a credit on their account for any reason, it will be shown in this
field.
Returned Check: If the tenant has a returned check currently posted to their account, it will be
shown here. To post a returned check, see “Posting a Returned Check” on page 95.
NSF: The amount of “Non Sufficient Funds” charge assessed to this unit for a returned check.
Deposit: The amount of past due security deposit. Normally the security deposit is paid during the
move-in, but if it isn’t, that amount will show up here.
Total Due: The total amount due for this unit.
Due Day: The day of each month when rent is due on this unit, e.g., “1” means rent is due on the
first of each month.
Paid to Date: The next date when rent is due.
Other tab
Click this tab to display other information about this unit. Normally, the only item found here is
“comments”, a short line of text you can enter in association with a unit if you don’t need the more
extensive capabilities the Notes feature offers.
If the unit type for the current unit displayed has the Enable Locations checkbox in the Unit Types
screen checked; the Other Tab will also show the Unit Locations grid:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window • 41
The Unit Locations grid allows you to track the location of mobile storage units. The fields for
these additional records include: Scheduled Delivery Date, Delivery Date, Scheduled Pickup Date,
Pickup Date, Address 1, Address 2, City, State, Zip, Latitude and Longitude. If the Latitude and
Longitude fields are used, the numbers need to be entered in decimal format. Thus, if you are
entering coordinates and the location is south of the equator or west of the Prime Meridian in
Greenwich, England, express the latitude or longitude as a negative value; for example, -15.75
degrees latitude and -64.25 degrees longitude.
These fields can be used to help store and track information for mobile storage units.
The Unit Location Report in the Report & Graph menu will print a report with all units that have
Unit Location information.
Canceling a Transaction
The Cancel Transaction option allows you to cancel the last transaction made to a tenant’s account.
For example, if a payment was credited to the wrong account, that transaction can be canceled and
you can then apply the payment to the correct account.
All regular payments can be canceled. Move-ins and preleases can also be canceled, provided you
have not closed for the day. Transfers cannot be canceled, however, the “Paid By” information can
be edited, e.g., you could change a payment from “cash” to “check” or “check” to “card”.
The system will print all canceled transactions on the Daily Close; however they will not be counted
in the totals.
To access this option, select the “Cancel” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table). The following window will appear:
42 • Canceling a Transaction
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
The system will display the last transaction for the unit, and the message “Do you want to change
only the ‘paid by’ amounts?”
If you answer <Yes>, the system will display the Paid By window with the amounts from the last
transaction and allow you to make your changes. Type in the corrected information (for example,
change the payment from cash to check) and choose “OK”. Thus, if a payment was entered
incorrectly as cash when it should have been check or card, you can correct this mistake without
having to re-enter the entire transaction.
If you answer <No> to the “Do you wish to change only the “Paid By” amounts, the system will ask
you, “Cancel transaction, are you sure?” Choose “Yes” cancel the transaction.
Note: When you cancel a transaction, the transaction type will be changed to “666”. The system will
also write another transaction, type “676”, which is a “canceled transaction pointer”. This transaction
“points” to the canceled transaction number, and will appear on the close for the day.
If the last transaction on the account cannot be canceled, the system will display the message
“Unable to cancel last transaction”. If you get this message, you can usually modify the “Paid By”
information.
Insurance Policies: Adding, Changing or Canceling
WinSen Property Manager provides the site the ability to act as an administrator for Bob Bader
Insurance in providing your tenants the opportunity to insure the contents of their unit. Offering
your tenants the option of insuring their goods can significantly reduce the site’s liability in the event
of damage or loss.
The system supports the Bob Bader Insurance Program (among others) and can only be accessed
if the Insurance Company information has been established in your program by Sentinel Systems
Corporation.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Insurance Policies: Adding, Changing or Canceling • 43
Note: The carrier offered above replaces your “counter top” insurance program and offers you and
your tenants many advantages. To get complete information, contact Sentinel Systems at (800) 4569955 or Bob Bader at (888)-223-3726.
This option allows you to add, change, or cancel insurance policies for an existing tenant. Issuing
insurance for a new move-in is normally accomplished during the move-in transaction (see
“Insurance Information tab” on page 61.
To access this option, select the “Insurance” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selecting the proper unit number.
The following form will appear:
Insurance information shown is:
Insurance: Will be checked if this tenant has insurance.
Policy Number: The insurance policy number, if any.
Coverage Amount: The insurance coverage for this tenant.
Premium Amount: The monthly premium for the insurance coverage.
Paid to Date: The insurance paid to date.
Past Due Amount: The amount due on this unit, if any.
Premium Due Now: The amount of insurance premium due as a result of this transaction.
Site Carrier: The insurance carrier.
Prorate Days & Months: The number of days & months of prepaid rent, if any. This will be the
amount of time the system will charge or credit the insurance policy.
To add insurance coverage
In the Insurance Policy form, check the “Insurance” box, and enter the insurance policy number.
Next select the desired amount of insurance coverage from the drop down list. Choose “OK” and the
system will calculate the charges due and display the Paid By window. After entering the method of
payment (see “The Paid By Window” on page 100) the system will allow you to print one or more
receipts detailing the transaction, and the insurance coverage will then be effective.
44 • Insurance Policies: Adding, Changing or Canceling
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
To cancel insurance coverage
In the Insurance Policy form, clear the “Insurance” check box, then choose “OK” to cancel the
policy. The system will cancel the insurance policy and allow you to print one or more receipts
detailing the transaction. Please note that prepaid premiums are not refundable.
To change insurance coverage
From the drop down list of insurance coverage amounts, select the new coverage. If the coverage is
increased the system will calculate the prorated amount of premium due and display the Paid by
Window. If the coverage is decreased the customer will receive a credit for the difference in
premium amounts. Then choose the OK button to save your changes.
Payments
The Payments function is used for entering customer payments, posting one-time charges and
posting one-time credits. To access it, first select the proper unit from either of the tenant forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Table or View/Edit - Form). Then press the Payment button on the Toolbar.
The following form will be displayed with the cursor positioned in the “Additional Number of
months to pay” field:
The Payment window has a “Due” and a “Pay” column. The Due column will show the amounts
that are due on this unit in their respective categories. The Pay column is where you will tell the
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Payments • 45
system which categories this payment is to be applied to. Also found on this form are the following
buttons:
OK: brings up the Paid By window. The sum of the amounts that have been entered under
the Pay column will be shown in the “Amount Due” field of the Paid By window.
Cancel: cancels the Payment Screen.
Multiple Units: invokes “multiple unit mode” used for making payments when a tenant has
two or more units. This button will not be enabled unless the tenant has multiple units.
Posting payments to such a tenant will be explained in detail later in the following sections.
Pay Total Due: used when the tenant is paying the total due. This button will cause the
system to copy all amounts from the Due column to the Pay column, and then display the
Paid By window.
Pay None: This button clears all the amounts in the pay column.
Help: invokes “on-line” help. You can also press the F1 key at any time to do the same
thing.
The Basic Steps for Posting a Payment
In most cases, posting a payment is quite simple. Here are the basic steps:
1. If the tenant’s rent is not due yet, enter in one or more “Additional Months to Pay” in that
field.
2. Move to the Pay column and type in the amounts to be applied in the appropriate category.
For example, $35.00 towards rent and $10.00 towards late fee, etc. If the customer is paying
all charges that are due (the normal situation) you can merely press the “Pay Total Due”
button to display the Paid By window.
3. If you didn’t use the Pay Total Due button in step 2, click on “OK” to display the Paid By
window, where you will enter in the appropriate cash, check, or credit card amounts. For
instructions on the use of the Paid By window, see “The Paid By Window” on page 100.
4. You will now have the opportunity to print one or more receipts detailing the transaction.
These are the basic steps that you will use in most situations. Detailed explanations of other types of
transactions that may arise follow.
Rent Payments and the Paid to Date
How does WinSen Property Manager advance the paid to date? The system takes the amount that
you apply towards rent, and divides it by the unit rate to know how many months to advance the
paid-to-date. For example, if you apply $35.00 towards rent on a $35 per month unit, the paid-todate will be advanced by 1 month. A $70.00 payment would advance the paid-to-date by 2 months,
and so on. But what happens if you apply a $25.00 payment to this unit? Because the system does
not work with partial months, it will not change the paid to date and will reduce the amount of rent
owed by $25.00. If you were to apply a $50.00 payment to this unit, the paid-to-date would be
advanced by 1 month, and the tenants balance would be reduced by $15.00.The system will advance
the paid-to-date by as many months as will divide evenly into the rent payment, then reduce the
tenants balance accordingly.
Rate Changes After Rent has Been Charged
There is one circumstance where the above paragraph does not apply: when the unit rate changes
after rent has been charged to a unit. For example, let’s suppose a unit has a $35.00 monthly rate.
46 • Payments
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
The rent is due on the first of March, but the tenant does not pay their rent for March. Then, on April
1st, a rate change that you have scheduled takes effect. This rate change brings the unit rate to
$40.00. After changing the rate, the system will charge April’s rent to the unit at the new rate,
bringing the total past due rent to $75.00. When you make a $75.00 rent payment to this unit, the
system will detect that the past due rent is not an even multiple of the unit rate, and will ask you if
you want to “advance the paid-to-date one extra month?”
When this message appears on your screen, you should answer <Y> to the question if a rate change
has taken place. In the above situation, this would advance the paid-to-date by two months if the
question is answered with a <Y>, or one month if the question is answered with <N>.
Note: The “Advance the paid-to-date by one extra month?” question will appear any time a rent
payment is made where there is an odd amount of rent paid, and an odd amount of rent is past due.
The circumstances of the particular transaction dictate what your response to the question should be.
For example, if you transfer a tenant from one unit to another, the system will prorate the rent on the
old and the new units. If you do this without paying the charges, an odd amount of rent will then be
past due. When you pay these charges in the Payment window, the “Advance the paid-to-date by
one extra month?” question will appear. In this situation, you would answer <N> to the question.
Additional number of months to pay
If the tenant’s rent is not due yet, you will need to enter the number of “Additional No. months to
pay” in this field. Enter the appropriate number of months (in most cases, this will be 1). The
system will respond by filling in the normal amounts (the monthly amounts due times the number of
month’s to pay you have entered) in the Due column.
If the tenant’s rent has already come due, you do not need to enter anything in this field unless the
tenant is paying additional months beyond what has already been charged.
Prior Credit
A customer might have a prior credit on their account from moveins with a credit balance, transfers
from a larger to a smaller unit, or credits given. In this case, when you bring up the unit in the
Payment window, the prior credit will be included in the Misc. Credits window. You can choose how
much of the credit should be applied to this payment, by bringing up the Misc. Credits window, then
typing the amount to be used. By default, all of the prior credit will be applied towards the current
payment. An example is shown below:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Payments • 47
In this example, the tenant has a prior credit from a movein where the credit issued was greater than
the sum of the movein charges. We are now taking a payment from the customer, and have decided
to use only 25.00 of the prior credit. After the payment is complete, the remaining credit balance
would be 57.85 – 25.00 = 32.85.
Note that in most cases, you can just use all of the prior credit and there is no need to change it.
Miscellaneous Credits
Miscellaneous credits are used when you want to credit a tenant for charges due. For example, a
tenant may have convinced you to waive the late fee that was charged to their account. Or, you
might be giving them one month free rent for paying six months at once. Issue miscellaneous credits
by using the Miscellaneous Account window as explained in “Miscellaneous Account Windows” on
page 99.
Credits issued in this manner will be subtracted from the total being paid by the customer. After
issuing the credit, you would then apply it to the appropriate category. For example if you are
crediting a late fee, you would first issue the credit, then apply the same amount towards late fees
under the Pay column, effectively paying the late fee using the credit that was issued.
Giving Credit to be Used at a Future Time
To credit a customer account without taking a payment:
1. Issue the miscellaneous credit as explained above.
2. Apply it to the rent category under the Pay column. If the tenant’s rent is not due yet, this
will require entering 1 in the “Additional months to pay” field, because the system will not
let you go to the rent field under the Pay column unless there is an amount under the Due
column.
3. Click on OK to display the Paid By window, which will have “0.00” due.
4. Then click on “OK” in the Paid By window to complete the transaction.
The credit issued will be deducted from the rent balance on the customer’s account.
NOTE: If we were to apply $35.00 to rent on a $35.00 per month unit with a misc. credit, the
tenant’s paid-to-date would be advanced by one month, and they would not have any credit left over.
The system will always follow the rules noted above in “Rent payments and the paid to date”
whether the amounts are being paid with credit or with money.
Credit Used For Payments
Payments with credits will not show up as income; only the actual money collected will be shown as
income on the closing reports. The credit used will instead be reflected in the “Credits” section of
the site summary report. Thus, you always know how much credit has been used.
Posting a Full Payment
When your customer is paying in full, you can handle it in one of two ways:
1. Press the “Pay total due” button: pressing this button will cause all amounts shown in the
Due column to be duplicated in the Pay column. This is the preferred method, since it is the
fastest and most efficient. The paid-to-date will advance by the appropriate number of
months, and the Paid By window will appear, where you will enter the amount paid in the
appropriate cash, check or card fields.
NOTE: Do not press the Pay total due button when you are posting a partial or an
overpayment. Partial or overpayments will be described in the following section.
48 • Payments
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
2. Type in the amounts to be paid manually in the Pay column: alternatively, you can
manually type in the amounts to be paid toward each category, and then click OK. The
paid-to-date will advance by the appropriate number of months, and the Paid By window
will appear, where you will enter the amount paid in the appropriate cash, check or card
fields.
After entering the method of payment in the Paid By window, the system will give you the
opportunity to print a receipt reflecting the transaction.
Posting Partial or Over Payments
Partial Payments
If the tenant is not paying all charges that are due you will need to manually type the amounts you
are paying towards each category under the Pay column. Below is an example:
In the example, the tenant has sent in a check for $66.00, neglecting the $10.00 late fee. We can
either:
1. Pay all the rent due, leaving the late fee unpaid. In this case, the system will advance the
paid to date by one month. The chances of actually collecting the late fee are diminished.
2. Or we can pay the late fee and apply the remainder to the rent, as in the example. In this
case the system will NOT change the paid to date, and it will reduce the rent balance by
$54.00 for the partial rent payment. Since the partial rent payment does not advance the paid
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Payments • 49
to date, the tenant will continue to accrue late fees (if your system is setup to charge
additional late fees).
Site policy will dictate how to apply a partial payment to a tenant’s account. WinSen Property
Manager gives you a great deal of flexibility in this regard.
After entering the method of payment in the Paid by window, the system will give you the
opportunity to print a receipt reflecting the transaction.
Over Payments
Over payments are handled in the same manner as partial payments. You need to manually type in
the amounts that are to be applied in the proper categories under the Pay column. For example, if a
customer owes you $45.00 in rent for the month but they have sent in a check for $50.00, you would
post the $50.00 payment towards rent by typing in that amount in the rent category under the Pay
column. Then click on the OK button to display the Paid By window. The paid to date will advance
by one month, and the tenant will have a -5.00 rent balance on their account when the transaction is
completed.
Miscellaneous Charges During Payments
In the Payment window, the Misc. Charges accounts are used to post Miscellaneous Charges to a
tenants account. Miscellaneous charges can be issued and paid at the same time as other payments,
e.g. rent, late fees, insurance, etc. To add a Misc. Charge, you first select an item from the Account
Description drop down list and then enter the dollar amount for the selected Misc. Charge, then click
the add button to add it to the list of Misc. Charges to the tenants account. If you wanted to add
another Misc. Charge to the tenants record, you would select another Misc. Charge item and enter
the dollar amount and click add. When you are finished adding all Misc. Charges then click on OK.
A Misc. Charge amount can only be changed at the time it was added to the tenants account.
If you are selling an inventory item, then from the Payment window you would select Merchandise
Charges and use it just like the Misc. Charges screen, except you will select items from your current
inventory, then enter the quantity to be sold.
50 • Payments
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Processing a One-Time Charge
Assess miscellaneous charges by using the Misc. Charge window as explained in “Miscellaneous
Account Windows” on page 99. When you close the Miscellaneous Charge window the charges that
were assessed will appear under the Due and the Pay column and will be added to the amount the
tenant is paying. They will be reflected on the receipt of the transaction and on the closing reports in
the appropriate category.
Posting a Miscellaneous Charge as a Past Due Amount
WinSen Property Manager will allow you to sell an item listed in your Miscellaneous Charges to an
existing tenant on a “credit” basis, i.e., let them have the merchandise and post the amount to the
account which will be paid at some point in the future. You can post a charge to a tenant’s account
for any purpose in this manner, e.g. cleaning fees, utility charges, or any one-time charge that you
need to assess a tenant.
Sales on credit are accomplished in the same manner as sales which are paid for at the time...except,
when the Paid By window appears, click on OK without paying anything. The system will display a
message verifying that you really want to do this. Choose “Yes” to post the charge as a past due
amount.
Posting a Multiple Unit Payment
To post a payment to a tenant who has multiple units:
1. Bring up any one of their units in the Payment window.
2. Press the “Multiple Units” button.
3. The following form will be displayed:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Payments • 51
The “Multiple Unit Payment” window shows all units that are part of the group. For each unit in the
group, the following information is displayed:
•
Unit: the unit number.
•
Pays to: the date this payment will advance the paid-to-date to.
•
Rate: the unit rate.
•
Past Due: the current past due balance of this unit.
•
Balance: the current balance of this unit (past due + amounts brought up by “Months to
Pay”). If the unit is not yet due, the “Multiple Unit Payment” window will automatically
assess 1 additional month to pay and that amount will be shown in the Balance column.
•
Months: if the tenant desires to pay additional months beyond what has already been
charged, enter that number here.
•
Pay: Click the check box if this unit is to be included in this payment, clear it if not. This
allows you to pay on any combination of the units in the group.
General Considerations
The Multiple Unit Payment window will not include a unit in the transaction if there is no amount
in the balance column, unless the unit has a credit equal to the amount due. If the Pay checkbox is
not selected, the unit will not be included.
You can issue Misc. Credits or Misc. Charges in the Daily Transactions window before displaying
the Multiple Unit Payment window, and the charges/credits will be applied to whichever unit was
initially brought up. However, the credits/charges will only be applied to that single unit, not the
entire group. Thus, any credit issued against a particular unit should not exceed the amount due for
that one unit, or else it will not be included in the group payment.
The Multiple Unit Payment window does not support partial or overpayments. It will only accept
full payment of the charges due, or none (by clearing the Pay checkbox). Thus, if a tenant has a
group of units and for some reason does not pay the total amount due for the entire group, you will
potentially need to post two payments: one for as many units in the group as are being paid for in full
and one to reflect any partial payments.
Completing the Multiple Unit Payment
To complete a multiple unit payment, ensure that all units to be included in the payment are selected
in the Pay field, and that the Total shown at the bottom of the Multiple Unit Payment screen is the
52 • Payments
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
same as the amount the tenant has tendered. Then click the OK button to display the Paid By
window as explained in “The Paid By Window” on page 100. Enter the method of payment and
optionally the check number and bank number. After that the system will cycle through all of the
units involved in the Multiple Unit Payment and you will then be given the option of printing
receipts for the transactions.
Assign Tenant
The Assign Tenant option is used to move in or prelease a unit. Select this option from the Main
Menu and the following form will appear:
The Assign Tenant form is essentially the same as the “View/Edit Tenant - Form” described in
“Using the “View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window” on page 30, with some additional buttons. At the
top is the Toolbar, which allows you to perform various tenant operations as described in “The
Toolbar” on page 27. Immediately below the Toolbar is found the Unit #, Size, Customer ID, and
Status of the unit. Below this line is a series of Tabs that you click with your mouse to enter, edit
and display specific information about the new tenant.
Note that in the above example, the Find button, Find Prelease button, and the Data Control Bar are
visible. This indicates that the unit to be assigned has not been chosen yet. You must choose the
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 53
unit to be assigned before entering any tenant information in the various fields. As soon as you
select a unit to be assigned, and move the cursor to the Name field, the system will hide the Data
Control Bar and the Find buttons, indicating that you are now in “movein mode”, ready to input the
new customer data. The system will also paint all tabs except for the “Tenant Info” tab red. A red
tab indicates that it has not been selected yet, alerting you to the fact that data on that tab has not
been entered yet.
Assign Tenant Buttons
The buttons on the Assign Tenant form allow you to perform the following actions:
•
Find Unit - activates the Find Vacant Unit function. For instructions on the use of this
function, see “Find Vacant Unit Function” on page 103. This button will be active until you
have selected the unit to be assigned.
•
Find Prelease – allows you to search for a preleased unit/customer in the same manner as
the Find Tenant or Find Prospect functions.
•
Save - saves the record and displays the Paid By window.
•
Cancel - cancels the move-in. Caution: all data entered in this move-in record will be lost.
•
Quick Move In - performs a “Quick Move in”. This option moves the tenant in quickly
with minimal information, after which you would need to go back to View/Edit Tenant and
enter the rest of the customer data. This feature is useful when you have a line of tenants
waiting to rent units. When you select this button the system will immediately move to the
Amount Due tab (Assign Tenant) form where you can quickly complete the move-in with
minimal tenant information.
•
Prelease Unit - this button (found on the “Amount Due” tab) is used to “prelease” (reserve)
a unit. The button will become available for use when the “prelease till” date is filled in. If
the unit is already preleased, this button will be titled “Extend Prelease”; in this case, it is
used to extend the “prelease till” date.
•
Waiting List - allows you to search for a name on the Waiting List. For details on adding a
name to the Waiting List, see “Waiting List” on page 108.
•
Find Tenant / Find Prospect - allows you to find a current or former tenant, or a previously
entered prospective tenant. These buttons will be disabled until you select a unit to be
assigned. The Find Tenant function is used when a current or former tenant is renting
another unit. The Find Prospect button is used when a prospective tenant is now renting a
unit. Either button will copy the information from the existing tenant or prospect record to
the new move-in record, so you do not have to retype the data. For instructions on the use of
these functions, see “Find Tenant / Prelease / Prospect Function” on page 103.
Notes & Reminders
After entering the unit number to be assigned, you have the option of entering Notes and/or
Reminders in association with the unit. To do this, select the appropriate button from the Toolbar.
For more details on using the Notes feature, see “Notepad” on page 106. For more details on using
the Reminders feature, see “Reminders” on page 107.
Tenant Information Tab
Select this tab to enter and/or display the primary tenant information about this move-in. Note that it
will already be selected when you first choose the Assign Tenant option.
54 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Unit #
There are three (3) ways to enter the unit number to be assigned:
1. If the unit number is known, enter it. Otherwise, use one of the following options.
2. Press the Find Unit button to use the Find Vacant Unit function as detailed in “Find Vacant
Unit Function” on page 103.
3. Use the data control bar at the bottom left of the form to scroll through the vacant units
until the desired unit is displayed. Note that in the above example, we are currently looking
at “Record 1 of 19”, meaning there are 19 vacant units in the database and this is the 1st
record. Use your mouse to press the buttons, changing the record until the desired unit is
displayed.
After selecting the unit number, proceed to the remaining fields and fill them in as follows or you
may use the scan button if you have the ScanShell 800 Scanner.
Scan
To use the ScanShell 800 Scanner with WinSen you must: have WinSen Version 3.14 or greater
installed, obtain the proper Software License from Sentinel Systems, and have the Enable IDScan
Interface box checked in Maintenance|Site Setup|Other.
Before using the scanner for the first time it must be calibrated. See the discussion in “Appendix P –
ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen” on page 239 for calibration instructions.
When scanning information from a driver’s license, place the license to be scanned face down in the
scanner. If the scanner option is set for Scan Automatically, this will cause the scanner to autodetect document insertion and start scanning automatically. If the Scan Automatically option is
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 55
unchecked, the scanner starts scanning when you click on the scan button. When using the manual
scan button, be sure your document is inserted into the scanner before clicking the scan button.
After the driver’s license is scanned, the scanner OCR software will fill in the tenant information
screen with the information on the driver’s license where applicable. If for some reason the
information does not scan in correctly, you can check the scanner options and re-scan the license.
The scanner options can be reviewed and/or changed by right clicking on the Scan button and
clicking on Scanner Options or by clicking on Maintenance|Site Setup|Other|Scanner Options.
These options are explained in “Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen” on
page 239.
Name & Address
The basic name and address information. Information shown is the Name, Address Lines 1 and 2,
City, State, and Zip Code. Fill in the data as appropriate.
Special Note on residential customer names: if you desire to sort your customer reports by name,
we recommend that you enter residential customer names in the following format:
LastName~ FirstName MiddleName
The “~” character tells the system where the last name is, so that it can reverse the name when
printing receipts. The “~” should immediately follow the last name, then a space, then the rest of the
name. This format should not be used for commercial tenants.
Phone Numbers
These fields are for the home phone, business phone, fax phone, and mobile (cellular) phone
numbers. Fill in the data as appropriate.
License & Tracking Number
The Tracking Number is an optional entry that can be used for any purpose the facility desires, e.g.
lease number, RV license plate number, etc. The License field is used to record the driver’s license
number of the tenant.
E-Mail Address / EMail Notices
Fill in the tenant’s E-Mail address, if applicable. If Winsen is properly configured, a valid E-Mail
address is filled in, and the EMail Notices checkbox is selected, WinSen can E-Mail notices and
receipts to tenants.
RV Length
The RV Length field is used to record the length of the tenant’s RV if you charge “by the foot” for
RV storage. When this field is filled in the system will multiply the number entered by the “RV per
foot rate” specified in Site Information to calculate the unit rate. If your facility doesn’t charge “by
the foot” for RV storage, make sure the “RV per foot rate” in Site Information is set to 0.00 and that
no information is entered in this field.
Language
The language option is used if you wish to print different late letters for some tenants than others.
For example, you could have tenants who prefer to receive mailings in Spanish. To support this, you
would create a sub-folder named “Spanish” in your WinSen installation folder. You would then
copy your Spanish language letters into that sub-folder, and select the “Spanish” option in the
56 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Language drop-down list for the applicable tenant(s). Those tenants would then receive the Spanish
language letters.
To establish a list of language options, it is necessary to modify the langn variables in the winsen.ini
file. Details on modifying the winsen.ini file are found in “Appendix H – Initialization File
Variables” on page 230.
2nd Contact Information tab
Select this tab to enter and/or display the 2nd contact information about this move-in. The 2nd
contact information is optional. If desired, you can have the system print duplicate notices (late
letters, billings, etc.) to the 2nd contact party listed here.
Send Duplicate Notices
Check this box if you wish to have the system print duplicate notices to the 2nd contact party.
2nd Contact Name, Address, Phone Numbers, E-Mail Address
These fields are for the 2nd contact name, address lines, city, state, zip, home, business and fax
phone numbers, and the 2nd contact E-Mail address. Fill in the data as appropriate.
Billing Information tab
Select this tab to enter billing information about this move-in.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 57
Taxable
Check this box if the new tenant is taxable. In most cases you should check this box, unless the
tenant is a tax exempt entity such as a religious organization. If your facility doesn’t have to charge
tax, your tax rates should be set to “0.00%” in Site Setup. Do not clear the taxable status check box
unless the tenant is truly tax exempt. Thus, if your situation changes and you have to start charging
tax, you won’t have to update each customer record to change their taxable status; instead you would
only have to make a change to your tax rates.
Send Bill and Next Bill
WinSen Property Manager has the ability to send bills to your tenants on a recurring basis. These
two entries define what type of billing is to be done for this unit, and when the next bill is to be
printed. The Send Bill field has the following choices: None (no bills are to be sent), Monthly (send
bills each month), Quarterly (send bills every three months), Semi-Annually (send bills twice a
year), and Annually (send bills once a year). Select the desired choice from the drop down menu,
then fill in the Next Bill date (the next time you want the system to print a bill for this tenant).
Actually printing the bills is handled in Late Letters & Mailings. Note that the Daily Charger will
update the Next Bill date from then on, so that the billing process is handled automatically by the
system.
Credit Card Information
The next four entries are for credit card information. If the customer desires to have their storage
unit rental billed to their credit card automatically, fill in the Credit Card Type, Number,
Expiration Date, check the Automatic billing box, and set the number in the AutoBill Periods to
the number of periods the credit card will be charged (For example, if the rate charge method for a
tenant is set to Anniversary and the Autobill Periods is set to 3, the customer credit card would be
charged for 3 months of rent.). When that tenants rent is due, and if the credit card expiration date
is valid, the system will automatically generate a transaction and advance the paid-to-date on the unit
when the Daily Charger is run. An “autobill notice” will be printed on the charger report, alerting
you to process the credit card transaction through the credit card company. If the credit card
expiration date has passed the paid-to-date will not be advanced and a notice will be printed on the
charger report warning you of this.
58 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Special Note: If you have the ICVerify program, and the proper arrangements with your financial
institution, the system will process autobill transactions automatically during the System Charger by
passing these transactions to the ICVerify program.
For more information regarding using WinSen and ICVerify, see “Appendix J – Using WinSen with
ICVerify” on page 233.
Automatic Debit Information (EFT)
Immediately to the right of the credit card information is the routing number and account number
fields used for automatic debits of checking or savings accounts. Enter the routing number of the
financial institution and enter the account number of the checking or savings account to be debited.
In addition check the Automatic billing box associated with the credit card information on the left.
Late Type
The system provides three options for charging late fees and printing notices for a tenant:
1. Normal - all late fees are charged and all notices are printed. This is the default.
2. Reminders - late fees will not be charged, but all notices will be printed.
3. None - no late fees are charged or notices printed.
Select the desired option from the drop down list. Note that the system will default to Normal late
charges, so in most cases no additional action is required.
Late Fee Cycle
There will be one or more late fee cycles to choose from depending on how the facility is configured.
Select the desired option from the drop down list. Note that the system will default to the first late
fee cycle defined so in most cases no additional action is required. For more information about
configuring late fee cycles see “Late Cycles/Fees” on page 151.
Expected Vacancy
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
If the new tenant knows when they expect to move out, enter the date here. The information is used
on the “Expected Vacancy Report” and is useful if your facility is full and you have a waiting list for
units. Using the “Expected Vacancy Report” would then give you a good idea when you might have
units available.
Automatic Rate Change Allowed
Check this box if the new tenant is subject to automatic rate changes. This check box will have no
effect unless you have set up automatic rate changes as specified in “Rate Change Options” on page
189. If the box is not checked, automatic rate changes will not affect this unit.
Demographics/Advertising Effectiveness tab
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
Click this tab to display the Demographics and Advertising Effectiveness form for this move-in.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 59
This form allows you to capture Demographic and Advertising Effectiveness data. This data is
summarized in the Advertising Effectiveness Report, available from the Report Menu, and can be
of great value in your marketing efforts. The information can be very helpful in understanding who
your tenants are, why they chose your facility and in developing your marketing programs.
Advertising Effectiveness
Choose one or more of the displayed options as applicable to this move-in by clicking on it with your
mouse. In the example, our new customer has chosen our facility because of the Alarm System, and
the Coupon.
Demographic Information
Each of these optional entries allow you to choose certain options from its respective drop down list.
If a particular category does not apply to this move-in, ignore it. Each of the categories has as the
first choice as a Not applicable option. In addition to this choice you have the following options:
•
Customer Type: choose Individual or Commercial.
•
Distance: choose the distance from the facility that most closely fits this tenant.
•
Gender: choose Male or Female.
•
Residence: choose Single Family, Multiple Family, or Apt. or Condo.
•
Purpose: choose Unkown, Moving, Temporary, or Storage as applicable.
•
Business Type: choose Retail, Distribution, Professional, or Other Business.
•
Office Type: choose Main Office or Branch Office.
•
Employees: the number of employees.
60 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Note: The above choices for each of the categories are the factory defaults. They can be changed at
the site in “Demographic Categories” on page 177, so your choices may not be the same as in the
example above.
Insurance Information tab
WinSen Property Manager provides the site the ability to act as an administrator for Bob Bader
Insurance Company in providing the tenant the opportunity to insure the contents of their unit.
Offering your tenants the option of insuring their goods can significantly reduce the site’s liability in
the event of damage or loss.
The system supports Bob Bader Storage Property Insurance (among others) and can only be
accessed if the Insurance Company information has been established in your program by Sentinel
Systems Corporation.
These insurance products replace your “counter top” insurance program and offer you and your
tenants many advantages. To get complete information, contact Sentinel Systems at (800) 456-9955,
or Bob Bader Company at (888) 223-3726.
Providing your insurance program has been installed within WinSen Property Manager, click this tab
to issue insurance for a new tenant. The following form will be displayed:
To Issue an Insurance Policy for the New Tenant
Check the Insurance box by clicking it with your mouse, and enter the insurance policy number if
applicable. Next select the desired amount of insurance coverage from the drop down list. The
charges due for the insurance will be calculated appropriately and added to the move-in balance.
Security Information tab
This portion of the Assign Tenant process is used to enter Security Information pertaining to the new
tenant such as the gate access code, time zone, access level, etc. Select this tab from the Assign
Tenant form to display the following form:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 61
Passcode and Card Number
Enter the customer’s passcode and/or card number as appropriate. The passcode field is used if
you are using keypads for access to the facility, while the card number is used if you are using card
readers. See “Appendix O – WinSen Passcodes / Maximum Digits” on page 238 for the range of
digits that can be used for assigning passcodes.
Time Zone and Access Level
The Time Zone selection allows you to assign your new tenant their gate access hours. To assign
the time zone for this tenant, select the desired choice from the drop down list. Note that the default
will be time zone 0 so it will not need to be changed in most cases.
The Access Level selection allows you to restrict the tenant’s access to certain parts of your storage
facility. To change the access level assignment for this tenant, select the desired access level from
the drop down list. Note that the default will be access level 0 so it will not need to be changed in
most cases.
Note: The time zone option selects the time zone for the tenant, not the gate hours for the time zone.
To change the gate hours defined for a time zone, you must go to WinSen Sentinel. For more
information on Time Zones and Access Levels, or if you need to change the actual gate hours or the
access level definitions, see the WinSen Sentinel manual.
Other Parties
These fields are for “Other parties with access”, other parties the new tenant indicates are also
allowed access to the storage unit.
Other tab
Click this tab from the Assign Tenant form to display other information about the new tenant.
Currently the only item found here is “comments”, a short line of text you can enter in association
with a unit if you don’t need the more extensive capabilities the Notes feature offers.
62 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
If the unit type for the current unit displayed has the Enable Locations checkbox in the Unit Types
screen checked; the Other Tab will show the Unit Locations grid:
The Unit Locations grid allows you to track the location of mobile storage units. The fields for
these additional records include: Scheduled Delivery Date, Delivery Date, Scheduled Pickup Date,
Pickup Date, Address 1, Address 2, City, State, Zip, Latitude and Longitude. If the Latitude and
Longitude fields are used, the numbers need to be entered in decimal format. Thus, if you are
entering coordinates and the location is south of the equator or west of the Prime Meridian in
Greenwich, England, express the latitude or longitude as a negative value; for example, -15.75
degrees latitude and -64.25 degrees longitude.
These fields can be used to help store and track information for mobile storage units.
The Unit Location Report in the Report & Graph menu will print a report with all units that have
Unit Location information.
Amount Due tab
Select this tab from the Assign Tenant form to calculate the charges due for the new move-in. You
will see the following form:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 63
Prelease Till and Prelease Deposit
If you are preleasing (holding the unit for the tenant until some future date) this unit, enter the
Prelease Till date. This is the date when the system will forfeit the Prelease Deposit if any, and
vacate the unit making it available to rent. Then enter the deposit amount the customer is giving you
to hold the unit, if any. Then click the Prelease Unit button (note that it does not become active
until you have filled in the Prelease Till date). The Paid By window will appear, where you enter
the method of payment as detailed in “The Paid By Window” on page 100.
Note: The preleased unit must be assigned by the time the Daily Close is performed on the Prelease
Till Date, or the system will forfeit the prelease deposit and vacate the unit.
Extending the Prelease Date
There are two ways to extend the prelease date on a preleased unit:
1. Bring up the unit in the “View/Edit – Form” dialog and click the “Unit Status” tab. Type in
the new prelease date and click the Save button.
2. Bring up the unit in the “Assign Tenant” dialog and click the “Balance” tab. Type in the
new prelease date and click the Extend Prelease button.
Assigning a Preleased Unit
If the unit was previously preleased, the move-in procedure is exactly the same as for a new move-in,
except the tenant will receive a credit for the prelease deposit against the move-in charges.
64 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Unit Rate
The standard rate for this unit will be shown in this field. If the “Allow Rate Change on Move-in”
option in Site Setup is checked, you can change it if necessary. If the unit rate is changed, it will
show up on the “Non Standard rates report” available from the Report Menu.
Security Deposit
The standard security deposit for this unit will be shown. If the “Allow Rate Change on Move-in”
option in Site Setup is checked, you can change it if necessary.
Administration Fee
The non-refundable administration fee to be charged for this move-in is entered here. The system
will show the amount that is defined in Site Setup, which can be changed if need be.
Monthly Charges
This field is for recurring monthly charges that are billed to the tenant each month along with the
rent. Examples are items such as electricity, late access, recurring use of your dumpster, etc.
Monthly Charges are assessed by pressing <?> with the cursor on this field (or double clicking it),
then proceeding as detailed in “Miscellaneous Account Windows” on page 99.
After closing the Monthly Charge window, the system will add the charges that were specified to the
total amount due for this movein as appropriate. If rent is being prorated, so will be any Monthly
Charges.
Misc. Charges
This field is used for assessing one-time charges such as cleaning fees (obviously a cleaning fee
would not normally apply to a movein). Misc. Charges are assessed by double clicking the Misc.
Charges field or by pressing <?> when the cursor is on it, then proceeding as detailed in
“Miscellaneous Account Windows” on page 99.
After closing the Misc. Charge window, the system will add the charges that were specified to the
total amount due for this movein as appropriate.
Misc. Credits
This field is used to record one-time credits. For example, you could use a Misc. credit to give a
tenant “one month free” for renting for six months. Misc. Credits are given by pressing <?> with the
cursor on this field (you may also double click it), then proceeding as detailed in “Miscellaneous
Account Windows” on page 99.
After closing the Misc. Credit window, the system will subtract the amounts that were specified from
the total amount due for this movein as appropriate.
Note: Miscellaneous charge, credit and monthly accounts are changed through Site Information. No
changes to the account names can be made in Assign Tenant.
Merch. Charges
This field is used for selling inventory items such as locks, boxes, packing material, etc. Merch.
Charges are assessed by double clicking the Merch. Charges field or by pressing <?> when the
cursor is on it, then proceeding as detailed in “Miscellaneous Account Windows” on page 99.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Assign Tenant • 65
After closing the Merch. Charge window, the system will add the charges that were specified to the
total amount due for this movein as appropriate.
Merch. Returns
This field is used for inventory items being returned for credit. Under normal circumstances this field
would not be used on a movein transaction.
Charge Method
This field is for assigning the Rate Charge Method (RCM) for this move-in. It will be preset to the
method defined in Site Setup, and for most move-ins, you will not need to change it. For specific
information on the rate charge method options, see “Site Name Tab ” on page 147.
Select the desired Rate Charge Method from the drop down list.
Due Day
This is the day when rent is due each month. The system will preset it according to the Rate Charge
Method but you can change it if you need to. If you change it the system will recalculate the amount
due to reflect the change.
Months to Pay
If necessary, enter the number of additional months the new tenant is paying. This will be dependent
on the Rate Charge Method and site policies. For example, if the tenant is “1st of the month” and
your facility allows people to move in with less than a full month rent payment, you would leave
Months to Pay at 0 and “prorate them in”. If the tenant is on the anniversary or 2nd month prorate
Rate Charge Method, you will need to enter “1” in Months to Pay.
Total Due & Paid-to-Date
The system will calculate the Total Due and the Paid-to-Date according to the Rate Charge
Method, Rent Due Day, and Months to Pay settings. When you choose the Save button this is the
amount the system will expect you to collect.
Prorate Detail
This portion of the form will show you details on the prorated rent, monthly charges, insurance, and
tax. Prorated rent is based on the following formula:
Number of Days being prorated * Unit Rate / Number of Days in Month.
Completing the Move-in
After completing all relevant entries on the various forms, press the Save button to complete the
move-in. The system will display the Paid By Window where you will enter the method of payment
as detailed in “The Paid By Window” on page 100. The system will save the record and return you
to the Assign Tenant form for the next move-in or prelease. Note that this step is unnecessary if you
are Preleasing this unit.
66 • Assign Tenant
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Moveouts
The Moveout function is used to move out a tenant from your facility. It can also be used to move
out a Pre-Leased tenant. To access this option, select the “Moveout” button from the Toolbar on
either of the Tenant Forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selecting
the desired tenant record. The following form will appear:
The form will display the current balance and other information on the tenant. There are two
possible situations: the tenant is paid up, or they are past due.
•
If the tenant is paid up, and the “Refund Rent on Moveout” field in Site Setup is checked,
the system will show the amount of rent to be refunded, along with the number of days being
prorated, if any. The “Total Due” field will show a negative number, signifying that this
tenant is owed a refund.
•
If the tenant is past due, the system will show the past due balance in the “Charges” column.
Misc. Charges and Credits
During a moveout, you can assess miscellaneous charges if need be (for things such as cleaning
fees). Charges issued will be added to the balance due on the moveout. You can also issue misc.
credits (for late fees, etc.) if you need to. Credits will be subtracted from the balance due. To issue
misc. charges or credits, proceed as detailed in “Miscellaneous Account Windows” on page 99.
Completing the Moveout
If the customer owes you money and is paying in full
Press the OK button. The “Paid By” window will come up. Select the method of payment (Cash,
Check, Card) and enter the amount paid. The system will move out the tenant, ask if you want to
print a receipt and the unit will be available to rent.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Moveouts • 67
If the customer owes you money and is paying only for the days used
Use your mouse to move to the to the “Days” field under the “Credits” section. Type in the number
of days the tenant is NOT being charged for. For example, let’s suppose a tenant was due on the first
and is moving out on the 5th of the month. You want to charge them for the first five days of the
month. To accomplish this, you would enter 25 days of credit in the “Days” field under the
“Credits” section. This would credit the tenant for 25 days of rent which will be subtracted from the
1 month’s rent that is already due (the rent that was charged on the first), thus giving us the correct
balance.
This example is based on the moveout being done on the 5th, and the paid-to-date being the 1st.
Since we are charging the tenant for today’s rent, they owe us for 5 days. The system uses a 30 day
month for figuring the prorate, so we subtract 5 from 30 to arrive at 25 days of credit.
After entering this credit, choose the OK button to complete the moveout and bring up the Paid By
window. Select the method of payment (Cash, Check, Card) and enter the amount paid. The system
will move out the tenant and give you the option to print a receipt and the unit will be vacated.
If the customer owes you money and is not paying anything
If you move out the tenant with a balance on their account, the system will place the unpaid amounts
into the “bad debt” account. If you do not wish this to occur, you will need to “zero out” the rent
amount due on the moveout screen. To do this, use your mouse to move to the “Months” field under
the “Credits” section, and type in the number of months rent that they owe you. For example, if a
tenant is moving out that owes one month’s rent, and you don’t want the rent due to go into bad debt,
type in “1” in the “Months” field, and the past due rent balance will be offset in the credits section,
effectively removing the past due rent. Past due late fees and other amounts will have to be credited
with Misc. Credits if you don’t want those amounts going into the bad debt account.
Next, choose the OK button to complete the moveout. If there is an amount due, the Paid By
window will come up. In the Paid By window, click OK without entering any amounts. The system
will give you a warning message that the unpaid amount on this account will go into bad debt and
ask if you want to continue. Choose Y and the system will move out the tenant, and give you the
option to print a receipt and the unit will be available to rent.
If you are refunding prepaid rent
Press the OK button. The system will move out the tenant and give you the option to print a receipt
and the unit will be available to rent. The prepaid rent and deposit, if any, will be shown on the
closing reports as being refunded. If for some reason you are not refunding all or a portion of the
security deposit, merely change it to the amount being refunded before clicking the OK button.
The actual refund can be handled in any manner desired by the site, e.g., “A refund check will be
mailed to you by our home office within a few days”.
If you are not refunding prepaid rent
Using your mouse, move the cursor to the “Days” field under the “Credits” section and change the
number shown to “0”. Do the same if there are any whole months of prepaid rent shown as needing
to be refunded. This will change the refund amount to zero. Then press OK to complete the
moveout.
Normally, the “Days” and the “Months” credit fields will be used in tandem, i.e., it may be the policy
at your facility to not refund any unused days of the current month but do refund any whole months
of pre-paid rent. For example, your customer moves out on June 25th but has paid for his/her rent
68 • Moveouts
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
through July 31st. He/she has five days (the time remaining in June) and all of July pre-paid. It may
be the policy of your site to provide credit (and refund if appropriate) for July’s pre-paid rent but not
for the remaining days of June. You can accomplish this by entering the appropriate numbers in the
“Days” and “Months” fields.
Note: If it is site policy to not refund any prepaid rent on moveouts, you should make sure that the
“Refund Rent on Moveout” option in Site Setup is not checked. Then the “Days” and “Months”
under the credits section will always be preset to 0 when you do a moveout.
Transfers
The Transfer Tenant function allows you to move a tenant from one unit to another. The units can
be the same size, a different size and/or have different rates. To transfer a tenant, select the
“Transfer” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form or
View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selecting the proper unit. The following form will appear:
The cursor will be on the New Unit field, waiting for your input. The new unit can be selected in
one of two ways:
1. If the new unit number is known, type it in.
2. Otherwise, press the FIND button to display the Find dialog. This dialog allows you to
search for a vacant unit as detailed in “Find Vacant Unit Function” on page 103.
After selecting the new unit, the system will display the Old Unit data (it will assess charges or give
credit depending on the status of the unit, e.g., rented, delinquent, etc.) and the New Unit data. The
focus will be on the OK button:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Transfers • 69
Note how the system is giving the tenant credit for 8 days (the number of days of prepaid rent) on the old unit at the old
unit rate, and charging them for the same 8 days of rent at the new unit rate.
If the customer had a monthly charge on his/her old unit, the same charge will be carried forward to
the new unit. However, you can change the monthly charges on the new unit if necessary. The rent
due day and the paid to date will remain the same as the old unit (except as noted in Transferring A
Delinquent Tenant below) and the rent on both units will be prorated as appropriate.
Transfer Fee
The Transfer Fee field allows you to assess a one-time charge for the transfer process. This amount
can be preset in Site Setup. The preset transfer fee, if any, will be displayed and added to the transfer
charges. You can change it if you need to by merely typing in the new amount.
Transfers Without Payment
WinSen Property Manager will allow you to transfer a tenant without collecting payment for it. All
amounts due as a result of the transfer will be shown as past due charges on the account. To do this,
click on OK to close the Paid By window without paying anything. The system will verify that you
really want to do this, and then print a receipt if desired.
Transferring A Delinquent Tenant
If you transfer a delinquent tenant, the system will pro-rate the old unit rent due from their paid to
date to today’s date at the old unit rate to calculate the rent amount due on the old unit. It will then
pro-rate the rent on the new unit from today’s date up to the rent due day of the next month at the
new unit rate to figure the rent due on the new unit.
If all charges are paid during the transfer, the system will advance the paid to date to the following
month. If the charges are not paid, the system will keep the same paid to date on the new unit as the
old one, and it will show the adjusted rent charges as a past due amount.
70 • Transfers
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Completing the Transfer
If the information shown is incorrect, you can change relevant data by moving to the required field
with your mouse or with the Tab key, then making your changes. You can change the new unit rate,
new unit monthly charges, or new unit deposit. You can also issue misc. charges and/or credits as
detailed in “Miscellaneous Account Windows” on page 99.
Once the information shown is correct, click OK to complete the transfer. If there is an amount due
the system will display the “Paid By” window. You will then have the opportunity to print a receipt
and a transfer contract if desired.
Late Letters & Mailings
The Late Letters and Mailings function provides the ability to generate a great variety of
correspondence to your tenants. Some of the mailings are “queued up” automatically by the system
and others are selectable by the site. To access this function, select Late Letters and Mailings from
the Main Menu. The following form will be displayed:
All of the options except Special Mailing are controlled by the system, i.e., the system will “queue
up” a given notice based on preset parameters or in response to a specific situation. For example, the
#1 through #5 late letters are controlled by your late cycle schedule as defined in Site Setup. Others,
such as the Returned Check letter are queued up in response to posting a returned check to a tenant’s
record.
How the System Determines When to Print a Late Letter
The Daily Charger “queues up” late letters by comparing each tenant’s “number of days late” to the
number under the Notices column in your late cycle schedule (defined in Site Setup). The “days
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Late Letters & Mailings • 71
late” number is calculated by subtracting the tenant’s paid-to-date from the current date. If these two
numbers match, the appropriate late letter will be highlighted.
When you first enter the Late Letters function, the letters that were queued up by the charger will be
preset. If no letters are shown, it means that the Daily Charger did not find any tenants who need to
have a letter sent to them. The system will only print a letter to a tenant when their “days late”
matches the “Notice” column of your late cycle schedule. It will not print a letter the day before, or
the day after. If it did, the tenant would get a letter every day!
The example above shows that billing, late letters #1 through #5, prelease forfeit, returned check
notice, and in process lien notices have been queued up, indicating that these letters are set to be
printed and/or emailed at some time during that day. Also shown is the number of notices of each
type, and how many are selected. Other mailing options would also be queued up for printing if
conditions exist that dictates other mailings.
Selecting/Deselecting Notices
The ability to print only selected notices is a convenient feature when you have many mailings
queued up in the system, and you want to print only one or two at a given time, or if you are doing a
“special mailing” and you only want to print the special mailing.
Click the + sign next to a letter type (group header) to show the units that are going to receive that
notice. You can select or deselect a single notice by checking/unchecking the Include column for
that notice. You can select or deselect groups of notices by using the Select All and Select None
buttons. The buttons will act according to the options selected in the Letter Type and Delivery
Method dropdown lists. The Letter Type dropdown will show all different letter types that are
queued up, as well as All Letter Types. The Delivery Method dropdown will show all different
delivery methods (print or e-mail) that have been queued up, as well as All Delivery Methods.
These two drop down lists work together to let you select/deselect letters efficiently when needed.
For example if you wish to print only the first late letter, first click Select None, then in the letter
types dropdown, choose Late Letter #1, then click Select All. All late letter #1s will then be
selected.
Selecting and deselecting can also be done by right clicking the mouse on a group header, for
example “Late Letter #1”, and choose the desired option from the context menu. This menu can also
be used to expand or collapse all the rows in the grid, or all the rows under that group header.
Print Second Contact Letters
The system can print “Second Contact” letters for each primary notice. This option must be
specified in the tenant record (see Assign Tenant or View/Edit - Send Duplicate Notices) to generate
such a notice for a specific tenant. This checkbox allows you to specify if second contact letters
should be printed for those units where the “Print Duplicate Notices” checkbox is selected. When
you first enter Late Letters and Mailings, it will be selected according to the Print Second Contact
Letters option on the General Tab of Site Setup. If selected, second contact notices will be printed as
appropriate.
Note: You can specify the default choice for 2nd contact letters on the General tab in Site Setup.
Letters for Units in Lien
If either of the lien letters have been queued up, the “Letters for Units in Lien Status” drop-down will
be enabled. This allows you to choose which units currently in “Lien Status” you wish to print lien
letters for. The choices are:
72 • Late Letters & Mailings
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
1. Today Only tells the system to print lien letters only for those customers who were placed in
“lien” status today, or who were cleared from lien today in the case of the “final lien” letter.
2. All Units will print lien letters for all units in “lien” status.
Sort Options
The system has the capability to print your letters in sorted order, if desired. If you have the proper
arrangements with the post office, you can receive a discount on postage if your letters are sorted by
zip code, and you have sufficient mailing volume. Consult your post office for mailing requirements
on getting this discount.
Choose this button to select Sort Options for this mailing. For specific instructions on selecting sort
options, see “Sort Options Window” on page 104.
Printer Button
This button allows you to select a different printer for the mailing. You will see the Select Printer
form. For instructions on selecting a printer, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
Refresh Button
The system keeps track of which letters have been printed for the day and will adjust the settings
accordingly. For example, let’s suppose you entered Late Letters and Mailings and the 1st, 3rd, and
5th late letters were selected to be printed. You decide you only want to print the 1st late letter at
this time, so you would manually deselect the other letters, and then choose the Print button to print
the 1st late letter. When you re-enter late Letters and Mailings at a later time the same day, the
system would then show only the 3rd and 5th late letters as needing to be printed.
Use the Refresh button to rescan and requeue the letters according to your late cycle schedule and
other system parameters. It would be useful if you wanted to reprint today’s mailings.
Print Selections
Choose this button to print the selected letters.
Special Mailing
This option provides the site the ability to print an unlimited variety of customer mailings. Any
letter can be sent to any tenant at any time.
To print a Special Mailing:
•
On the Late Letters and Mailings form, click the Special Mailing button. The system will
display the Special Mailing Options form:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Late Letters & Mailings • 73
•
In the Filename box, select the document you wish to print. If you know the filename of the
notice, you can type it in. Or press the Select File button to display the standard Windows
file selection dialog box. The list will include all letters installed in your system. See “Late
Letters & Notices File Names” on page 207 for a complete list of filenames used by the
system.
•
In the Type of Mailing box, choose the type of mailing. The choices are Individual, By
Unit Status, By Size Code, or All Tenants.
•
If you select Individual in Type of Mailing, the Special Mailing will be printed for a list of
units which you enter in the Unit Numbers box. Separate the units with a semi-colon (;)
character.
•
If you select By Unit Status in Type of Mailing, the Special Mailing will be printed for all
units in the selected Unit Status. A drop down list will appear where you select the Unit
Status options. The Unit Status options are as follows:
Delinquent Tenants
Overlocked Tenants
Lien Process Tenants
All Delinquent Tenants
Rented Units, Not Delinquent
Complimentary Units
Pre-Leased Units
Access Control Only Units
Monthly Billing Tenants
Quarterly Billing Tenants
Semi-Annual Billing Tenants
74 • Late Letters & Mailings
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Annual Billing Tenants
All Tenants being Billed
•
If you select By Size Code in Type of Mailing, the Special Mailing will be printed for all
units that are the selected size code. Choose the desired size code from the drop down list.
•
If you select All Units in Type of Mailing, the Special Mailing will be printed for all
occupied units.
•
If you are printing labels, check the Label Printing checkbox.
•
If you wish to e-mail the notice to affected tenants who have valid e-mail addresses and are
enabled to receive e-mailed notices (the EMail Notices checkbox is selected for the tenant in
View/Edit), select the E-Mail checkbox. Then edit the message subject and message body
as appropriate for the mailing. If you would like to print the notice to these tenants in
addition to e-mailing it, select the Print Letter checkbox. Note that these options are not
applicable to tenants who do not have valid e-mail addresses, or where the EMail Notices
checkbox is not selected in View/Edit; the special mailing will be printed for these tenants.
•
Click the OK button to return to Late Letters and Mailings. The Late Letters and
Mailings form will then show which units are affected by the Special Mailing. Then click
Print to print and/or e-mail the special mailing, as well as all other selected notices.
End of Period Processing
The End Of Period Processing function is used to “close” for all appropriate periods...daily, weekly,
monthly, quarterly and annually. It is also where you back-up your database. To access this
function, select “End Of Period Processing” from the Main Menu. The following form will be
displayed:
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
End of Period Processing • 75
All closings, except Weekly and Quarterly, are mandatory and must be accomplished on their
specified dates to maintain the integrity of your database. Further, they must be done in order, i.e.,
Daily first, Weekly second, etc. If you are running your Yearly Close, you must precede it with all
other Closes that you normally perform in the order they appear on the menu. Weekly closes are
optional; however if you do them, they should be done after a Daily close, and before the Monthly
close. Quarterly closes are also optional, but if you do them, they should be done before the Yearly
close.
Proof Edit Reconciliation
The system has the capability of “proofing” your transactions for the day prior to running the Daily
Close. This step is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED. Performing a Proof Edit allows you to be sure
all transactions have been entered properly before actually doing the close. If you catch mistakes
such as posting a payment twice, not posting a payment, or posting a payment to the wrong unit
before the close is done, they are much easier to correct. If the close has already been done before
mistakes are found, it is much more difficult to correct them.
Note: The system can be configured to force a proof edit before the Daily Close can be performed.
This option is found on the “General Tab” in Site Setup. If this option is checked, you must
successfully perform a proof edit before you can do the close. We highly recommend that you
enable this option.
To perform a Proof Edit, choose the Proof Edit button from the End of Period Processing form. The
following form will be displayed:
Enter the amount of cash, check, and credit card as counted in the cash till today. If the amounts you
enter do not agree with the sum of the payments entered into the system, the system will advise you
that the amounts do not agree, and ask if you would like to print a proof edit report. Respond with
<Y> to cause the system to print your transactions for the day. You can then review all transactions,
make the necessary corrections in the system and proceed with your daily close.
Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly and Yearly Closes
Weekly and Quarterly Closes are not available in WinSen Lite
To perform a given close, select the desired close from the End of Period Processing form by
pressing the appropriate button. Remember, the closes must be done in order (Daily first, then
Weekly, etc.). The system will verify that you want to perform the close. This helps to avoid
accidentally printing a close prematurely. Choose Yes, and the system will process your database
and print the Closing report(s).
If you have WinSen Electronic Manager, you will get closing reports for the main office consisting
of the combined data for all sites. You will also get separate reports for each site.
76 • End of Period Processing
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Backing up Your Database
Before you have processed your close, you should BACKUP YOUR DATABASE. This step is
EXTREMELY IMPORTANT. The importance of this step cannot be overstated. If the backup
is successful, a code 900 “successful backup” transaction will be written, and printed on the daily,
weekly, and monthly transaction logs.
To backup your database, choose the Backup All Data button from the End of Period Processing
form. The following form will be displayed:
Backup Path
The drive and optionally, directory, to backup to. You can backup to a floppy disk, a ZIP disk, a
network drive, or a local hard drive. For example, to backup to a directory named \Backup on the c:
drive, type C:\Backup in the backup path.
Files to Include
Type a list of the files to include in the backup. To start a new line, press <Ctrl+Enter>. Wildcards
are supported. For example, to backup all of the database files in the current directory, use *.mdb.
The recommended files to backup are as follows:
•
*.MDB
•
*.SSC
•
c:\windows\winsen.ini
If *.MDB is not listed in the files to include to backup, then WinSen will include the
Manager.mdb, Sentinel.mdb,RSCM.mdb and the errorlog.txt file in the list of files to backup; if
these files exist.
Always erase on removable media backups
Selecting this checkbox will cause the system to erase any files on removable media (floppy or ZIP
disks) before backing up. If you are backing up to floppy disks, it is recommended to check this box.
If you are backing up to ZIP disks, do not check this box. In this case, the system will backup each
day’s work to the ZIP disk with a different filename, until the ZIP disk is full. This allows you to
maintain many days worth of backups on the same disk.
Caution: When using floppy or ZIP disks, the backup disks should not be used for any purpose
other than backing up your WinSen database. All files on all backup disks in a backup set will
be erased if the “always erase” option is checked.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
End of Period Processing • 77
Test Backups
When this box is checked, WinSen will test the integrity of the back up files after the backup is
complete and will display any error messages if needed about the backup files.
Defaults
Click this button to set the backup destination and files to the factory defaults. The default
destination drive is a:\, and the default files to backup are listed above.
Backup
After selecting the files to be backed up and the backup destination, click the backup button to begin
the backup procedure. If it takes more than one disk to backup, the system will ask you to place
additional disks in the drive as necessary. If it does, be sure you use a different floppy disk, not the
one that was just written to.
Note: The system can be configured to require that the backup be done before the close (this option
is found in Site Setup). If this option is checked, you will need to backup your data before your
close, instead of afterwards.
Site Summary Report
Each Close performed will generate a Site Summary Report. Each of these Site Summary Reports
will be identified as a “Daily Closing”, “Weekly Closing”, etc., to indicate to the facility which
Close, and therefore which period of time the report reflects. The Site Summary Report will
always be generated. Other closing reports are optional and are explained in “Report Settings and
Output Options” on page 80.
An explanation of the Site Summary Report follows.
Deposit Action
The amount of cash, check, and card collected during the reporting period.
Credits
Customer Credit...this amount comes from customers who have prior credits who are moved out or
transferred. Prior credits will generally be from partial or overpayments made in the Daily
Transactions screen, but could also result from transferring a tenant from a larger to a smaller unit.
In addition, it will reflect revenue from tenants who have had their stored items auctioned through
the lien process. This revenue will also show up as “auction revenue” under the “Transactions”
section of the Site Summary report.
Rent Credit...this number is “4005 - Moveout Refunds” under the “Credit” column subtracted from
“5001 – Rent Debit” on the trial balance.
This amount will be increased from prior credit used in the “Daily Transactions” screen. Prior
credits will generally be from partial or overpayments made in the Daily Transactions screen, but
could also result from transferring a tenant from a larger to a smaller unit.
This amount will be decreased by “moveout refunds” - rent that was refunded on a moveout, shown
on the trial balance as “4005 - Moveout Refunds”.
Prelease Credit...This amount is from “Prelease Deposits” used when assigning a tenant who is
“Preleased” (you are holding the unit for them). The prelease deposit, if any, will be subtracted from
the move-in charges in this situation.
78 • End of Period Processing
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
It is shown on the trial balance as “5003 - Prelease Deposit Debit”.
Misc. Credits...this amount is from Misc. Credits issued by the system operator during move-ins,
move-outs, payments in Daily Transactions, Transfers, Etc. All Misc. Credits issued will be
summarized here. For details on the ten Misc. Credit accounts, refer to the trial balance, accounts
6001 - 6099, Debit column.
Security Deposit...this amount is security deposits used to pay rent and/or other charges during a
moveout, or lien process.
Bad Debt...the bad debt number results from moveouts with a balance due that is unpaid. When you
move out a past due tenant and the charges are not paid, the system will notify you that the unpaid
amounts will go into bad debt, and ask if you want to continue. If so, these unpaid amounts show up
in bad debt, and will be offset in their respective categories (rent, late fees, etc.) under the
“Transactions” section on the Site Summary report. This basically means that the unpaid amounts on
a moveout are “paid with bad debt.”
This number is shown as “5009 - Bad Debt Debit” on the trial balance.
Liabilities
Prepaid Rent...the amount of prepaid (unearned) rent at the time the close was printed. The
“Include Current Month in Prepaid Rent Calculations” option on the General Tab in Site Setup will
affect this number. If this option is enabled, the prepaid rent on each occupied unit is calculated
using the following formula:
(Days Left in Current Month * Unit Rate / Days in the Current Month) + (Whole Months
* Unit Rate)
If the “Include Current Month in Prepaid Rent Calculations” is not checked, only whole months of
prepaid rent are included in this calculation.
Security Deposit...the total amount of security deposits held.
Pre-lease Deposit...the total amount of Pre-lease deposits held.
Customer Credit...the total amount of credits on customer accounts.
Transactions
This section gives a summary of the transactions that occurred during that particular reporting
period.
Refunds
Security Deposit...the amount of security deposits refunded on moveouts for that reporting period.
Pre-Lease Deposit...the amount of pre-lease deposits refunded for that reporting period.
Rent...the amount of prepaid rents refunded on moveouts.
Accounts Receivable
This section of the site summary report summarizes the total amount of money owed to you at the
time of the report. All amounts due are shown. The Aged Receivables report available from the
report menu will detail the amounts due for each unit.
Note: The total amount due on the Delinquency Status report will not necessarily agree with the
total amount due on the Accounts Receivable section of the Site Summary report. This is because
only delinquent tenants are shown on the Delinquency Status report (tenants are considered
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
End of Period Processing • 79
delinquent if they have been charged a late fee, are overlocked, or are in lien status). It is quite
possible to have tenants who owe money but are not delinquent.
Letters/Notices, etc
Provides a summary of the various activities that have occurred since the last close.
Site Status
Provides a summary of the number of units rented, vacant, delinquent, lien units, etc.
Non Standard Units
This section of the report shows the number of units rented at non-standard rates, the number of
complimentary units, the number of unrentable units, and the dollar amount of these exceptions.
Two additional figures show the “potential rent” - the amount of revenue that could be expected if all
rented units were rented at the standard rate, and the “actual rent” - the total of all rented units at
their actual rate.
Moveout Ledger
The Daily Close may also automatically generate a Moveout Ledger for each tenant that has been
moved out that day. Moveout Ledger options are configured on the General Tab of Site Setup.
The site can select one of three options:
1. No Moveout Ledgers are printed.
2. A Moveout Ledger is printed at time of moveout.
3. Moveout Ledgers are printed with the Daily Close.
The Moveout Ledger prints the basic information about the tenant, e.g., name, address, phone
numbers, unit statistics, status at time of moveout, etc.
Report Settings and Output Options
You can specify which reports are to be printed when you do a given close and where to send the
report(s). Press the Report Settings button to expand the End of Period Processing dialog and
display these options:
80 • End of Period Processing
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
If you have WinSen Electronic Manager, you can specify report settings for each site. A list box
will be visible, allowing you to change site records and select the report settings for each site.
The report setting matrix allows you to configure which reports are to be printed when the associated
close is performed (daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly). The available closing reports are
as follows:
•
The Trial Balance Report is the same report as the Month To Date Trial Balance described
in the Reports Menu but will show activity for the appropriate period.
•
The Rental Activity Report is in the same format as the Month To Date Rental Activity
Report except that it reflects only that day. The Rental Activity Report is available only on
a daily basis.
•
The Transaction Log provides a detailed listing, with transaction numbers, of all the
financial activity and notice activity for the day. The information printed identifies the
specifics of each transaction along with a brief description of the transaction. The
Transaction Log is available on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
•
The Bank Deposit Log provides a summary of the days deposits and identifies them as cash,
check, or credit card. Check entries include the check number and bank number, and all
cases identify the tenant and the unit number. The Bank Deposit Log is available on a
daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
•
Financial Export is available as an option. If you have purchased the Financial Export
package, you can specify that the system is to export information on a daily, weekly,
monthly, quarterly, or yearly basis. Data is exported in a format suitable for import into
popular financial packages, for example Quicken. Contact SSC for more information on the
Financial Export Option.
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
End of Period Processing • 81
To cause one or more of these reports to be printed in connection with a given close, place a check
mark in the appropriate position in the matrix by clicking with your mouse. When finished with
your report selections, press the Save Settings button to return to the End of Period Processing form.
Output Options
This portion of the expanded End of Period Processing dialog lets you change where the closing
report will be sent. You can choose to have the closing report sent to the printer (this is the default
choice), to a window, or to a file. Note that these choices are not saved in between closes. Thus, if
you print to a window today, tomorrows close will be sent to the printer unless you once again select
to output to a window.
Copies
This setting allows you to print more than one copy of the close, if desired. Merely type in the
number of copies of the closing report that you require. From then on, that number of copies of the
closing documents will be printed with each close.
Combine Proof Edit Processing
This option is only available when operating WinSen Electronic Manager. When this option is
checked and a Proof Edit Reconciliation is being performed, the daily totals to be entered will be for
all the sites combined, rather than a separate entry for each site.
Reprinting a Closing or Charger report
Only the last close can be reprinted in WinSen Lite
WinSen Property Manager allows you to reprint a closing or charger report if needed. Select the
Reprint a Close or Reprint a Charger button. The following form will appear:
The list will show the date, time, and a description of the reports available for reprinting. Select the
desired report by double clicking, or by highlighting the report and choosing the Print button.
82 • End of Period Processing
Chapter 2 - Daily Operations
Other Tenant Operations
View Transactions
This option allows you to review the transactions that have occurred on any customer, past or
present. To access it, choose the “View” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selecting the desired tenant. The
following form will appear:
The Unit Number, Customer Name, Transaction #, Date, Transaction Type, Closing Date, and User
ID will be displayed at the top of the form. In addition, all of the details for that transaction,
including the description, date, time, and amount applied to each category, and the balance and paidto-date of the unit at the time of the transaction are shown. Use the Data Control Bar to scroll
through the transactions for this customer.
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
View Transactions • 83
Print Button
Choose this button to reprint a receipt of the transaction.
Printer Button
This button allows you to change the destination printer. Choosing it will display the Select Printer
form. For instructions on using this form, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
Tenant History
The Tenant History function allows viewing of all information contained in the system relating to the
currently selected unit (if the unit is occupied). It is available from either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) by pressing the “History” button on the
Toolbar. When you choose this button you will see the following form:
Report
Select the report you would like to print from the drop down list. The choices are as follows:
•
Tenant Ledger - summary & transactions: this option prints both a summary of the
tenant’s account and the transactions that have occurred to the unit.
•
Tenant Ledger: prints just the summary of the tenant’s account.
•
Transaction History: prints just the transaction history.
Output Options
You can choose to have the history report printed to your Printer, to a Window, or to a file by
clicking the appropriate choice.
•
Output to Printer: the history report will be sent to the currently selected printer. To
change the destination printer, choose the “Printers” button and the Printers form will
appear. For more information on the Printers form, see “Select Printer Form” on page 16.
•
Output to Window: the history report will be printed to a window. After the window
appears, allowing you to view the report on the screen, you will have a number of options.
For information on these options, see “Report Viewing Form” on page 18.
84 • Tenant History
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
•
Output to File - the history report will be printed in RTF format to a file named
XXXXXXXX.RTF where XXXXXXXX is the name of the original report file. For example,
“tledger.rpt” is used to print the tenant ledger. If you output the Tenant Ledger report to a
file, “tledger.rtf” will be created in the same folder where WinSen is installed. These files
can then be loaded into Microsoft Word or any other program capable of reading .rtf format
files.
When you have finished selecting your options, choose the “OK” button to generate the history
report.
Print a Letter
Normally all late letters, billing notices, rate change notices, etc. are printed through Late Letters
and Mailings. However, there may be times when you wish to quickly print a notice to a tenant
without going to that function. This option, available from either of the Tenant Forms (View/Edit
Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table), allows you to do this. Choose the “Letter” button
from the Toolbar on either form to display this form:
The unit number and customer name are displayed at the top of the form. To print a letter to this
tenant, select the following options, and then choose the “Print Letter” button.
Letters
Choose the letter you wish to print from the list. Note that you may not be able to see all of the
choices at once. If this is the case, press on the vertical scroll bar to scroll the list.
Use Word
When this option is checked the letters list will display the available Word templates to select from,
and the system will use Word to print the letter, rather than Crystal Reports.
TMSA Export
If you are using Blue Moon software to print TMSA contracts, you can reprint the TMSA contract
by checking this box. The Print Letter button will change to Export; click to export to Blue Moon
and reprint the TMSA contract.
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Print a Letter • 85
Output Options
You can choose to have the letter printed to your Printer, to a Window, or to a file by clicking the
appropriate choice.
•
Output to Printer: the letter will be sent to the currently selected printer. To change the
destination printer, choose the “Printers” button and the Printers form will appear. For more
information on the Printers form, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
•
Output to Window: the letter will be printed to a window. After the window appears,
allowing you to view the letter on the screen, you will have a number of options. For
information on these options, see “Report Viewing Form” on page 18.
•
Output to File - the letter will be printed in RTF format to a file named XXXXXXXX.RTF
where XXXXXXXX is the name of the original letter file. For example, “late1.let” is used to
print the 1st late letter. If you output the letter to a file, “late1.rtf” will be created in the same
folder where WinSen is installed. These files can then be loaded into Microsoft Word or any
other program capable of reading .rtf format files.
•
Email: the letter will be exported and converted to RTF format, then the system will bring
up the computers default email screen, with the tenant’s e-mail address already filled in if
appropriate.
Note: this technique has been tested with current versions of the most popular e-mail programs
(such as Outlook and Eudora). We can't promise that it will work with all e-mail programs or
with future versions of the programs we have tested. Not all AOL versions are MAPI-compliant
and therefore may not support this e-mail feature.
When you have finished selecting your options, choose the OK button to generate the letter.
Change Due Day
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
This option allows you to change the Rent Due Day for a customer. It is very useful in certain
situations. For example, let’s suppose a tenant is due on the first of March. They come in on the
second and tell you they will be renting until the 15th, then they plan on moving out. To handle this,
you would select the Change Due Day option and change the due day to the 15th. The system will
move the paid-to-date to the 15th of March, pro-rate the rent and other regular charges from the 1st
to the 15th, and ask you to collect this amount. The rent that had been charged on the first will be
adjusted accordingly.
To access this option, select the “Due Day” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table). The following form will appear:
86 • Change Due Day
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
In the Rent Due Day box, type the new due day. The system will respond by calculating the
appropriate charges and bringing up the Paid By Window, allowing you to enter the payment
method, e.g., cash, check, or credit card. For help entering the payment, see “The Paid By Window”
on page 100.
The system will then change the tenant’s paid-to-date to reflect the new Rent Due Day, and give you
the opportunity to print one or more receipts of the transaction.
Change Unit Status
This option allows you to change the status of a unit, for example from Vacant to Unrentable, or
from Rented to Complimentary. It also lets you add or delete other units to a tenant’s account.
Handling multiple units is explained in the following section.
To access this option, select the “Status” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selection of the proper unit. The
following form will appear:
The available options will change depending on the current status of the unit. For example, a rented
unit can be changed to Complimentary or Access Control only, but it cannot be made Unrentable.
A unit must be vacant to be made Unrentable.
New Unit Status
The choices are as follows:
•
Vacant, Rentable: the unit is available for rental.
•
Vacant, Unrentable: the unit is vacant, but is not rentable.
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Change Unit Status • 87
•
Complimentary: the unit is occupied at no charge to the tenant.
•
Rented: the unit is a normal rented unit.
•
Access Control Only: the unit is used only for access control. Use this type of unit for
giving access to the fire and police departments, the garbage collection company, etc. Since
this type of unit is not counted in the reports as a rentable unit, it does not affect the
occupancy statistics.
Select the new status for the unit by clicking on the appropriate button. Then click OK to change the
unit to the new status.
Multiple Units
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
This option allows you to associate additional units with a tenants account, or delete them. It is very
useful when a customer is renting more than one unit from you.
Multiple Unit Considerations
When a tenant has more than one unit, please note the following points:
•
The tenant may enter your facility by keying in with any of the passcodes on their units. If
you have an alarm system, the alarms on all of their units will be disabled. Conversely,
when the customer exits the facility, the alarms on all the units in the group will be enabled.
•
If you send billing statements, the system will print just one bill with all of the units in the
group on it. However, different billing types on units in a group are not supported; all units
in the group will have the same bill type and next bill date. If you change the billing type
and/or next bill date in one of the linked units, it is changed in all other units for that
customer.
•
Since the same customer is in all the units, making a change to the customer information
such as name, address, etc., will change this information for all units in the group. Making
changes in this manner may adversely affect your legal relationship with your customer and
should only be done with appropriate notifications and approval. Such changes should only
be made with site management approval.
•
Since the same customer is in all the units, all units in the group will assume the tax status of
the customer. Thus, changing the tax status on one unit in a group will change the tax status
of all units in the group.
Working with the Multiple Unit Dialog
To access the Multiple Units option, select the “Status” button from the Toolbar on either of the
Tenant Forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selection of the
proper unit. Then press the “Multiple Units” button on the Change Status form. The following form
will be displayed:
88 • Multiple Units
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
The list of other units (if any) that are associated with this customer will be shown. After making
your changes as explained below, press the Close button to return to the “Change Status” form.
To add a unit to the list
Press the “Add unit” button. The system will ask you to enter the unit number:
Enter the unit number you wish to add, and then choose “OK”. The system will ask if you really
wish to link the units. Answer Y to link the units together. The unit will be added to the list, and the
“Total Balance” will be updated to reflect the change.
To remove a unit from the list
Highlight the unit you wish to remove, and press the “Remove unit” button. The system will verify
that you really want to delete the unit from the list. Answer Y to delete it. This unlinks the unit from
the others in the group, but doesn’t change any of the tenant information associated with the unit.
Change Security Information
This option allows you to perform security related operations for a unit. This is where you change
the tenants gate access passcode or card number, disable the unit alarm on a permanent or timed
basis, and change the Time Zone and Access Level for a tenant.
To access this option, select the “Security” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table). The following form will appear:
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Change Security Information • 89
After making your changes as explained below, press the OK button to save your changes and return
to the previous form.
Change Passcode or Card Number
The passcode field applies if you are using keypads, while the card number applies if you are using
card readers for access to your facility. To change, type the new passcode or card number in the
appropriate box, then choose “OK”. The new information will be sent to the access control system
(if it is compatible with WinSen Property Manager), and the customer record will be updated.
See “Appendix O – WinSen Passcodes / Maximum Digits” on page 238 for the range of digits that
can be used for assigning passcodes.
Additional Codes
This function allows additional card numbers and/or passcodes to be added, edited, or deleted for the
currently selected unit. Click the “Additional Codes” button on the Change Security Information
form to display the following form:
You can assign as many additional passcodes/card numbers as may be required for a particular unit.
Each one can have their own time zone and the name entered here will show up on activity reports.
If you are using unit/passcode style keypads, each passcode must be unique within the selected unit.
If you are using passcode-only keypads, each passcode must be unique. Also, each card number
must be unique.
90 • Change Security Information
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
To add a new passcode and/or card number, you can just start typing; as soon as the cursor moves to
a new row the tenant will be added. You can also click the Add button, then type in the information.
Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected record. Use Apply to apply any changes
without closing the form. Click OK to save your changes and close the form, or Cancel if you wish
to close the form without saving any changes that have been made.
Change Alarm Status
This section only applies if you are using a door alarm system.
These two check boxes allow you to disable the alarm on a unit, either permanently or on a timed
basis.
Permanently disabled alarm: Check this box to make this unit alarm a permanently disabled
alarm (PDA). This means the alarm is disabled on this unit until it is re-armed by the system
operator. For more information, see the WinSen Sentinel manual.
Timed disabled alarm: Check this box to make the alarm on this unit a time disabled alarm
(TDA). Normally, unit alarms are enabled or disabled by keypad or card reader access or by
operator intervention. In some instances, though, it may be desirable for certain alarms to be
automatically enabled or disabled on the basis of time of day. For example, building access doors
are best alarmed on a timed basis. Note that for this option to be functional, it must be enabled in
“Setups” in WinSen Sentinel. For additional information on time disabled alarms, see the WinSen
Sentinel manual.
Change Time Zone or Access Level
Time zones allow you to define your gate hours for tenants. This option selects the time zone for the
tenant, not the gate hours for the time zone. To change the gate hours defined for a time zone, you
must go to WinSen Sentinel. To change the time zone assignment for this tenant, select the desired
choice from the drop down list.
Access levels allow you to restrict the tenants access to certain parts of your storage facility. To
change the access level assignment for this tenant, select the desired access level from the drop down
list.
Note: For more information on Time Zones and Access Levels, or if you need to change the actual
gate hours or the access level definitions, see the WinSen Sentinel manual.
Lock or Unlock a Tenant
This option is used to override the normal system operations of automatically locking tenants out
when they are delinquent and re-admitting them when they pay up. You would normally not need to
use this function, however there are certain exceptions. For example, if a tenant was locked out by
the Daily Charger and you have decided to re-admit them.
To access this option, select the “Lock” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table). The following form will appear:
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Lock or Unlock a Tenant • 91
The system will display the Unit number and Name, the Current Paid to Date, and the status of the
unit, for example “Locked 0”, meaning this unit is currently locked out. If the tenant is late, the
number of days late will be shown. If the unit is not late, the number of prepaid days will be shown
instead. Any additional passcodes assigned to the unit will also be locked or unlocked by this
function.
Lock/Unlock Buttons
If the unit is currently locked, the “Lock” button will be disabled, and vice versa. Choose the
appropriate button to lock or unlock this unit. The new information will be sent to the access control
system (if it is compatible with WinSen Property Manager), the customer record will be updated, and
the form will close.
Process Lien Status
This option is used to place tenants into and remove them from “Lien Status”. It is also used to edit
the lien information for a unit that is already in Lien Status, for example adding additional lien
charges, changing the inventory, etc.
Note: The system has the capability of placing tenants into Lien status automatically. See “Late
Cycles/Fees” on page 151 for more information on this option.
To place a tenant into lien status, remove them from lien status, or make changes to the lien record,
select the “Lien” button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form
or View/Edit Tenant - Table) after selecting the proper tenant. The following form will appear:
92 • Process Lien Status
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Load Default Lien Information
Click the “defaults” button to load the “lien configuration” (configured in Site Setup – Site
Information), containing pre-defined lien descriptions and charges, and auction information. This
negates having to re-enter this information for each unit being placed in “lien” status. Choose this
button and your pre-defined lien charges and auction information will be copied to the lien process
window. You can then make any necessary changes and proceed.
Lien Charges, Inventory, and Auction Info Tabs
The form has a series of tabs which display information about this lien record. Click the tabs with
your mouse to display and edit the following:
Lien Charges
Ten lien charge entries are available. Type in a brief description of the lien charge (e.g., “Cut Lock,
Inventory, etc.”), and the amount of the charge. The total of these charges plus any applicable tax
will be added to the tenant’s account when the lien record is saved.
Inventory
Prior to placing a lien on the contents of the unit, you may need to cut the lock and inventory the
tenant’s goods. This form is used to record a description of the inventory of the unit. You can enter
the data in any format you wish.
Auction Info.
Record the location, date and time the auction of the tenant’s goods will take place.
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Process Lien Status • 93
Saving your changes
When you have finished filling in all relevant information, choose the OK button to save the changes
you have made. The result of doing this will depend on the current status of the unit as follows:
If the tenant is not in Lien Status, this will place them into “Lien Status 0” and exit from the Lien
form.
If the tenant is already in Lien Status, the system will ask if you want to “Complete the Lien?” If
you are only updating the lien record and wish to keep the tenant in lien status, answer No. Your
changes will be saved and the lien form will close.
If you have auctioned off the tenant’s goods, or if they have come in to pay their balance, answer
Yes. The system will then ask “Do you wish to retain the tenant after today’s close?” Respond to
this question as follows:
•
If you have auctioned off the tenant’s goods or otherwise disposed of the unit’s
contents: answer No to the “Retain tenant?” question. The system will then display the Paid
By window, where you will enter the amount of auction revenue, if any, that was received.
You will then be given the opportunity to print a “final lien letter” to the tenant. Then the
system will ask, “Do you wish to vacate the unit immediately?” If you answer Yes, the unit
will be vacated immediately. Otherwise, the unit will be vacated when you run the Daily
Close.
•
If the tenant has come in to pay their charges: answer Yes to the “Retain tenant?”
question. The unit status will change to “Lien Status 2”, the lien window will close, and you
will then proceed to the Payment form to enter the tenant’s payment. When the Daily Close
is run, the unit’s status will revert to “Rented”.
Tax on Auction Revenue
If the system is configured to charge tax on auction revenue, and you auction off a tenant’s goods,
then complete the lien without retaining the tenant as explained above, it is necessary to tell the
system if the buyer is tax exempt or not. In this situation, the following form will be displayed
before the paid by window is displayed:
Auction Revenue
Enter the amount of auction revenue collected. This is the amount that the tax will be calculated on,
if the buyer is taxable. The subsequent Paid By window will expect this amount plus the applicable
taxes. The auction revenue posted by the system does not include the sales tax collected.
94 • Process Lien Status
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Amount is Taxable
If the buyer is tax exempt, clear this check box and no tax will be added to the amount in Auction
Revenue. Otherwise, the taxes configured to be charged on auction revenue as defined on the
General tab of Site Setup will be calculated and assessed.
Posting a Returned Check
Posting a returned check is accomplished by first selecting the proper unit on either of the tenant
forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table), then clicking the Returned
Check button on the Toolbar. The following form will be displayed:
Enter the amount of the returned check, the NSF charge, the check number, and any retroactive late
fees to be assessed. Any taxes applicable to the NSF fee charged will be shown at the bottom of the
form, and added to the tenant's balance when the OK button is clicked.
“Months to roll paid-to-date” field in the returned check window
This field requires some additional explanation. There are three methods the system uses to
determine what to do with the paid-to-date when a returned check is posted (or paid). The method to
use is configured in “Site Setup”.
Method 1 - Automatic roll of paid-to-date:
The system will divide the returned check amount by the unit rate to arrive at the number of
months to roll back the paid-to-date, then will automatically roll it back. The operator cannot
access the “Months to roll” field in the “Returned Check” window. When the returned check
is paid, the paid-to-date will be rolled forward in the same manner.
Method 2 - Manual roll of paid-to-date:
The operator can access the “Months to roll” field, and can change it from the default value
if necessary. The default value will be calculated by dividing the returned check amount by
the unit rate, the same as Method 1 above. When the returned check is paid, the system
operator will be prompted for the number of months to roll the paid-to-date forward.
Method 3 - No roll of paid-to-date:
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Posting a Returned Check • 95
The paid-to-date will not change when a returned check is posted or paid, and the operator
cannot access the “Months to roll” field.
Automatic Lock-Out on Returned Check Entry
The system can be configured to automatically lock-out a tenant whenever a returned check is
posted. This option is set in Site Setup. When this option is checked, the system will lock-out a
tenant any time a returned check is posted to their account, regardless of the paid-to-date or the
amount of the check. Otherwise, the tenant will be locked out if their new paid to date makes them
late.
Note: If the tenant’s Late Type is set for “no late fees or notices”, they will not be locked-out by a
returned check entry.
Completing the Returned Check Transaction
After entering all appropriate data, click OK to complete the transaction and exit from the window.
You can press <Esc> or click Cancel to abort the transaction if necessary.
Note: A returned check that has been posted to the wrong unit by mistake can be canceled in the
“Cancel Transaction” option.
Pictures
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
The picture option allows you to associate a digitized picture with a tenant and/or unit. Pictures can
be acquired from a scanner, digital camera, or any TWAIN compliant device. Previously digitized
images stored on disk can also be loaded.
To associate a picture with a unit, select the desired unit in either of the View/Edit forms. Then click
the Picture button on the Toolbar. The following form will be displayed:
96 • Pictures
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
You can associate as many pictures with the unit as needed. To add a picture, click the add button.
You can then acquire a picture from a TWAIN compliant device by clicking the acquire button. If
you have multiple TWAIN drivers, a dialog box will be displayed allowing you to choose the one to
use. The system will run the appropriate program according to the TWAIN drivers installed on your
computer. You then use that program to download an image to WinSen. This operation will be
called “download to application” or similar in the TWAIN driver program.
You may also load a previously digitized image from disk by clicking the browse button to display a
standard file selection dialog. The system supports most popular image formats.
After loading a picture from a TWAIN device or from disk, click update to save it to the database.
When a picture is being displayed, you can zoom in or out using the zoom control. The fit in
window checkbox will cause the image to be zoomed to the appropriate size to fit in the picture
display area. You may also enter free-form notes pertaining to the picture.
To delete a picture, select the one you wish to delete using the data control bar, and then click the
delete button.
Click Cancel to exit without saving your changes, and Close to save and exit.
The recommended file size for images is less then 100 kilobytes per image.
Chapter 3 - Other Tenant Operations
Pictures • 97
General Operations
Miscellaneous Account Windows
The Miscellaneous Accounts windows include the Misc. Charges, Misc. Credits, Merchandise
Charges and Merchandise Returns. They are used when you are issuing miscellaneous charges,
credits, selling merchandise, or accepting returned merchandise. They are accessed from the various
tenant forms by pressing any key or double clicking when the cursor is on one of these fields. Shown
below is the Miscellaneous Charge window:
To use this window, you first select the proper account item from the drop down list. Any number of
accounts can be involved in a given transaction.
If you are issuing a miscellaneous charge or credit, select the appropriate account from the list, then
enter the amount to be charged or credited, depending on the type of transaction. Then click the Add
button to add the charge or credit to the list.
If you are selling or accepting back a merchandise item, the miscellaneous accounts window will
show additional fields, as shown:
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Miscellaneous Account Windows • 99
To sell or return merchandise, first select the item from the drop down list, then enter the quantity
sold or returned. The system will multiply the quantity by the price to arrive at the amount; therefore
you cannot enter the amount directly when working with merchandise.
When you have entered all necessary information, press the “OK” button to close this window and
return to your previous form.
The Paid By Window
Whenever you perform a transaction where money is to be collected, the system will display the
“Paid By Window”:
The Paid By Window allows you to enter the method of payment: Cash, Check, or Card (Credit
card). If the payment is not a combination of these you can quickly enter the payment amount by
clicking on the appropriate check box. For example, if the amount due is $19.84 and the tenant is
paying you the total amount in cash, click on the “Cash” check box, and the system will fill in the
$19.84 for you in the Cash field. Then click on “OK” to complete the payment.
If the payment is a combination payment (a mixture of cash and check, for example) merely enter the
amounts in the appropriate entry box. Then choose “OK” to complete the payment.
Some of the program functions allow a transaction to be completed without payment, for example
Change Due Day. In this case, merely choose “OK” without entering any amounts to complete the
transaction.
You can also choose “Cancel” to cancel the Paid By Window and return to the previous function, or
“Help” to display on-line help.
100 • The Paid By Window
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Payments by Credit Card
If the payment is by credit card, the Paid By Window will display four additional fields:
These additional fields allow you to enter the card number and expiration date, and if both credit
card POS processing and the CVV2 option is enabled, you can optionally enter the CVV2 (“Card
Verification Value 2”) number associated with the credit card. For more information on CVV2, see
“Enable CVV2” on page 162.
The Type field cannot be edited; it will be populated by the system based on the credit card number.
If you are using the Quicken Export Option, or the ICVerify or PCCharge programs for automatic
credit card payment processing, filling in the credit card number & exp. date fields is necessary.
Otherwise, they are optional.
Credit Card Processing
If you are using ICVerify or PCCharge to automatically debit credit cards, the system will pass the
credit card number, expiration date, and optionally the CVV2 number to the credit card processing
program for processing as soon as you click OK. Based on the response WinSen receives from the
credit card processing program, it will then complete the transaction, or warn you if there are
problems processing the credit card payment.
For more information regarding using WinSen with ICVerify or PCCharge, see “Appendix J – Using
WinSen with ICVerify” on page 233 or “Appendix K – Using WinSen with PCCharge” on page 235.
Find Unit Function
This function allows you to search for any unit, for example if a tenant sends you a payment check
without writing their unit number on it. You access the Find Unit function by choosing the Find
button on the appropriate tenant window (for example, from the View/Edit Tenant-Form). You
will see the following form:
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Find Unit Function • 101
Field
From the drop down list, choose the field to search. You can search any of the following fields:
Unit Number, Customer name, Customer ID, Customer Address lines 1 & 2, Customer City,
State, Zip, E-mail address, Residence and Business phone numbers, License number, Tracking
Number, Passcode, and Comments.
Operator
From the drop down list, choose the type of search to perform. The choices are:
•
Equal - the data being searched for must be equal to the search entry.
•
Not equal - the data being searched for must not be equal to the search entry.
•
Less than - the data being searched for must be less than the search entry.
•
Less than or equal - the data being searched for must be less than or equal to the search
entry.
•
Greater than - the data being searched for must be greater than the search entry.
•
Greater than or equal - the data being searched for must be greater than or equal to the
search entry.
•
Contains - the data being searched for must contain the search entry. It can be anywhere in
the data, e.g., at the beginning, somewhere in the middle, or at the end.
•
Starts with - the data being searched for must begin with the search entry.
•
Ends with - the data being searched for must end with the search entry.
Note that if you have chosen to look for a name in the Field box, the Operator box will default to a
“Contains” search type, while if you have chosen to look for a unit number, the Operator box
defaults to “Equal”.
Entry
Enter the data to look for. For example, enter a portion or all of the customer’s name, or the unit
number to find.
Save Find Settings
When this box is checked the find dialog box will remember which field was last used for searching
a record and will use that field when the Find Dialog box is displayed. If this box is unchecked then
the field to search will always default to Unit number.
Find Next and Find Previous Buttons
Press one of these buttons to search for your entered data with the selected criteria. The “Find Next”
button searches your database forward from the current record number, while the “Find Previous”
button will search your data in reverse order.
The system will display the first record it finds that matches your criteria. If that record isn’t the one
you want, press one of the two Find buttons to search again. If your entry is not found, a message
will be displayed to notify you of this.
102 • Find Unit Function
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Find Vacant Unit Function
This function allows you to search for a vacant unit, normally during the move-in or transfer
process. Access the Find Vacant Unit function by choosing the Find Unit button on the
appropriate tenant window (for example, from the Assign Tenant Form). You will see the following
form:
Size Code
In the list of size codes, click the desired unit size. The system will then show all vacant units of that
size, how many were found, the rate, and the deposit. Then select a specific unit by double clicking
it or highlighting it with your mouse and clicking the OK button. To close without selecting a unit,
click the Cancel button.
Find Tenant / Prelease / Prospect Function
This function allows you to search for a current or former tenant, a preleased unit, or a prospective
tenant. It is used during the Assign Tenant process after you have selected a unit to be assigned, or
prior to assigning the unit if searching for a preleased tenant. You would then use the Find Tenant
function to find a current or a former tenant if they are renting another unit from you.
This form is also used to find a preleased tenant when you click the Find Prelease button on the
Assign Tenant form. If you click the Find Prospect button it is used to locate a prospect and import
the prospective tenant data into the Assign Tenant form.
Select this option from the Assign Tenant form to display the following form:
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Find Vacant Unit Function • 103
There are two ways to find a current or former tenant, preleased unit, or prospective tenant:
1. Type in the first few letters of the name you are searching for. The highlight will move to
the first entry in the list that matches your typed in letters.
2. Open the drop down list by clicking on its arrow, then scroll through the list of names until
the one you are looking for is found.
When you have found the desired tenant, click OK to close this form and return to the Assign Tenant
dialog.
Sort Options Window
WinSen Property Manager has the ability to sort reports and notices by selected criteria. You can
have multiple sort keys, in other words, primary and secondary sorting criteria can be used for the
sort. For example, you could have your Tenant Status Report sorted by tenant name with a
secondary sort by unit number. The resulting report would group tenants who have more than one
unit in unit number order.
In addition, you can select to have items sorted in ascending or descending order. For example,
sorting by Tenant Name could be in ascending order (A to Z) or descending order (Z to A).
The Report Menu and the Late Letters and Mailings form allow you to select sort options. When
you do this the following form will appear:
104 • Sort Options Window
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Possible and Selected Fields Boxes
Possible Fields box: These are the fields that are not currently chosen for a sort key.
Selected Fields box: These are the fields that have been chosen for sort keys. In the example, the
“A” in front of the selected field designates that it has been chosen to be sorted in ascending order,
while “D” would indicate a descending sort.
To make a selection in one of the boxes, click on it with your mouse. Then select one of the buttons
to perform an operation on that field as explained below.
Action Buttons
Add All button: This button will move all selections from the Possible fields box to the Selected
fields box. This option is not recommended, since sorting on more than two sort keys will usually
not have much effect.
Add button: This button will add the currently highlighted selection in Possible fields to the
Selected fields box. It will be added to the bottom of the list in the Selected fields box.
Move up button: This button will move the currently highlighted selection in Selected fields up one
position in the list. This button and the Move down button allow you to select the order of
precedence for the sort operation.
Move down button: This button will move the currently highlighted selection in Selected fields
down one position in the list.
Remove button: Moves the currently highlighted selection in Selected fields to the Possible fields
box (deselects that option).
Remove all button: This button will move all selections from the Selected fields box to the Possible
fields box. Thus, no sorting would occur.
Sort Direction
Choose Ascending or Descending to sort the currently selected field in ascending (A to Z) or
descending (Z to A) order.
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Sort Options Window • 105
OK Button
Choose OK to save your sort selections and return to your previous form.
The Calculator
To access the calculator, choose the Calc. button from the Toolbar on either of the tenant forms
(View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table). This will launch the Windows
calculator.
For help running the Windows calculator, access its on-line help by pressing <F1> when it is active,
or consult your Windows documentation.
Notepad
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
The Notepad feature allows you to record and store extensive information regarding a unit and/or
tenant. You can enter a note for any unit, rented or not. Choose the Notepad button from the
Toolbar on either of the Tenant Forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table)
and the notepad form will appear:
106 • The Calculator
Chapter 4 - General Operations
The cursor will be positioned in the edit window. You can enter extensive information about this
unit in any format you desire. When you are finished, press the Save button to save the note.
Note Alert: Click this checkbox to cause the notepad to pop up automatically anytime the unit is
accessed in either of the View/Edit forms. This would be useful if the note contains critical
information that all operators of the system need to know about. For example, the tenant has
multiple returned checks and you do not want anyone to accept checks from the tenant.
Delete button: Press this button to delete the currently displayed note. The system will verify that
you really want to delete it. Choose Yes to permanently delete the note.
Reminders
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
Reminders are a handy feature that allows you to put in a line of text to be printed on the Daily
Charger report on a specified date. They can be setup to print just once, or on a daily, weekly,
monthly or yearly basis. Choose the Reminders button from the Toolbar on either of the Tenant
Forms (View/Edit Tenant - Form or View/Edit Tenant - Table) and the Reminders form will
appear:
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Reminders • 107
Entering a new Reminder
Begin by pressing the Add button. It will change to an Update button which you will press to save
your changes after entering your data as follows:
Entry Date
Today’s date, it will be filled in automatically and cannot be changed.
Reminder Date
Enter the date the reminder is due. On this date, the Daily Charger will print the text of the reminder
on the charger report.
Type of Reminder
This field allows you to choose the frequency of the reminder, e.g., one-time only, weekly, etc.
Choose the desired option from the drop down list box.
Notes
A single line where you can record the purpose of the reminder. For example, the door company is
due to repair the unit door on that day, etc.
Editing or deleting existing Reminders
First select the correct record using the Data Control Bar.
If you want to edit the reminder, merely make any necessary changes and press the Close button to
save your changes and exit.
To delete the reminder, press the Delete button. The system will confirm your choice by asking
“Delete this reminder - are you sure?” Choose “Yes” to delete the reminder.
Note: “One-Time Only” reminders will be deleted automatically by the system on the day they are
printed. Only recurring Reminders will need to be deleted manually if not set to be deleted under
Site Setup/General/Reminder Options.
Reminders Report
A Reminders Report is available through the Reports & Graph Menu. A regular review of the
Reminders Report will assist the site in managing this feature.
Waiting List
The Waiting List function is used to keep track of people who want to rent a unit when you have no
units available. Select this option from the Main Menu to display the following form:
108 • Waiting List
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Adding an Entry to the Waiting List
Press the Add button to add a new record to the Waiting List. When you do this, it will change to an
Update button which you will press to save your new record after filling in all relevant entries as
explained below.
Editing or Deleting Entries from the Waiting List
First select the correct record using the Data Control Bar.
To edit the Waiting List record, merely make any necessary changes and press the Close button to
save your changes and exit.
To delete the record, press the Delete button. The system will confirm your choice by asking
“Delete current record?” Choose Yes to delete it.
Name, Address & Phone Numbers
Enter the name, address, and phone numbers of the person in these fields as appropriate.
Need By
Enter the date the unit is needed by.
Placed on Waiting List
This date will be filled in with today’s date automatically, and can be changed if necessary.
Desired Size Codes
Enter the size code(s) of the prospective tenant’s desired unit size.
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Waiting List • 109
Desired Units
Optionally, enter the unit number(s) of the prospective tenant’s desired unit.
Comments
If desired, you can enter a short comment here. Up to 30 characters are allowed.
Prospective Tenants
The Prospective Tenants functions in Winsen allow you to keep track of prospective tenants, follow
up with them with printed letters and/or e-mails, and print reports. The Prospective Tenant functions
are broken down into three major areas: Prospective Tenants, where you enter details on the
prospects such as name, address, desired storage sizes, anticipated length of stay, and so on;
Prospective Tenant Mailings, where documents are printed and/or e-mailed to them; and
Prospective Tenant Reports, where a variety of reports are available to assist in your sales
activities.
Additionally, prospective tenants who are now renting a unit can be imported into the Assign
Tenant screen by first selecting the unit to be rented, then clicking the Find Prospect button. After
the correct prospective tenant record has been located, the system will copy the relevant data into the
Assign Tenant fields. When the movein is completed the prospective tenant data is updated so it
will be properly shown on the Sales Effectiveness Report, which details the effectiveness of the
sales efforts in converting the prospective tenants to actual ones.
From the Main Menu, select any of the three Prospective Tenant functions to display the
Prospective Tenant Management form. The form has three tabs: one for each function.
Entering, Editing, and Deleting Prospective Tenants
From the Main Menu, select Prospective Tenants to display the following form:
110 • Prospective Tenants
Chapter 4 - General Operations
The currently entered prospects are shown in a grid format. Not all columns are shown in the
illustration; use the horizontal and vertical scrollbars as required to display all columns/rows. You
can move the columns around by dragging with the mouse. Click the column headings to sort the list
by that column.
Click the Delete button to delete a prospect. The system will ask if you really wish to delete the
prospect; click Yes to delete the record.
The Show drop-down list allows you to display Open Prospects, Prospects Needing Followup,
Closed Prospects (ones who rented one or more units), and All Prospects. By default it shows
Open Prospects.
Click the Add button to add a new prospect. Double click a prospect or click the Edit button to edit
that prospect. The following form will be displayed where you enter the prospect details:
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Prospective Tenants • 111
Enter as much information as is available/needed. For each prospect, you can keep track of the
name, address, phone numbers, e-mail address, comments, information about needed storage, sales
information, advertising effectiveness, and demographic information.
Storage Needs
This section is for the storage needs of the prospect. You can enter a brief description (up to 255
characters) of the storage needed, two different sizes needed, whether or not the prospect has rented
storage before, when the storage is needed by, and the anticipated length of stay. You can also check
your vacancies by clicking either of the Check Vacancies buttons. The Check Vacancies form will
be displayed. Selecting a size from this form and clicking OK will then populate the appropriate
Sizes Needed drop-down.
112 • Prospective Tenants
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Sales Activity
This section is for tracking the sales activities to help convince the prospect to rent storage from you.
You can set an appointment and mark if the appointment was kept. Also shown is the outcome and
movein date for the prospect, if applicable.
The Followup Actions portion of the screen allows followup actions to be scheduled. The standard
possible followup actions are two letters to be printed, two e-mails to be sent, phone call, or send an
information packet. The list of possible followup actions can be edited in Site Setup|Other
Tab|Prospective Tenant Followup Actions.
To schedule a followup action, select the Followup checkbox in the appropriate action, and enter the
Followup Date when that followup action should be performed.
For the printing and e-mailing followup methods, the system can print the letters, send the e-mails,
and update the Completed status of the follow up action on the date scheduled. For other followup
methods (phone call, send information packet, etc.), you will need to manually update the
Completed checkbox when they have been done. The Prospective Tenants Needing Followup
report gives details on the followup actions that need to be done.
Advertising/Demographics
The Advertising/Demographics tab of the Edit Prospect form allows you to capture advertising
effectiveness and demographic information for the prospect, just as you can in the Assign Tenant and
View/Edit forms. To assist in your marketing efforts, Prospective Tenants Advertising
Effectiveness and Prospective Tenants Demographics reports are available which summarize this
information.
Prospective Tenant Mailings
From the Main Menu, select Prospective Tenant Mailings to display the following form:
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Prospective Tenants • 113
All printed documents and e-mails that are scheduled for today or earlier but not yet done will be
shown. Documents that are checked in the Include column will be processed. By default they are
all selected. Click Print to process them. As they are processed, the E-Mail Events listbox will
show the current activity. When the documents have been printed and/or e-mailed, the system will
update the Completed column.
You can select / deselect mailings individually by clicking the Include checkbox, or in groups by
clicking the Select All or Select None button. The items that are affected by this are controlled by
the dropdown. If Both is selected then the buttons act on all mailing types; otherwise whatever type
is selected is affected. This could be useful if you wish to process only the printed documents, and
send the e-mails later, for an example. From the drop-down list you would choose EMail
Documents, then click Select None and all email documents would be unchecked under the Include
column. At some later time in the day when you return to this screen, the e-mail documents would
still show as needing to be sent.
If you need to reprint documents that have already been processed, click the Refresh button. All
documents for the day will be reselected.
Use the Printer button to change the printer for printed documents. For testing purposes, you can
output the printed documents to a Window instead of the printer by selecting that option. To test the
e-mailed documents there is an email testing mode available; this is configured in Site Setup|Other
Tab|Configure Email Letters.
114 • Prospective Tenants
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Prospective Tenant Reports
From the Main Menu, select Prospective Tenant Reports to display the following form:
The Include drop-down list allows you to include in the report Open Prospects, Closed Prospects
(ones who rented one or more units), and All Prospects. By default it shows Open Prospects.
Certain reports will always include All Prospects, such as the Sales Effectiveness report.
The Start and End Date controls allow you to select a date range for the reports. The application of
the date range depends on which report is being run.
Use the Printer button to change the destination report printer.
The available Prospective Tenant Reports are:
• Prospective Tenants – provides a list of the prospective tenants who were entered in the selected
date range.
• Prospective Tenants Needing Followup – provides a list of the prospective tenants who need
followed up within the selected date range.
• Prospective Tenants with Pending Appointments – provides a list of the prospective tenants who
have pending appointments within the selected date range.
• Prospective Tenants with Completed Appointments – provides a list of the prospective tenants
who have completed appointments within the selected date range.
• Prospective Tenants – Storage Needed By – provides a list of the prospective tenants who need
storage within the selected date range.
• Sales Effectiveness – On a per-user basis, shows the effectiveness of the sales efforts in
converting prospective tenants, entered in the selected date range, into tenants.
• Prospective Tenants Advertising Effectiveness – summarizes the advertising effectiveness for
prospective tenants who were entered in the selected date range.
• Prospective Tenants Demographics – summarizes the demographic information for prospective
tenants who were entered in the selected date range.
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Prospective Tenants • 115
Select the desired report, date range, output option, and prospects to include, then click Print Report
to run the report.
116 • Prospective Tenants
Chapter 4 - General Operations
Report & Graph Menu
The Report & Graph Menu provides the ability to print, “on demand”, a great variety of site and
financially oriented reports and graphs. You can print a report or graph, display it on the screen or
direct it to a file.
WinSen Property Manager also allows you to sort your reports using a variety of “sort keys”, e.g.,
tenant name, move-in date, etc. By default, the reports are sorted in unit number order. Sorting
these reports in a different order can be of great value to the facility.
To access the Report & Graph Menu, simply select this option from the Main Menu.
Compiling & Printing Reports & Graphs
The form shown below is the Report & Graph Menu. It lists the reports and graphs available and
provides for the selection of the reports to be printed, displayed, or sent to a file. More than one
report can be selected at once. They will be printed sequentially in the order that they are listed.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Compiling & Printing Reports & Graphs • 117
Report Selections
In this box, select the report(s) and/or graph(s) you wish to print by clicking with your mouse. You
can de-select a selected report by clicking it again. Another method of selecting or deselecting a
report is to press the key corresponding to the first letter of the report you wish to print. The
highlight will move to the first report beginning with that letter. If that is not the one you want, press
the key again. Then select or deselect the report by pressing <Spacebar>.
Site Selection
If you have WinSen Electronic Manager, it is necessary to define which site you wish each report
to be printed for. After selecting the report, a list of the available sites will be displayed:
Note that this dialog is not displayed if the report you selected is not “site-specific”. For example,
the rate change report is global to all sites, so the above dialog will not be displayed if you select it.
Select “Main Office” to print reports combining all of the sites. Otherwise, select one or more sites
to include on the report(s). If you select more than one site, you will get a report for each selected
site (they are not combined unless you select the main office). Click OK when you are finished
selecting sites.
Print Selections
When finished selecting your reports, sites, output options, tenant options, and sort options, click the
Print Selections button to generate the report(s).
Output Options
You can choose to have the report/graph printed to your Printer, to a Window, or to a file by clicking
the appropriate choice.
•
Output to Printer - the report will be sent to the currently selected printer. To change the
destination printer, choose the “Printers” button and the Printers form will appear. For more
information on the Printers form, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
•
Output to Window - the report will be printed to a window. After the window appears,
allowing you to view the report on the screen, you will have a number of options. For
information on these options, see “Report Viewing Form” on page 18.
•
Output to File - the report will be printed in RTF format to a file named XXXXXXXX.RTF
where XXXXXXXX is the name of the original report file. For example, “vacancy.rpt” is
used to print the standard vacancy report. If you output the vacancy report to a file,
“Vacancy.rtf” will be created in the same folder where WinSen is installed. These files can
then be loaded into Microsoft Word or any other program capable of reading .rtf format files.
118 • Compiling & Printing Reports & Graphs
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
•
Email: the report will be exported and converted to RTF format, then the system will bring
up the computers default email screen where you will be able to enter the e-mail address to
send the report.
Note: this technique has been tested with current versions of the most popular e-mail programs
(such as Outlook and Eudora). We can't promise that it will work with all e-mail programs or
with future versions of the programs we have tested. Not all AOL versions are MAPI-compliant
and therefore may not support this e-mail feature.
Tenants
This selection allows you to choose whether the selected report(s) should include all tenants (past
and present) or only current tenants. The default is “Current”.
Sort Options Button
This button will display the Sort Options Window, allowing you to sort your reports by selected
criteria. For details on selecting a sort, see “Sort Options Window” on page 104.
The following reports can be sorted by WinSen Property Manager:
• Aged Receivables
• Auto-Bill (Credit Card) Report
• Current Bad Check Report
• Customer Credit Report
• Delinquency Status Report
• Expected Vacancy Report
• Non Standard Rates Detail
• Pre-Leased Unit Report
• Reminders Report
• Rent Coming Due Report
• Rent Roll Report
• Security Deposit Report
• Site Exception Report
• Tenant Balance Report
• Tenant Billing Report
• Tenant Cross Reference Report
• Tenant Status Report
• Unit Listing Report
• Vacancy Report
The following fields are available for sorting the above listed reports:
• Unit Number
• Walk Order Number
• Access Interface Number
• Customer Name
• Unit Status
• Move-In Date
• Expected Vacancy Date
• Paid to Date
• Credit Card Expiration Date
• Last Receipt Date
• Size Code
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Compiling & Printing Reports & Graphs • 119
•
•
•
•
•
•
Customer City
Rent Due Day
Type of Billing
Unit Rate
Zip Code
Passcode
Note: When using the sort option, all reports selected at that time will be sorted by the same defined
criteria (providing they are reports that can be sorted).
Printer Button
This button allows you to change the destination printer as detailed in “Select Printer ” on page 16.
Report Descriptions
Only a limited set of reports are available in WinSen Lite. See “Appendix M - WinSen
Lite Reports Listing” for details.
Following is a listing of the currently available reports on the Report & Graph Menu. Each report
carries the title, the name of the facility and the date & time the report was printed. If it is a sortable
report and you have selected to have it sorted, the sort options will be printed at the bottom of the
report.
Due to space limitations, samples of the reports have not been included in this manual. Therefore, if
you would like to see a sample of one or more of these reports, you will need to print one.
Financial Reports
List of Accounts
This report will list the accounts that are stored within the system.
MTD and WTD Bank Deposit Log
The Month to Date and Week to Date bank deposit logs allow you to print this information on an “on
demand” basis, as opposed to printing them when you do a close in End of Period Processing. Note
that you must do the Daily Close for today’s information to appear on these reports. Information
found on these reports is:
•
Unit Number and Customer name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Trans #...the transaction number.
•
Cash...the amount of cash, if any, collected during this transaction.
•
Check, Check #, and Bank #...the amount of check, if any, collected during this transaction.
If the Check # and Bank # were captured at the time of payment they will be shown in the
appropriate column.
•
Card...the amount of credit card payment collected during this transaction.
•
Total...the total revenue received on this payment (the sum of cash, check, and card).
120 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
If the alternate bank deposit log item on the General tab in Site Setup is checked, the logs will also
include the following:
•
Rent...the amount of rent collected on this transaction.
•
Deposit...the security deposit collected on this transaction.
•
Late...the amount of late fees collected on this transaction.
•
Misc...the amount of misc. charges collected on this transaction.
WTD and MTD Transaction Log
The Week to Date and Month to Date transaction logs allow you to print this information on an “on
demand” basis, as opposed to printing them when you do a close in End of Period Processing. Note
that you must do the “Daily Close” for today’s information to appear on these reports. Information
on this report is:
•
Trans #...the transaction number.
•
Type...the transaction type.
•
Date & Time...the date and time of the transaction.
•
Unit...the unit number.
•
Cash, Check, and Card...the amount of cash, check, and card collected during this
transaction.
•
Credit...the amount of credit used or issued during this transaction.
•
Charged...the amount of misc. charges paid during this transaction.
•
Amount & Description...these fields will show the amount and description of each category
involved in that transaction. For example, if a transaction involved rent, late fees, and misc.
charges, one line will be printed on the transaction log following the main transaction entry
for each of these categories. The customer name will also be printed.
The “WTD” reports will show activity since the last Weekly Close, and the “MTD” reports will
show activity since the last Monthly Close. Activity from today will not be shown if you have
not closed for the day yet.
MTD Bank Deposit Summary
This report will summarize the amounts of cash, check, and credit card collected for each day of the
current month. It will show the totals for each day when there were any payments posted since the
last monthly close. Note that if you’ve not done your “Daily Close” yet, today’s totals will not be
included on the report. The following information is provided:
•
Close Date...the date the daily close was performed.
•
Cash...the amount of cash collected on that day.
•
Check...the amount of check collected on that day.
•
Card...the amount of credit card collected on that day.
Totals are provided at the bottom of the report for each category.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 121
The “MTD Bank Deposit Summary” provides a summary of the revenues collected for each
day, and can be used as another check for the owner or manager to be sure all monies collected
are being entered into the system properly.
Operating Income & Rental Analysis
This report provides the following information:
•
Size Code...the code assigned for that particular size unit at your facility, e.g., “A”, “B”, “C”,
“AA”, etc.
•
Size Description...the physical dimensions of a particular unit size, e.g., 5 X 5. This
information is printed directly to the right of the corresponding size code.
•
Total Units...the total number of units of that size on the facility.
•
Unit Rate...the standard monthly rate for that unit size at your site.
•
Potential Gross...the total monthly revenue that would be attained if all units of that size
were rented at the standard monthly rate.
•
Number Rented...the total number of units that are rented for that size at the time the report
is printed.
•
Percent Rented...the percent of that unit size which are currently rented (number rented /
total units of that size).
•
Potential Rent...the monthly revenue, for that unit size, that could be attained if the Number
Rented were rented at the standard rate.
•
Pre-Leased Units...the number of units in that size code which are “pre-leased”.
•
Complimentary Units...the number of units of that size that are currently occupied but no
rent is collected.
•
Complimentary Loss...the amount of revenue (calculated at standard rates) that is lost since
these units are being provided on a “complimentary” basis.
•
Unrentable Units...the number of units in that size which have been designated as
“Unrentable”.
•
Unrentable Loss...the amount of monthly revenue that is lost (calculated at standard rates)
since these units are not available to rent.
•
Actual Income...the actual amount of monthly revenue generated by that unit size at your
facility. This calculation “totals” the present rates for units of that size. If one or more units
are currently rented at non-standard rates, the amount shown in this column will be different
than that shown in the “Potential Rent” column.
•
Totals...each column, except Unit Rate, are totaled to provide information for the entire
facility.
The Operating Income and Rental Analysis report is an excellent tool for tracking actual site
performance as it relates to the potential performance for the facility.
Proof Edit Report
This report provides a list of the payments received so far for the day. Its format is similar to the
“Bank Deposit Log” printed in association with the close. Only transactions where money has been
122 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
collected will be included. Information on this report is exactly the same as the WTD and MTD
Bank Deposit Logs described above.
Square Footage Income Analysis
•
Size Description...the physical dimension of a particular size unit, e.g., “5 X 5”.
•
Total Units...the total number of units on the facility for each size code/unit size.
•
Number Rented...the number of units which are rented for each size code.
•
Square Feet Per Unit...the total rentable square feet for each unit size, e.g., a “5 X 5” unit
would show “25” in this column.
•
Total Square Feet...the total number of square feet for each unit size at the facility. For
example, if the facility had a total of seven 5 X 5 units, the amount shown would be “175”.
•
Square Foot Occupancy...the total square feet rented for each unit size. For example, if the
site had six 5 X 5 units rented, the number shown would be “150”. This amount reflects
“rented” units only and does not include “complimentary” units.
•
Square Feet Percent Occupancy...the percent of that size code that is currently rented. This
amount does not include “complimentary” units.
•
Unit Rate...the standard monthly rental rate for that unit size.
•
Potential Gross...the potential monthly revenue for that unit size (if all units of that size were
rented).
•
Actual Income...the actual monthly income for that unit size. The amount shown includes
non-standard and standard rates.
•
$ Per Square Foot Potential...the monthly dollar per square foot potential if all units of that
size code were rented at the standard rate.
•
$ Per Square Foot Actual...the monthly revenue actually attained per square foot. This
calculation is Actual Income divided by Rented Square Feet.
•
Totals...totals are provided for each appropriate category reflecting amounts for the entire
facility.
The Square Footage Income Analysis report is another financial tool for assessing the performance
of your facility.
Trial Balance
The Trial Balance report provides a month to date debit, credit and balance summary of all
transactions processed by the system.
The Month to Date Trial Balance contains five columns of information. The first column lists the
account number for each kind of transaction. The second columns are descriptive entries describing
the account. Columns three, four and five are Debit, Credit, and Balance respectively.
The trial balance categories are accumulated by the system as follows:
•
#1 - Cash, #2 - Check, & #3 - Card: The Credit column amount (check only) is returned
checks posted. The Debit column is the total of cash, check, and credit card amounts
entered into the system for the period (Day, Month, Year, etc.) This amount should
correspond with the bank deposits made by the site for the period.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 123
•
#1001 Rent: the Credit column amount is rent collected. Note that it includes credits issued
and used in the various screens, e.g., Move-in, Move-out, Daily Transactions, Etc.
•
#1002 Transfer Fee: the Credit column reflects monies collected for transferring a tenant
from one unit to another.
•
#1003 Security Deposit: the Credit column lists monies collected for security deposits.
The Debit column lists security deposits refunded.
•
#1004 Prelease Deposit: the Credit column reflects the amount of deposits collected for
preleasing units. The Debit column reflects the amount of prelease deposits forfeited.
•
#1005 and #1006 address Returned Checks and NSF fees. Returned Checks and NSF fees
will appear under the Credit column when they are re-claimed (picked up and paid for) by
the tenant. They appear as Debit entries when posted.
•
#1007, #1008 and #1009 Late Fee, Lien Fee and Lien Sale will appear under Credit when
amounts are collected and entered into the system in these categories.
•
#1010 and #1011 Use Tax and Merchandise Tax reflect the amount of tax collected for
each category. Use Tax usually applies to rent and Merchandise Tax reflects the amount of
sales tax collected by selling locks, etc. These appear as credits when amounts are collected
and entered into the system.
•
#1012 Insurance Premium is related to the premium collected for the sale of Tenants
Contents Insurance. The appropriate amounts will appear as credits when entered into the
system.
•
#1013 Administration Fee reflects the amount of one-time administration fees (charged
during move-ins) collected. This amount appears as Credits.
•
#2001 through #2099, Monthly Charges, Credit: these are the amounts collected for
“Monthly Charges” - accounts you have established to capture recurring, monthly charges
(in addition to rent) and are accessed through “Assign Tenant” and “Daily Transactions”.
They are established or changed in Site Setup.
•
#3001 through #3099 Miscellaneous Charge Accounts are the accounts you have
established for one-time charges, e.g., the sale of locks, packing materials, etc. Entries will
appear on this report as credits when amounts are collected and entered into the system.
They are accessed in Daily Transactions and Assign Tenant. Establishing and/or changing
these accounts are accomplished in Site Setup.
•
#4004 Deposits Kept: the amount of deposits kept during moveouts or final lien process.
These entries will appear under the Credit column. This amount will also include prelease
deposits forfeited.
•
#4005 Moveout Refunds: the amount of rent refunded on moveouts. This amount will
appear under the Credit column.
•
#5009 Bad Debt: This is the amount of “bad debt” entered into the system. This amount is
moveouts that have occurred where a balance due was not paid. Entries will appear under
the Debit column.
•
#6001 through #6099 Miscellaneous Credits reflect transactions occurring to one or more
of your miscellaneous Credit accounts. Examples of these one-time credit accounts might be
coupons for rent discounts, non-profit discounts, etc. The amounts are shown as debits in
124 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
the appropriate accounts as amounts are collected and entered into the system. These
accounts can be modified, added, etc., in Site Information.
•
#7001 through #7999 Inventory Accounts reflect transactions to your inventory accounts.
The amounts are shown as credits to the appropriate accounts as they are collected and
entered into the system. The inventory accounts can be modified, added, etc., in Site
Information.
The Trial Balance report on the report menu is a “Month to Date” report. It will include
numbers from your last daily close. Therefore, if you run this report and you have not done
your Daily Close yet, todays numbers will not be included. The Trial Balance report printed
with each Daily Close will reflect each day’s transactions.
Rent Roll Report
This report shows a tenants payment activity for the month, and includes the following information:
•
Unit Number and Customer name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Deposit Held...the security deposit on record for this unit.
•
Prior Balance...the tenant’s balance at the beginning of the month.
The next four entries are charges to the tenant’s account:
•
Deposit...deposit amounts charged to the unit, typically on a move-in.
•
Rent...rent amounts charged.
•
Other...all other charges to the unit, e.g. late fees, locks, boxes, etc.
•
Total Charges...the total charges for the month.
The next five entries are payments credited to the tenant’s account:
•
Deposit...security deposit paid, typically on a move-in.
•
Rent...rent payments received.
•
Late...late fees paid.
•
Other...all revenues not included in the above three categories.
•
Total Received...the total payments for the month for this unit.
The final two entries are for credit given during the month, and Current Balance:
•
Credit Given...the total credit used for the month. This amount could include misc. credits
issued during payments, or prior credit used.
•
Current Balance...the tenant’s balance at the time the report is printed.
Totals for all categories are given at the bottom of the report.
The Rent Roll Report is an excellent tool for evaluating the monthly cash flow at your facility.
It summarizes all charges and credits to each customer’s account.
Tenant Reports
Autobill (Credit Card) Report
The Autobill report lists all tenants for which you have selected the “auto-bill” option, and provides
the following information:
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 125
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Paid to Date...the current paid to date.
•
Card Type...the appropriate credit card type is shown, e.g., Visa, MC, etc.
•
Card Number...the tenant’s card number is printed.
•
Card Expires...the expiration date for the card listed is provided.
•
Normal Charges...the charges this tenant will be assessed on their rent due day.
The auto-bill Report provides a summary of all auto-bill participants within the system. The
report is normally used to keep card numbers and expiration dates current. The actual charge
to the tenant’s card is initiated on the appropriate date by the system operator. The system
will print a message on the Daily Charger report to charge the tenant’s credit card on the day
rent is due.
Note: If you have the ICVerify or PCCharge program and the proper arrangements with your
financial institution, the system will process autobill transactions automatically during the System
Charger by passing these transactions to the ICVerify or PCCharge program. It will also process
credit cards automatically in the Paid By Window.
Tenant Balance Report
This report lists all tenant balances. The information provided is:
•
Unit Number and Customer name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Rent Due...the amount of rent that is currently due.
•
Use Tax...the amount of use tax currently due.
•
Insurance Premium...the amount of unpaid insurance premiums.
•
Sales Tax...the amount of sales tax currently due.
•
Lien/Late Charges...the amount of unpaid lien/late charges.
•
Misc. Charges...the amount of unpaid miscellaneous charges.
•
Returned Check...the amount of any returned check for this unit.
•
Charges...the amount of Non Sufficient Funds charges outstanding.
•
Monthly Charges...the amount of “monthly charges” (in addition to rent) currently due.
•
Total Credits...the amount of credit on a tenant’s record.
•
Total...the tenant’s current balance (all due amounts minus any credit the tenant has).
Totals for all categories are given at the bottom of the report.
The Tenant Balance report lists all tenants and is an excellent tool for identifying the payment
status of each tenant.
Tenant Billing Report
This report provides a summary of all units that are currently being sent bills. The following
information is provided:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
126 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
•
Billing Type...the billing frequency for the customer. There are four choices: Monthly,
Quarterly, Semi-Annually, and Annually.
•
Monthly Charges...the “monthly charges” (in addition to rent) that are assessed on this unit
each month.
•
Next Bill Date...the next date on which the tenant is to be printed a bill.
•
Paid to Date...the date on which the tenant’s rent becomes due.
•
Total...the total number of tenants on the report.
The “Tenant Billing Report” will show you all units that are currently being billed on a
recurring basis.
Tenant Cross Reference Report
This report provides a summary listing of all tenants at your facility, normally in ascending unit
number order, and contains the following:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Address Line 1 & 2...the address of the tenant renting the unit.
•
City, State, Zip...the City, State, and Zip Code.
•
Home Phone...the residence telephone number of each tenant.
The Tenant Cross Reference Report provides an easy way to review your current tenants and
validate mailing address, etc.
Tenant Passcode Report
This report lists your tenant’s gate access codes. It lists unit number, customer name, passcode, card
number if applicable, and “other parties with access”.
Tenant Status Report
This report provides a listing of all current tenants of the facility, and includes the following
information:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Size Code...the size code of the unit.
•
Unit Status...a two character designation for the present status of the unit, e.g., “D1” is the
designation for a “delinquent unit (cycle 1)”. This tenant is in the first phase of the
delinquency process. The unit status codes are as follows:
A0 – Access only unit. The unit is not an actual physical unit; it is used only for access to
the facility by entities such as the fire or police departments, garbage collection truck, etc.
C0 – Complimentary unit.
E0 – Vacant unit.
R0 – Rented unit.
P0 – Preleased unit.
U0 – Unrentable unit.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 127
D1 to D5 – Delinquent, but not overlocked unit. The numbers 1 to 5 indicate what phase
of the late cycle process the tenant is in. For example, the number 1 indicates the first
phase of the late cycle process, e.g., the tenant has been charged the first late fee.
O1 to O5 - Delinquent, overlocked unit. The numbers 1 to 5 indicate the late cycle phase
as described above.
L0 – Lien status unit.
L1 – The lien on the unit has been completed, but the tenant was not retained. The system
will vacate the unit as soon as the daily close has been run.
L2 – The lien on the unit has been completed, and the tenant was retained. The system
will put this unit back to status “R0” as soon as the daily close has been run.
•
Taxable...shows the current tax status for this customer.
•
Unit Rate...the current rental rate for the unit.
•
Move In Date...the date the tenant originally rented the unit. If a tenant had “pre-leased” the
unit, the date would indicate the pre-lease deposit date. When such a tenant moves in, the
system will show the date on which he/she officially becomes a tenant (not the date the unit
was pre-leased).
•
Rent Due Date...the date on which the tenant’s rent is (or was) due.
•
# Times Late...prints the number of times the tenant has been late. Each time the system
charges the unit a late fee, the “times late” number is incremented by one.
•
# Returned Checks ...expresses the number of times that tenant has had a check returned.
Note that in order for the system to capture a returned check count, the returned check must
be entered into the system. If your site (or bank) automatically returns a check a second time
and this activity is not entered into the system, this will not be counted in this column.
The Tenant Status Report provides the ability to review the current status of each of your
tenants. It can be a valuable tool in keeping up-to-date with your facility, particularly when
sorted by tenant name.
Management Reports
Advertising Effectiveness Report
The Advertising Effectiveness Report is another tool to track the reasons why a tenant has chosen
your facility. Any number of categories can be included and the information is normally gathered at
the time each tenant rents a unit. This report provides the following information:
•
Advertising Option...the name you have assigned to each specific advertising category to be
tracked.
•
Total Count...the number of current tenants who have stated that they chose your facility for
that reason (each advertising option category).
•
Percent of Units...the percent of your total occupied units except complimentary that have
stated this reason for renting.
Note: This report addresses only current tenants and occupied units excluding complimentary units.
Since a tenant may indicate more than one reason why they chose your facility, and others may not
indicate any reason at all, the site totals provided may not equal 100%.
128 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
If a tenant does not state a reason for renting or if the reason is not entered into the system, that unit
will not be counted on the report.
The Advertising Effectiveness Report can be of significant value in evaluating your marketing
programs.
Aged Receivables
This report provides a listing of all tenants, indicating their current status and balance. The
information provided includes the following:
•
Unit Number and Customer name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Rent Due Date..the date on which the tenant’s rent becomes due again.
•
Unit Rate...the actual monthly rental rate for that unit. This rate may or may not be the
“standard rate”.
•
Last Payment Date...the last day a payment was made on this unit.
•
Prepaid Rents...the amount of rent which is “pre-paid” as of the date the report was printed
(the amount collected toward future rent which has not yet been “used”). The prepaid rent
amounts are calculated in a manner to support accrual accounting procedures.
•
Accrued Days...the number of days of pre-paid rent for that tenant (the number of days of
pre-paid rent which equals the amount of the pre-paid rent).
•
Total Credits...the total amount of all credits currently appearing on the tenant’s account.
•
Arrears...separated into four categories (0 - 30 days, 31 - 60 days, 61 - 90 days and 91+
days), this information indicates the amount of “past due” rent for each tenant and the period
of time that the rent is past due. NOTE that the “0 - 30” column also includes all
miscellaneous charges to the tenants account. The other columns include only rent that is
due.
•
Totals...appropriate totals are printed reflecting pre-paid rents, average accrued days, and the
amount of arrears for each of the four periods.
The Aged Receivables report lists all tenants and is an excellent tool for identifying the payment
status of each tenant.
Alternate Security Deposit Report
The Alternate Security Deposit Report lists all tenants who have paid a deposit in connection with
renting units. This report is normally printed in ascending unit number order and contains the
following information:
•
Unit Number & Customer Name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Deposit Amount...the amount of security deposit being held for that tenant.
•
Totals...the total potential and actual dollar amounts of security deposits for the facility.
This includes current tenants, including those in “lien” status, but does not include amounts
for tenants who have moved out.
The Alternate Security Deposit Report will provide you with information on all current tenants
who have paid security deposits.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 129
Census Tract Report
The Census Tract Analysis Report is very similar to the Zip Code Analysis Report. The sole
difference is that it uses the tenant’s “Census Tract” information to create the report, instead of the
tenant’s zip code. The “Census Tract” information is entered into the “Tracking Number” field of
each tenant’s record; therefore, this report will use that field to compile the information.
Note: If you will be using this report on a regular basis, the “tracking number” field should be used
only for census tract information.
The Zip Code and Census Tract Analysis Reports readily identify concentrations of tenants
who rent at your facility. When used in conjunction with the Demographic and Advertising
Effectiveness Reports, you can truly focus your marketing efforts in the most productive areas.
Complete Lock/Unlock Report
This report is the same as the “Lock/Unlock Recommendations” report except that it includes all
currently overlocked tenants. For a complete description, see the “Lock/Unlock Recommendations”
report.
Current Bad Check Report
This report will print information regarding all outstanding bad checks at the facility. It specifically
includes the following:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Rent Due Date...the date on which rent has or will become due for that unit.
•
Residence Telephone...the home telephone number of the individual renting that unit.
•
Rent Total...the total of the rent due for that unit.
•
Late Fees...any late fees/lien fees due will appear in this column.
•
Returned Check...the amount of any outstanding bad check.
•
NSF Fees...any NSF fees which have been posted to the tenant’s account in connection with
the returned check will be printed.
•
Other Charges...other amounts which are owed on this unit.
•
Credits...the amount of credit for this unit, if any.
•
Total Due...the total due from this tenant.
The Current Bad Check Report is an excellent collection and bad check management tool for
the facility.
Customer Credit Report
This report lists all tenants who presently have a credit on their account. It is normally printed in
ascending unit number order and provides the following information:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name of the unit.
•
Rent Due...the date on which their rent is, or was, due.
•
Credit Amount...the dollar amount of the credit on the individual account (excluding prepaid
rents).
130 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
•
Lien Charges...the dollar amount of lien charges, if any, on this account.
•
Rent Total... the total dollar amount of rent due at the time the report is printed.
•
Late Fees...the total dollar amount of any late fees which may be due.
•
Returned Checks...the total dollar amount of returned checks for this account.
•
NSF Fees...the total dollar amount due for NSF fees associated with returned checks due at
this time.
•
Other Charges...the total of all other charges shown on the account.
•
Total Due...the net dollar total of amounts owed the facility by this individual tenant (all
charges minus the credit amount shown).
The Customer Credit Report allows the facility to review a tenants charges and credits,
providing a net total due. This is an excellent tool to assure that a tenant does not incur
improper charges or be placed into lien status if you have provided credits which have not yet
been applied to the tenant’s account.
Delinquency Status Report
This report provides a listing, on a tenant by tenant basis, of all tenants who are currently delinquent.
It is normally printed in ascending unit number order and provides the following information:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Residence & Business Phone...the home & work phone numbers of the tenant.
•
Move In Date...the date on which this tenant rented this unit.
•
Delinquent Date...the day on which this tenant became delinquent.
•
Rent Due...the total dollar amount of rent that is due on this unit.
•
Lien/Late Fees...the dollar amount of all late fees and lien fees charged to this unit that
remain unpaid.
•
Returned Check/NSF Fees...The total dollar amount of all outstanding checks and associated
NSF fees which have been posted to this unit.
•
Credit Amount...the dollar amount of credit on the tenant’s account.
•
Total + Tax...the total amount due from this tenant, including any taxes, minus any credit.
•
Days Delinquent...the number of days delinquent.
The Delinquency Status Report provides the site with a current and detailed listing of all
delinquent tenants. This report is primarily intended to be a collection tool for the facility.
Demographic Reports - Residential & Commercial...
These reports provide summary demographic information, by size code, of your current residential
and commercial tenants. The following categories are included:
•
Size Code...each size code in your database is listed with appropriate demographic
information shown for each code.
•
Total Units...the number of units that have been rented in this size code.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 131
•
# Rented by Individuals...the number of units for each size code which are rented by
“residential” (non-commercial) tenants.
•
Percent of Total...the total percent of that size code which are currently occupied by
residential tenants.
•
Single Home, Multi-Home, Apartment, Condo...indicates the number of tenants currently
renting by type of dwelling they reside in for that size code.
•
Distance From Facility...various mileage increments indicating how far from your facility
tenants reside. This will show the number of tenants by mileage increment for each size
code.
•
Totals...summary counts for each of the above categories for the facility.
These Demographic Reports will assist you in identifying the source of your residential and/or
commercial tenants. This data is valuable in the formulation of your marketing activities.
Editor Change Reports
These reports will detail the transactions created by using the “Editor” program. There are two
formats. The first format is sorted by unit number, and the second format is sorted by date. The
reports provide the following information:
•
Unit Number...the unit number.
•
Trans. No...the transaction number.
•
Date & Time...the date and time the transaction occurred.
•
Rent, Use Tax, Insurance, etc...these columns detail what happened on the particular
transaction. For example, a -20.00 entry in the “late fees” column would mean the tenant’s
late fees were reduced by $20.00, while a 20.00 entry in the “rent” column would indicate
that $20.00 in rent was added to the unit balance.
•
Balance...the tenant’s balance after the Editor change transaction.
•
Paid-to-Date...the tenant’s paid-to-date after the Editor change transaction.
The Editor Change reports allow you to review all changes that have been made to your
customer records using the Editor program. It is a valuable tool to be sure that this program is
not being misused.
Expected Vacancy Report
The Expected Vacancy Report provides a current view of future vacancies within the facility. These
are listings of tenants who have informed the site they will be vacating their unit(s). The information
contained on the report is as follows:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Size Code...prints the size code associated with the particular unit.
•
Size Description...prints the “size description”, e.g., “5 X 5” of the unit being vacated.
•
Residence Phone...prints the residence telephone number of the current tenant occupying
that unit.
•
Business Phone...prints the business telephone number of that tenant.
•
Paid-to-date...the customer’s current paid-to-date.
132 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
•
Vacancy Date...prints the date on which the tenant will vacate the unit.
This report also provides a total of the number of units with an expected vacancy date entered in the
system.
This report can be an excellent tool for managing your occupancy, particularly when used in
conjunction with the “Waiting List” report.
Lien List
This report prints a list of all tenants who are currently in “Lien Status”. The following information
is provided:
•
Unit Number and Customer name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Auction Date and Time...the date and time the tenant’s goods are scheduled to be auctioned
off.
•
Total Due...the total charges due for this tenant’s unit.
MTD Completed Liens Log
This report prints the details of all the completed liens for the current month with a separate column
that displays any tax that was collected on the auction revenue.
Totals include: Total Auction Revenue, tax collected on Auction Revenue and Net Auction
Revenue.
Lock/Unlock Report Recommendations
This report provides the manager with the information he/she needs to control the process of
overlocking and unlocking units. The “Days To Overlock” number in Site Setup determines how
many days late a tenant should be before they are placed on the Overlock list.
The report will show tenants whose overlocked status has changed and need to be overlocked or
unlocked. It does not include tenants who are currently overlocked. For this information, use the
“Complete Lock/Unlock” report which is the same except that it includes all currently overlocked
tenants.
•
A tenant’s unit has been “locked today” by the Daily Charger (The tenant is the number of
days late specified in Days To Overlock). The system will recommend that this unit be
overlocked.
•
A tenant is late and the number of days late is greater than or equal to the number of days
specified in Days To Overlock but they are not in “overlock” status. The system will
recommend that this unit be overlocked.
•
The number of days late for the unit is less than the number of days specified in Days To
Overlock but the unit is shown as being overlocked. The system will recommend that this
unit be unlocked.
•
A tenant’s unit has been “unlocked today” (The unit was in “overlock” status but the tenant
has paid the rent today). The system will recommend that this unit be unlocked.
Note: Tenants who have been assigned the “reminder” late fee and notice status will appear on the
Lock/Unlock list. Those tenants assigned as “None” will appear with the message “Exempt Tenant”.
Information provided on the report is:
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 133
•
Unit number.
•
Walk order number.
•
Customer name.
•
Paid to date...the date the tenant’s rent was or is due.
•
Recommended action...overlock or unlock.
It is recommended that the manager print the Lock/Unlock list each morning, and while walking the
facility, verify that the appropriate units are unlocked or overlocked.
Month to Date Rental Activity
This report provides a summary, by unit size, of the rental activity for the month up to the time the
report is printed. It is sorted by size code and includes the following information:
•
Size Code...the one or two character designation representing the physical size of a group of
units.
•
Size Description...the physical size for each size code, e.g., “5 X 5”.
•
Total Number...the total number of units, by size code, at the facility.
•
Total Square Feet...the total rentable square feet for each size code.
•
Standard Rent...the standard monthly rate for each size code.
•
Start Number...the number of units for each size code which were rented at the beginning of
the month the report was printed.
•
Start Square Feet...the total square feet, by size code, of the rented units at the beginning of
the month.
•
Move-In Number...the number of move-ins for the size code since the beginning of the
month.
•
Move-In Square Feet...the total rentable square feet of the “move-in number” of units.
•
Move-Out Number...the total units for each size code which have been moved out since the
beginning of the month.
•
Move-Out Square Feet...the total rentable square feet which are associated with the “move
out number” of units.
•
Current Number...the present number of units for each size code which are rented as of the
time the report was printed.
•
Current Square Feet...the rentable square feet associated with the “current number” of rented
units.
•
If Full Amount...the dollar amount of monthly rent that would be attained if all units for that
size code were rented at the standard rate.
•
If Full $ per Square Foot...the potential dollar per square foot monthly revenue if all units of
that size were rented and rented at the standard rate.
•
Now Amount...the monthly rental revenue for each size code. This represents “actual” rental
income. The actual unit rate is used in this calculation, instead of the standard rate as above.
•
Now $ per Square Foot...the present monthly rental revenue on a dollar per square foot basis.
134 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
•
Complimentary...the number of complimentary units currently provided for each size code.
•
Unrentable...the number, by size code, of units that are presently designated as unrentable.
•
Vacant...the number of units for each size code which are currently vacant.
•
Pre-leased...the number of units for each size code that are currently pre-leased.
The Month to Date Rental Activity Report can be an extremely valuable tool in assessing the
performance of your facility in maintaining occupancy levels or during the lease up process.
The same will be true in evaluating your “seasonal” performance on a year to year basis.
Move-In and Move-Out Summary
This report provides you with specific tenant information on who has moved in or out during the
current month. It includes the following:
•
Unit Number and Customer name...the unit number and customer name that was moved in or
out.
•
Address...the customer’s address.
•
Size Code...prints the size code associated with the particular unit.
•
Size Description...the description of the unit, e.g. “5 X 5”.
•
Unit Rate...the monthly rental rate.
•
Move In Date...the date the tenant moved in.
•
Move Out Date...the date the tenant moved out.
If a tenant has moved in, there will be a pound sign before their name (“#”). If the tenant has moved
out, there will be an asterisk before their name (“*”).
For this report to display the Move Outs the Selection for tenants must be selected to All as moved
out tenants are no longer current tenants.
Non-Standard Rates Detail
This report provides a listing of all units on the facility which are currently rented, but rented at a
monthly rate which is different than the standard rate for that unit size. It is printed in two parts and
provides the following information:
Part I, Summary by Size Code...a listing, sorted by size code, of all units rented at non-standard
rates at the facility.
Part II is a detailed listing, sorted in unit number order, and provides the following for each nonstandard unit:
•
Unit Number...the number of the unit that is currently being rented at a “non-standard”
monthly rate.
•
Size Code...the size code assigned reflecting the physical dimensions of that specific unit
size at the facility.
•
Unit Status...the status code for each unit listed, i.e., rented, delinquent, etc. A “status code”
legend is printed to the right.
•
Standard Rate...the standard monthly rate for that unit size at the site.
•
Current Rate...the current monthly rental charge for that specific unit.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 135
•
Dollar Difference...the monthly dollar difference (+ or -) in rent between the “current rate”
and the “standard rate” for that specific unit.
•
Percent Difference...the percentage difference between the standard rate and the current rate.
The calculation is performed by dividing the “Dollar Difference” by the “Standard Rate”.
EXAMPLE:
Dollar Difference = $12.00
Standard Rate = $37.00
12.00/37.00 = .3243
The amount shown will be “-32.43”
•
Totals...totals are provided reflecting the impact of the non-standard rates for the facility.
The Non-Standard Rates Detail report is provided in unit number order as well as in summary form
by size code. All non-standard rates, including complimentary units are included.
Pre-Leased Unit Report
This report lists all individuals who have pre-leased a unit at your facility. The specific information
contained on the report is as follows:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Residence Telephone Number...the home telephone number of the pre-lease tenant.
•
Business Telephone Number...the business telephone of the pre-lease tenant.
•
Pre-Lease Till...the date on which the pre-lease deposit will be forfeited by the system and
the pre-lease commitment will be canceled.
•
Date of Pre-Lease...the date on which the unit was pre-leased.
•
Deposit Amount...the amount of the pre-lease deposit collected.
•
Totals...the total amount of money currently held as pre-lease deposits.
The Pre-Leased Unit Report is a tool for managing your pre-lease activities. It should be
reviewed frequently to ensure control over these potentially revenue producing units.
Reminders Report
The Reminders Report is an excellent tool for managing the facility, providing an automatic “tickler
file” for site management. It provides the following information:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Reminder Date...lists the scheduled date of the reminder.
•
Type of Reminder...lists the kind of reminder entered. e.g., one time only, daily, weekly,
monthly or yearly.
•
Reminder Notes...prints the entry made at the time the reminder was entered into the system.
For example, “ABC Door Company scheduled to repair unit door”.
The report will also indicate if a reminder has expired and not been purged from the list (a # is
shown next to the entry) or if the reminder is scheduled within the next seven days (an * is shown
next to the entry).
136 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
The Reminder Report is an excellent tool for managing day to day activities at the facility.
Tracking maintenance activities and customer promises to pay are examples.
Rent Coming Due Report
This report provides the amount of rent coming due within the next 30 days. The amounts reflected
on the report do not take into consideration “prepaid rents”. It includes the following information:
•
Unit Number & Customer name...the number and customer name.
•
Rent Due Date...the specific date the rent will be due for each tenant shown.
•
Current ...the amount which will be due on the rent due date, or the current past due amount.
The Rent Coming Due report gives you a good idea of the amount of rental revenues you can
expect to receive within the next 30 days.
Security Deposit Report
The Security Deposit Report lists all tenants who have paid a deposit in connection with renting
units. This report is normally printed in ascending unit number order and contains the following
information:
•
Unit Number & Customer Name...the unit number and customer name.
•
Deposit Amount...the amount of security deposit being held for that tenant.
•
Totals...the total potential and actual dollar amounts of security deposits for the facility.
This includes current tenants, including those in “lien” status, but does not include amounts
for tenants who have moved out.
The Security Deposit Report will provide you with information on all current tenants who have
paid security deposits.
Site Exception Report
The “Site Exception Report” lists all units that are an “exception”, e.g. all units that are in a status
other than rented. It is an excellent tool for the owner or manager to make sure that all units on the
site are in the status shown in the computer. For example, if a unit is shown as vacant in WinSen
Property Manager, it will appear on this report, so that the manager or owner can “walk the site”;
checking to be sure that the unit is indeed vacant.
If a unit meets one or more of the following criteria, it will be on the report:
•
The unit is vacant.
•
The unit is unrentable.
•
The unit is complimentary.
•
The unit is delinquent or overlocked, or both.
•
The unit is in lien status.
•
The unit was in lien status, but has been “cleared” from lien status today.
•
The unit has been “unlocked today” (a tenant who was locked out paid their rent). This
would indicate that the overlock needs to be removed.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 137
•
The unit has been “locked today” (a tenant was locked out of the gate by the Daily Charger
due to non-payment of rent). This would indicate that the unit needs to have a second lock
put on the door if site policy so dictates.
•
There is a “reminder” associated with the unit, and the reminder date is today or has passed.
The information provided on this report for each unit listed is as follows:
•
Unit Number...the unit number.
•
Comments...space is provided here for any comments you may wish to make.
•
Walk Number...the “walk number” associated with this unit.
•
Size Code...the size code associated with this unit.
•
Size Description...the description of the unit, e.g. “5 X 5”.
•
Unit Status...the status of this unit as of the time the report is printed. In most cases, this will
be “rented”, “delinquent”, “unrentable”, etc., but if the unit has been “locked today” or
“unlocked today” the system will print that verbiage instead.
•
Paid-to-Date...the date the tenant’s rent is (or was) due. If the unit is unoccupied, this field
will be blank.
•
# Days Late...the number of days late for this tenant. If the unit is unoccupied, this field will
be blank.
•
Overlocked...will print “Yes” if the tenant is overlocked, “No” if not. If the unit is
unoccupied, this field will be blank.
•
Recommended action...the recommended action to take based on the unit’s status. If the unit
is unoccupied, this field will be blank.
•
Total...the total number of units included on the report.
The Site Exception Report is a valuable tool in assisting the owner or manager in making sure
that all rented units are entered into WinSen Property Manager.
Size and Rate Report
The Size and Rate Report lists, in ascending alphabetic order, all unit size codes and rates for your
facility and includes the following information:
•
Size Code...the size code for each unit size at the facility.
•
Size Description...the physical dimensions of each unit size, e.g. 5 X 5.
•
Standard Rate...the standard monthly rental rate for each unit size.
•
Standard Deposit...the standard security deposit for each unit size at the facility.
•
Square Footage...the “square feet” for each unit size, e.g., the 5 X 5 unit would show “25” in
this column.
•
Total Units...the total number of units for each size code on the site.
The Size and Rate Report provides an instant summary or unit mix, monthly rental rates and
security deposit requirements for the facility.
138 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Tenant Longevity Report
This report is another tool to assist you in your marketing efforts. It provides information on how
long your tenants have been staying with you. It provides the following information:
•
Time Period...the time period.
•
Tenants...the number of tenants who have been with you for this time period.
•
Percentage...the percentage of tenants who have been with you for this time period.
•
Total...the total number of tenants on the report. Pre-leased units are not counted.
The Tenant Longevity Report provides, at a glance, a graphical analysis of the length of time
your current tenants have been with you, and seasonal information on which month you have
had the most move-ins. It is another excellent tool for management of your marketing efforts.
Tenant Movein Breakdown Report
This report summarizes the number of moveins occurring during each calendar month. Information
from the last 12 months will be presented. It allows you to quickly determine which months of the
year you have the most (or least) moveins.
The Tenant Movein Breakdown Report is another excellent tool to assist you in your
marketing efforts.
Unit Listing Report
This report provides a listing of all units at your facility. It is normally printed in ascending unit
number order and includes the following data:
•
Unit Number...the unit number.
•
Walk Number...the walk order number assigned for each unit. This would be the most
efficient order to “walk the site”, ensuring that each unit would be visited.
•
Access Interface Number...this is the unit number that will be sent to your gate access
system whenever there is a transaction involving the gate, e.g. move-in, move-out, make
late, pay up, etc.
•
Unit Status...the status of each individual unit, i.e., rented, empty, overlocked, delinquent,
etc.
•
Size Code...the size code assigned that represents the physical dimensions of that unit. For
example, size code “B” represents a “5 X 10” unit.
•
Size Description...the physical size of that particular unit, e.g., “10 X 15 AC” indicating that
this unit’s dimensions are 10 feet by 15 feet and it is an air conditioned space.
•
Current Rate...the monthly rental rate for that specific unit. Note that the actual monthly rate
is shown.
•
Current Deposit...the amount of the deposit being held on that unit. If the unit is vacant, the
standard deposit will be shown.
Note: An asterisk (*) will be printed directly to the right of all Current Rates and Deposits if those
amounts are “non-standard”.
The Unit Listing Report provides an efficient method to review all the units at your facility.
The report will indicate information current to the time the report is printed.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Report Descriptions • 139
Unit Location Report
This report provides a listing of the records on units that have an Enable Location set on the Unit
Type for the unit. Only units that have information in the Unit Locations section will be included on
the report. It is normally printed in ascending unit number order and includes the following data:
•
Unit Number...the unit number.
•
Size Code...the size code assigned that represents the physical dimensions of that unit. For
example, size code “B” represents a “5 X 10” unit.
•
Size Description...the physical size of that particular unit, e.g., “10 X 15 AC” indicating that
this unit’s dimensions are 10 feet by 15 feet and it is an air conditioned space.
•
Delivery Date...the date set for delivery of the mobile storage unit.
•
Pickup Date...the date set for pickup of the mobile storage unit.
•
Address1, Address2, City, State, Zip...the address for the pickup or delivery of the mobile
storage unit.
Vacancy Report
This report consists of a listing of all size codes at the site. The unit numbers of all rentable vacant
units are printed beside each size code. (If no unit numbers appear, there are no rentable units.)
Unrentable units are not included in the report.
Vacancy Statistics Report
The Vacancy Statistics Report summarizes the status of all units on the facility by size code.
•
Size Code...the one or two character alphabetic designation of each unit size at the site.
These are listed in ascending alphabetic order.
•
Size Description...the physical dimensions of each size code, e.g., 5 X 5, 10 X 20 AC, etc.
•
Total Units...the total number of units of this size in the facility database.
•
Rented Units...the total number of units for each size code which are rented.
•
Rented Percentage...the percent of the total units for each size which are rented.
•
Vacant Units...the total number of units for each size which are vacant. The term “vacant”
implies that the unit is empty and is rentable.
•
Vacant Percentage...the percentage of the units of each size which are shown as vacant.
•
Complimentary Units...the total number, for that size code, of complimentary units at the
facility.
•
Complimentary Percentage...the percentage of units which are complimentary for each size
code.
•
Unrentable Units...the number of units of each size which have been designated as
unrentable.
•
Unrentable Percentage...the percentage of units for each size which have been shown in the
Unrentable Count column.
•
Totals...Appropriate totals are provided for each column which reflects the performance at
the site level.
140 • Report Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
The Vacancy Report provides a complete listing of all vacancies (excluding unrentable units) at
the facility. This report can be used to reconcile rented units with vacant units to assure that
no units are being rented without being entered into the system.
Waiting List Report
The Waiting List Report shows all names entered into the waiting list. The report provides the name
and address of all potential tenants who have been entered on the waiting list. It also shows the
desired sizes and/or units for those potential tenants.
Zip Code Analysis Report
The Zip Code Analysis Report is one of the many excellent tools available within WinSen Property
Manager to assist you in marketing your facility. The information contained in this report is as
follows:
•
Zip Code...provides a listing of all zip codes reflected in your system database.
•
Count...prints the number of tenants renting space from each zip code.
•
Percentage...calculates and prints the percentage of tenants from each zip code.
The report also totals the number of zip codes and the number of tenants within the system.
Graph Descriptions
Distance from the Facility Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Distance” Category Group for your
tenants. For example, let’s suppose you have designated five choices for the “Distance” Category
Group. The Distance from the Facility Graph would then show the percentages of your tenants for
each of these choices.
Non-Standard Rate Graph
This bar graph provides an overview of units with non-standard rates. The vertical axis displays
your size codes, while the horizontal axis represents the number of units in that size. Units at the
standard rate will be displayed in red, units below the standard rate will be displayed in blue, and
vacant units are displayed in yellow.
Number of Employees Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Employees” Category Group for your
tenants. The graph shows the percentages of your tenants in each choice for this group, e.g., “1-5
Employees”, “6-10 Employees”, etc.
Purpose for Storage Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Purpose” Category Group for your
tenants. The graph shows the percentages of your tenants in each choice for this group, e.g.,
“Moving”, “Storage”, etc.
Sentinel Activity by Hour Graph
This bar graph plots gate activity by the hour. This will show you at a glance which hours of the day
are the busiest for gate activity. The vertical axis denotes the number of activities, while the
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Graph Descriptions • 141
horizontal axis shows the hours. Currently, only hours of the day where there is gate activity will be
on the graph. Therefore, an hour of the day that has no activity will not be on the graph.
Size and Rate Graph
This pie graph gives an overview of the number of units of each size you have at your facility. In
addition, the bottom of the graph will include a table of your size codes, which shows the size
description, standard rate and deposit, square feet, total units of that size, and the percentage of your
total square footage of units in that size.
Square Footage by Size Graph
This graph plots your size codes on the vertical axis against the total number of square feet in units
of that particular size along the horizontal axis. In addition, it shows how much of that square
footage is rented or vacant (blue denotes rented square footage, red vacant). This helps you
determine which unit sizes are most in demand.
Tenant Longevity Graph
This bar graph shows the amount of time your tenants have been with you plotted against number of
units. The graph will allow you to quickly determine how long tenants stay with you. The vertical
axis is the amount of time, and the horizontal axis is the number of units.
Tenant Movein Breakdown Graph
This bar graph plots number of moveins by calendar month. Information from the last 12 months
will be presented. It allows you to quickly determine which months of the year you have the most
(or least) moveins. The vertical axis denotes calendar months, while the horizontal axis shows the
number of move-ins.
Tenant Gender Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Gender” Category Group for your
tenants. The Tenant Gender graph will show the percentages of your tenants designated as Male or
Female.
Top 20 Zip Codes Graph
This bar graph is based on the zip code entries for your tenants, and will show the top 20 zip codes of
people renting from you. The vertical axis shows the zip codes while the horizontal axis plots the
number of tenants in each zip code. The zip code with the most tenants will be at the top of the
graph.
Type of Business Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Business Type” Category Group for your
tenants. The graph shows the percentages of your tenants in each choice for this group, e.g.,
“Retail”, “Distribution”, etc.
Type of Office Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Office Type” Category Group for your
tenants. The graph shows the percentages of your tenants in each choice for this group, e.g.,
“Retail”, “Distribution”, “Professional”, etc.
142 • Graph Descriptions
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Type of Residence Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Residence” Category Group for your
tenants. The graph shows the percentages of your tenants in each choice for this group, e.g., “Apt. or
Condo”, “Single Family Home”, etc.
Type of Tenant Graph
This pie graph is based on the demographic entries for the “Customer Type” Category Group for
your tenants. For example, let’s suppose you have designated two choices for the “Customer Type”
Category Group - “Individual” and “Commercial”. The Type of Tenant graph would then show how
many of your tenants are designated as “Commercial” and how many are “Individual”.
Unit Status Breakdown Graph
This pie graph gives an overview of your units by unit status, showing at a glance how many units
are delinquent, how many are rented, how many are complimentary, etc. The bottom of the graph
has a table showing the exact breakdown of the numbers from which the graph is derived. It gives
you an overview of the performance of your facility as it relates to delinquencies.
Unit Status by Size Code Graph
This bar graph plots your unit sizes on the vertical axis against the status of the units on the
horizontal axis. It gives you an overview of the units status by size code. For example, it shows
which unit sizes tend to be delinquent more than others, which unit sizes are more popular, etc.
Chapter 5 - Report & Graph Menu
Graph Descriptions • 143
Maintenance
Site Information
The Site Information option contains important information about your facility such as facility
name and address, late cycle schedule, auction information, Charge, Credit, and Monthly Charge
Accounts, and many other vital operational parameters.
Access Site Information by selecting it from the Maintenance Menu. The following sub-menu will
appear:
The following sections will describe the Site Information options in detail.
Site Setup
The Site Setup option allows you to view and edit many important operational parameters in WinSen
Property Manager. Access this option from Site Information under the Maintenance Menu. The
following form will appear:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Information • 145
Note the three buttons found on this form:
1. Save - saves your changes and exits.
2. Cancel - cancels your changes.
3. Help - displays the “on-line” help system.
WinSen Electronic Manager Site Setup
If you have WinSen Electronic Manager, there will be 2 additional buttons, used to add and delete
site records, and a data control bar used to change sites. An example form is below:
146 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
The Add button is used to add a new site record. Up to 99 sites can be added. The Delete Site
button deletes the currently selected site. Note that this does not delete the units or the financial
information for the site, only the site record. Use the data control bar to move from site record to
site record.
The first site record is for the main office and is not used for any units. Then there should be one or
more additional records for the sites. Thus, there will always be at least two site records: the main
office and one or more sites. The configuration for site #1 will be record #2. If you have 2 sites
there will be three records: one for the main office and one for each site.
Site Setup Tabs
The Site Setup form has a series of tabs which you click with your mouse to select a category. Click
the tabs to display and edit the following information.
Site Name Tab
Click this tab from the Site Information form to display and edit basic information about your
facility. The following form will be displayed:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 147
Site Name & Address
The Site Information Block fields specify the Name, Address, City, State, Zip code, and phone
number of your facility. This information is used in report headings and on your late letters. Fill in
the data as appropriate.
Manager
This optional entry indicates the manager’s name. If it is filled in, the system has the ability to print
it on late letters and reports.
Rate Charge
This is where you define the default Rate Charge Method for your facility. All new move-ins will
be assigned the default Rate Charge Method, but you can change it on an individual basis if need
be. During move-in, individual tenants can be assigned any Rate Charge Method and/or rent due
day regardless of the default Rate Charge Method. The system will automatically pro-rate the
appropriate rent due during a move-in.
The Rate Charge Method options are as follows:
1. Anniversary Date - The tenant’s rent will be due on the same day of the month in which
they moved in. Rent is not prorated on a move-in unless the rent due day is changed
manually.
2. First of the Month - The tenant’s rent is due on the first of each month. Rent will be
prorated from the move-in day to the first of the following month.
3. 28 Day Cycle - The tenant’s rent is due every 28 days.
148 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
4. Second Month Prorate - No matter what day of the month a tenant moves in, they are
required to pay a full month’s rent on move-in, with the prorated portion of rent due on the
first of the following month. The rent is always due on the first of the month.
5. By the Week - The rent is charged and paid on a weekly basis. The unit rate is considered
to be a “per week” rate.
6. By the Day - The rent is charged and paid on a daily basis. The unit rate is considered to be
a “per day” rate.
Anniversary and First of the Month Rate Charge Methods operate on a “monthly” basis, i.e., the
tenant’s rent is due on the same day of each month. We recommend the “Anniversary Date” method
as this evens out the manager’s workload and has a positive impact on site occupancy.
Regarding the 28 Day Cycle Rate Charge Method
The 28 Day Cycle option operates on a 4 week basis, i.e., the tenant’s rent is due every four weeks.
This provides an extra four weeks of billing each year.
To effectively use this option, both the tenant and the site need to understand that rents are due on a
specific day of the week rather than a given calendar day. For example, if a tenant rents a unit on a
Thursday, their rent will become due every fourth Thursday from then on.
Note: You can change your Rate Charge Method from First of the Month to Anniversary (or visa
versa) at any time. Should you choose to operate on the 28 Day Cycle, assume you will be operating
in this manner on a permanent basis. Changes to or from the 28 Day Cycle should not be done
without first contacting Software Support for an explanation of the ramifications.
Select the desired default Rate Charge Method from the drop down list.
Interface
WinSen Property Manager has the ability to interface with certain access control and individual door
alarm systems. The software will automatically transmit key information (move-in, move-out,
transfers, change passcode, make late/pay up) to the security system, negating the need for “double
entry” by the manager.
The gate control systems currently supported by WinSen Property Manager are:
Property Sentinel
Remote Sentinel
Remote Keypads/Cardreaders
Remote PS3
WinSen Sentinel
WinSen Sentinel (Passcode Only Keypads)
WinSen Remote Site Control Module
Universal Interface
WHAM System (Apple)
WHAM System (PC)
“Old” PTI Falcon
PTI Falcon
Remote PTI Falcon
TouchCode 2000
Digigate 102
Digigate 700
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 149
Remote Digigate 700
Demco System
If you have a compatible gate system, select the appropriate choice from the drop down list.
Sales & Use Tax Rates
These two fields are used to specify the percentage amount of sales tax and use tax to be calculated
and posted by the system. For example, the entry <8.50> in the sales tax field indicates a rate of
8.50% to be charged on items designated as “Sales taxable”.
Note: The system can be set up to charge either kind of tax (or both taxes) on any of the revenue
accounts, e.g., rent, late fees, admin fee, NSF fees, misc. charges, etc. To setup the type of tax to be
charged on the various accounts, see “Accounts Setup” on page 175.
No tax will be applied to a unit if it is not marked as taxable. The taxable status is established during
the move-in process and should normally be checked, indicating that the unit is taxable. You can
also change the taxable status in View/Edit Tenant.
Business Tax No.
This field is used for any tax identification number your locality may have issued for your business.
It can be printed on receipts or reports as required. Up to 20 characters in any format may be
entered.
System Dates Tab
Click this tab on the Site Information form to display the System Dates form:
150 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
This form will display the following important system dates:
•
Last Charge Date - the last time the system ran the Daily Charger.
•
Next Daily Close - the date of the next scheduled Daily Close.
•
Next Weekly Close - the date of the next scheduled Weekly Close. This optional entry will
cause the system to enforce Weekly Closes. If your facility performs closes on a weekly
basis, and this entry is currently not filled in, enter the next Weekly Close date. Then the
system will not allow the Weekly Close to be done until the specified date, and it will
advance the date by one week when the Weekly Close is done.
If this entry is not filled in, Weekly Closes can be done at any time, or they can be skipped
altogether.
•
Next Monthly Close - the date of the next scheduled Monthly Close.
•
Next Quarterly Close - the date of the next scheduled Quarterly Close. This optional entry
will cause the system to enforce Quarterly Closes. If your facility performs closes on a
quarterly basis, and this entry is currently not filled in, enter the next Quarterly Close date.
Then the system will not allow the Quarterly Close to be done until the specified date, and it
will advance the date by three months when the Quarterly Close is done.
If this entry is not filled in, Quarterly Closes can be done at any time, or they can be skipped
altogether.
•
Next Yearly Close - the date of the next scheduled Yearly Close.
These dates can be edited; however an extremely unusual circumstance must exist before changing
them (except as noted for the Weekly and Quarterly Close dates). An arbitrary change can result in
serious operational and billing problems with the system.
To change the date click on the drop down list next to the date which will bring up a calendar where
the date can be selected.
Before changing any of these dates, you should contact SSC software support personnel.
Also shown on this form are the dates the system database was last verified and last rebuilt. These
dates are for reference only and cannot be edited. For further information on these two operations,
refer to “Database Operations” on page 196.
Late Cycles/Fees
This form defines how your late charges and letters will be handled. Click this tab on the Site
Information form to display the Late Cycles/Fees form:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 151
Late Cycle Schedule
The Late Cycle Schedule provides up to five opportunities for generating late charges and printing
late notices. Each can generate a charge and a notice, a charge only or a notice only. The charges
and notices do not have to occur on the same day within each category. The five entries for each
cycle are:
Type of fee specifies the kind of late charge to be assessed. The system provides four choices:
1. None - No late fee will be assessed.
2. Fixed Charge - A specific dollar amount is to be charged.
3. Percent of Rent - A specified percentage of the monthly rent is to be charged.
4. Fixed Charge per day - The specified late fee is charged each day.
5. Percent of past due rent - a specified percentage of the past due rent is to be charged. For
example, if this option is chosen, a tenant has a past due rent amount of $120.00, and $10.00
is entered in the amount field, the system would charge a $12.00 late fee.
6. Percent of adjusted rent due – allows a percentage of the past due rent to be charged. This
setting calculates the late fee as follows: (current rent + 30-60 days rent past due + 60-90
days rent past due – prior credits) * percentage entered.
Schedule specifies whether the late fee is a “rotating” or “one-time only” charge. A “rotating” late
fee will be repeated each month the tenant is late, while a “one time only” fee will only be charged
152 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
only once. If the late fee is a “rotating” charge, the “Days” number for this cycle must be less than
or equal to 30, since the charge is “monthly oriented” (it starts over each month).
Note: In order for a “daily fee” late fee to continue until the tenant pays their rent, you should set the
“Schedule” for that late fee to “One Time Only.” If it is set to “Rotating”, the number of days late
for the late fee calculation is started over each month. This will cause the daily late fee to not be
charged during the first part of each month.
Note: Maryland state law allows a facility to charge a percentage of past due rent. If your state has
adopted similar legislation, then select Type of Fee Six (6).
Amount designates the amount of the late charge. If this late fee is a fixed fee, this represents a
dollar amount, e.g., <5.00> indicating $5.00. If this late fee is a percentage of rent, then the number
represents a percentage of the unit rate, e.g., <5.00> indicating 5.00%. If this late fee is a fixed
charge per day, then the number represents the daily late fee.
Days indicates how many days will pass after the rent is due before a late charge will be assessed.
For example, if <5> is entered, then five full days will pass before a late charge is posted to the
tenant’s account. Thus, if a tenant is due on the first, they would be assessed a late fee on the sixth by
the Daily Charger.
Note: This number means “days late”, not the day of the month. A “5” in this field indicates 5 days
late, not the 5th of the month.
Notice defines on what day a late notice will be printed. If a <5> is entered, then the Daily Charger
will queue up the appropriate late letter to be printed as it processes your accounts on the morning of
the sixth day late.
Note: Late charges and notices operate independently from one another. A late charge can be
specified to be posted on a certain day and the notice can be printed on a different day.
Late Cycle Description
Multiple late cycles may be defined; each cycle should have a unique description. These
descriptions are shown on the Assign Tenant window during the move-in process and on the
View/Edit Tenant form. You may manipulate multiple late fee cycles by using the Add Late Cycle
button, the Delete Late Cycle button and the data control bar to move between records. You must
have at least one late fee cycle. Having multiple late fee cycles allows the facility to maximize late
fee collections. For example, different late fee cycles could be defined for small units vs. large units.
Days To Overlock
The number in this field instructs the system when to overlock a tenant and place them on the
Lock/Unlock recommendations report. If you have a compatible gate access system, WinSen
Property Manager will send a signal to deactivate the tenant’s gate code after the number of days
specified.
When the tenant becomes current (the “Paid to Date” is advanced beyond the current date), the
system will transmit a “paid up” message to the security system.
Days until automatic lien
The system has the capability of placing delinquent tenants into “lien” status automatically. This
field is used to specify how many days late a tenant should be before this occurs. If you do not want
to use this feature, set it to zero.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 153
If this number is non-zero, a tenant will be assessed your pre-defined lien charges, and placed in
“lien” status by the Daily Charger on the day specified.
Note: Tenants who are specified as “exempt” (their late type is set to “None” in the “View/Edit
function) from late fees and notices will not be placed in “lien” status automatically. Neither will
they be placed in lien status automatically if their balance is less than the “Minimum Balance for
Late Fees” amount (explained below).
Days Until Welcome & Thank You Letters
These fields specify when the system should print the corresponding letter to a tenant. The
“Welcome” letter will print to a tenant the specified number of days after they move in, and the
“Thanks” letter will print the specified number of days after they move out. Set these to zero if you
do not want these letters printed.
NSF Charge
This field is used to specify the amount of “non-sufficient funds” charge to be assessed to a tenant’s
account if a check is returned to you by their bank. This amount will automatically be assessed when
a returned check is posted, but can be changed by the system operator if need be.
Administration & Transfer Fee
These two fields are used to specify the amount of non-refundable administration fee to be assessed
on a move-in, and the transfer fee to be assessed on a transfer. When configured, these fees will
automatically be assessed during a move-in or transfer as appropriate.
RV Storage per-foot rate
This is the “per-foot” rate to be charged for R. V. storage. If this field is non-zero, the number
entered into the RV Length field during the move-in process is multiplied by the number in this field
to arrive at the unit rate. Set it to zero if you do not use this rate charge method.
Minimum balance for Late Fees
This option allows the site to not charge a tenant late fees, nor automatically place them into Lien
Status when their balance is below this preset amount. When this number is non-zero, a delinquent
tenant will not be charged late fees or placed into Lien Status if their balance is less than this. If it is
zero, the system will charge late fees and/or place them into Lien Status based on the tenant's paid to
date and your Late Cycle Schedule.
Minimum balance for overlock
When this is set to a non-zero value, a tenant will not be locked out of the access control system if
their balance is less than or equal to the configured amount.
Printer Setup Tab
This option is used to setup the various print operations within WinSen Property Manager, for
example which printer you want to use for printing of reports, receipts, etc.
To setup your print options select the Printer Setup tab from the Site Setup form. The following
form will be displayed:
154 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Printers
The Printer Setup form includes four drop down lists for you to select the associated printer. You
can choose from all printers within your Windows installation. Choose the appropriate printer as
follows:
Receipt printer: select the printer where you want to print receipts.
Report printer: select the printer where you want to print reports.
Contract printer: select the printer where you want to print contracts during a move-in or
transfer.
Letter printer: select the printer where you want to print late letters and mailings.
Formfeed after receipt
Check this box to cause the system to send a formfeed to the printer after printing a receipt, causing
it to advance to the top of the next page. This option would be used if you are printing receipts on a
parallel report printer. If you are printing receipts on a serial receipt printer, do not enable this
option.
Use report for receipts and Receipt report name
WinSen Property Manager has the capability of using a user-defined format for printing receipts. If
you have setup a user-defined receipt format, check this box and enter the Receipt report name - the
name of the file containing your custom format. To setup a custom receipt format, see the
documentation for “Crystal Reports”.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 155
Receipt Copies
This is the predefined number of receipts that will be printed after a transaction is competed. If this
value is set to 0, no receipts will print after completing a transaction.
General Tab
This form is used to setup numerous general options and settings within the system. Select this tab
from the Site Setup form to display the following form:
Ret. Check Rollback
This field controls how the Paid to Date will be adjusted when a returned check is posted to a
tenant’s account. There are three choices: Automatic, Manual, or None.
Automatic roll of paid-to-date:
The system will divide the returned check amount by the unit rate to arrive at the number of
months to roll back the paid-to-date, and then will automatically roll it back. The operator
cannot access the “Months to roll” field in the “Returned Check” window. When the
returned check is paid, the paid-to-date will be rolled forward in the same manner.
Manual roll of paid-to-date:
The operator can access the “Months to roll” field, and can change it from the default value
if necessary. The default value will be calculated by dividing the returned check amount by
the unit rate, the same as above. When the returned check is paid, the system operator will be
prompted for the number of months to roll the paid-to-date forward.
156 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
No roll of paid-to-date:
The paid-to-date will not change when a returned check is posted or paid, and the operator
cannot access the “Months to roll” field in the “Returned Check” window.
Use Tax Rate From
This field controls where the system will get the tax rate to be charged on rent. There are two
choices: Site Configuration, or Size Codes.
If set to Site Configuration, the system will get the use tax rate that is configured on the Site Name
tab of the Site Setup form and will use that rate to calculate tax charged on rent for all unit sizes.
If set to Size Codes, the system will use the tax rate that is individually defined for each size code in
the Size Codes option under the Maintenance menu. This allows you to have different tax rates for
different types of storage. For example, if your state charges a different tax rate on outside storage
than on inside storage, you would have a size code defined for each type of storage, with the
corresponding tax rate. See “Size Codes” on page 183 for information on configuring the tax rate for
each size code.
Print Ledgers
This option allows you to specify if and when moveout and lien ledgers are to be printed. The
choices are:
1. At the Closing
2. At Time of Moveout
3. Never
Prorate Rent
This field defines how you would like the system to round off prorated rent amounts. You can have
the system round off to the nearest penny, nickel, dime, quarter, or dollar.
Notes, Reminder, and Picture Options
These fields control what happens when a unit with notes, reminders, or pictures is moved out.
There are three options: Keep with tenant, Keep with unit, or Prompt. If setup to “Keep with
tenant”, the notes/reminders/pictures will be associated with the moved-out tenant record. If set to
“Keep with unit”, they will stay with the now-vacant unit, and the next tenant to be moved in. If set
to “Prompt”, the system will ask which option you wish to use during the moveout process. If the
Delete option is selected with reminders then any reminders for a unit are deleted upon moveout.
Rounding Options
The Rounding Options dialog allows you to select what cash, check, or card amounts should be
rounded during payments. It is normally used in cases where pennies are not available. For example,
if someone in Australia pays by cash, the amount might need to be rounded to the nearest nickel
because there are no pennies there.
Place a check in the box next to the payment method(s) that you would like rounded to the nickel and
select Save. If this option is used, it will normally be for Cash.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 157
Unit number format, Database version, and Unit limit
These three fields for reference only, and cannot be edited.
Unit Format specifies the unit format the system is using. “####” means you have 4 digit unit
numbers, “#####” means you are using 5 digit numbers, and “##-####” denotes 7 digit unit number
format (only used by the Electronic Manager version).
The Database version field shows the version number of your WinSen Property Manager database.
Unit Limit shows how many units your system is limited to.
Tracking number on Receipt
If this option is checked, the “Tracking Number” for the tenant will print on receipts.
Alternate Receipt Format
This option controls the format of system receipts. If checked, the receipts will print in a special
format designed to fit into a “Duo-Vue” #771 window envelope for mailing to your tenants.
Alternate Bank Deposit Log
If this option is checked, the system will print additional information on the Bank Deposit Log.
Specifically, it will print the amounts collected on each payment for rent, late fee, deposit, and other.
Detail Miscellaneous Accounts
If this option is checked, the name and amount of each miscellaneous account involved in a
transaction will be printed on the Transaction Log. Otherwise, only the total of the miscellaneous
accounts will be printed.
Print 2nd Contact Letters
This option is the default choice for the printing of 2nd contact letters in Late Letters & Mailings. If
this box is checked, the printing of 2nd contact letters in Late Letters & Mailings will be selected by
default.
If you do not print duplicate notices to the 2nd contact parties for your tenants, do not check this
option.
Generate Random Passcodes
If this option is checked, the system will generate a random passcode when you are assigning a
tenant. You can then accept the proposed passcode, or change it if need be.
158 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
See “Appendix O – WinSen Passcodes / Maximum Digits” on page 238 for the range of digits that
can be used for assigning passcodes.
Advance Bill-Date On Payment
If this option is checked, payments will advance the Next Bill Date of the tenant by the same number
of months as the Paid to Date (If the tenant is set to receive bills). Thus, if a tenant pays you six
months worth of rent, the Next Bill Date will also be advanced by six months.
If this option is not checked, no advance of the Next Bill Date will occur during payments.
Require Proof Edit Reconciliation
If this option is checked, the system will require that a successful Proof Edit be done before the daily
close can be performed. This option is recommended, because it is much easier to catch and correct
mistakes that may have been made during the day before the close is done. Once the close is done,
mistakes are much more difficult to correct. See “Proof Edit Reconciliation” on page 76 for more
information.
Require Backup before the Close
If this option is checked, the system will require that a backup be done before the close.
Allow View/Edit Rate Change
This option controls whether or not a unit rate can be changed in the “View/Edit” function. If it is
not checked, the unit rate cannot be changed in the “View/Edit” form.
Note: If a unit rate is changed in the “View/Edit” function, a type “60A” transaction will be
generated and placed in the tenant’s record.
Allow View/Edit Change To Type Of Late Charge
This option controls whether or not a unit’s Late Charge Type can be changed in the “View/Edit”
function. If this option is not checked, the only place this field can be changed would be on the
move-in screen.
Allow Rate Change on Move-in
This option controls whether or not a unit rate can be changed during the move-in process. If it not
checked, the unit rate cannot be changed during a move-in.
Auto Lockout of Tenant when Returned Check is posted
If this option is checked, a tenant will always be locked out when a returned check is posted,
regardless of their Paid to Date. Otherwise, the system will use the Days to Overlock number and
the tenant’s “number of days late” (calculated from their new Paid to Date) to determine whether the
tenant should be locked out or not.
New Tenants are Non-taxable
This field establishes the default taxable status for new tenants. When checked, the system assumes
that each new tenant is non-taxable. We recommend that you do not check this option.
Note: If your facility doesn’t have to charge tax, your tax rates should be set to 0.00% in Site Setup.
Do not check the New Tenants are Non-taxable box. Thus, if your situation changes and you have to
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 159
start charging tax, you won’t have to update each customer record to change their tax status; instead
you would only have to make a change to your tax rates.
Refund Rent on Moveout
If this option is not checked the system will not automatically refund prepaid rent, if any, during a
moveout. If it is checked any prepaid rent on a tenant’s account will be refunded during a moveout.
In either case, the system operator can change the amount of rent to be refunded during a moveout if
necessary.
Print Charger Reports
This option controls whether or not to print out the Daily Charger report when the Daily Charger is
run each morning. Check this box to always print a copy of the report. The report will still print if
any of the following occur during the Daily Charger: a reminder is due, an autobill transaction is
due, a Pre-Lease forfeit is pending, or an Auto-Lien transaction is made.
Automatically Print Notices with Charger
This option will cause the system to print late letters, billings, and other mailings automatically when
the Daily Charger is run each morning. When this option is checked you will not have to go into the
Late Letters & Mailings function to print notices unless you need to print a “Special Mailing” or if
you have processed liens today and you need to print the “In Process” or “Final” lien letters to those
tenants.
Automatic System Catchup
This option allows the site to “catch up” the system when the rental office has been closed for 1 or
more days. If this option is checked, when the system detects one or more missed daily chargers and
closes, it prompts the manager if they would like to “catch up the system” for the missed days. If the
manager chooses to do so, the system will run the chargers and automatically print the late letters &
notices for the appropriate days, then advance the next daily close date to today’s date. Thus, there
will be no closing reports for the “caught up” days. Today’s closing reports will show all transactions
posted since the last daily close.
This option allows the manager to update the system database without having to change the site
computer date (which can cause incorrect logging of gate & alarm activity).
If the missed close(s) are monthly or yearly the “Catch Up” option does not apply. In this case you
must set the computer date to the day when the monthly or yearly close was supposed to be done, run
the appropriate close and backups, the set the date back to today’s date and continue the day’s work.
Include Current Month in Prepaid Rent Calculations
This option lets the site designate whether or not they wish to have the current month included when
calculating prepaid rent. If checked, prepaid rent for the current month will be included on reports
that show this number, otherwise only whole months of prepaid rent are included.
Display Find Dialog Automatically
When checked, the system will automatically display the “Find Unit” form when you enter either of
the “View/Edit” forms.
160 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Allow Cancellation of Closed Transaction
This option controls whether a transaction that has already been closed may be canceled or not. If it
is checked, the system will allow a closed transaction to be canceled but will warn you that it is
already closed and canceling or changing it will not affect the close that was already done.
Otherwise, it will not allow the closed transaction to be canceled.
Enable Credit Card POS Processing
Enabling Credit Card POS processing will allow automatic processing of credit card transactions
either with ICVerify or PCCharge software. To use this feature, you must have the proper
arrangements with an authorized financial institution, and the properly configured ICVerify or
PCCharge program.
When enabled, this option will cause the system to interface with one of the two credit card
processing software interfaces available. The options and configurations are set by clicking on the
Configure POS Processing button. The screen below shows the settings for a typical set up using IC
Verify:
POS Software
This window is where the selection is made to use IC Verify or PCCharge.
Request Folder
This window shows the directory to where WinSen will send the request file. This setting defaults to
the same directory where WinSen is installed. It can be changed by clicking in the box and entering
the directory path or you may choose to use the browse button.
Station Number(ICVerify) / UserID(PCCharge)
This field is used when operating WinSen and ICVerify or PCCharge on a network, as each
workstation generates a request, it can be identified by the station number (ICVerify) or User ID
(PCCharge).
Enable AVS
AVS is the Address Verification System that credit card processing company’s use. If this box is
checked then WinSen will include the street address and zip code of the customer in the request file.
Under normal circumstances this should be checked.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 161
Enable CVV2
When this box is checked this will allow you to enter the security number (found on the back of the
credit cad) on the Paid by Screen. This number is usually entered when taking a credit card payment
by phone when the physical credit card is not presentable. Check with your credit card processing
company as to whether they support this option.
Merchant ID
This field contains the Merchant ID number for which account credit card payments would be
directed to in ICVerify. If there is only one account set up then this field can be left blank and by
default all credit card transactions will go to the first account.
The screen below shows the settings for a typical set up using PCCharge:
Processor
The Processor field is only available when PCCharge is selected. This field is where you enter the
name of the credit card processing company that you are using. You can select the processing
company with the drop down list or just type in the name of the processor.
Merchant Account
The merchant account field is only available when PCCharge is selected. This is where you will
enter your merchant account number that you will obtain from your credit card processing company.
Note: If you have the ICVerify or PCCharge program and the proper arrangements with your
financial institution, the system will process autobill transactions automatically during the System
Charger by passing these transactions to the ICVerify or PCCharge program. It will also process
credit cards automatically in the Paid By Window.
For more information regarding using WinSen with ICVerify or PCCharge see “Appendix J – Using
WinSen with ICVerify” on page 233 or “Appendix K – Using WinSen with PCCharge” on page 235.
Print Autobill Receipts after Charger
If this option is checked, one or more receipts will print for each unit that had an autobill transactions
processed by the daily charger. These receipts will be printed at the end of the daily charger(s) being
processed for that day.
162 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Auction Information Tab
This form is used to configure your pre-defined auction location information to be used when a
tenant has become seriously delinquent, and their unit is placed into “lien status”. This “Lien
Configuration” is used by the Daily Charger when placing units into “Lien Status”, and is also used
when you are manually placing a tenant into “Lien Status” and you press the default button to load
your “Lien Configuration”.
Select the Auction Info. tab from the Site Setup form to display the following form:
Auction Location, Date & Time
Record the name and address of the location where your auctions are held, and the date and time of
the next auction.
Lien Charges Tab
This form is used to specify the lien charges to be assessed to a unit when it is placed in Lien Status,
either by the Daily Charger or manually by the system operator. To access it, select the Lien
Charges tab from the Site Setup form to display the following form:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 163
There are ten categories for lien charge descriptions and amounts. These charges will be assessed to
each unit that goes into “Lien Status”. Fill in the information as necessary.
Insurance Tab
WinSen Property Manager provides the site the ability to act as an administrator for Bob Bader
Insurance (and others) in providing your tenants the opportunity to insure the contents of their unit.
This form is used to review the insurance configuration setup in your WinSen Property Manager
system, if you have your insurance setup properly through Bob Bader. The information is for
viewing only and cannot be edited. If you are using Bob Bader insurance, changes to your insurance
configuration can only be accomplished with the approval of Bob Bader working in conjunction with
SSC.
To review your insurance information, select the Insurance tab from the Site Setup form to display
the following form:
164 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Insurance Information
Information displayed is the Project Number issued by Bob Bader, the Site ID (this field is not
currently used), and the name and address of Bob Bader. The checkmark in the Prorate box
indicates the system will prorate insurance during the issuance of a policy. For example, if a tenant
with two weeks of prepaid rent is issued an insurance policy, the system will prorate the premium for
two weeks. The Company Name is the name of the company that underwrites the insurance.
The Days to Warning field is how many days late a tenant should be before a warning of insurance
cancellation notice is printed. The Days to Cancel field is how many days late a tenant should be
before the policy is canceled. Copies of Notices denotes how many copies of the warning of
insurance cancellation notice should be printed. The default is 3: 1 for the site, 1 for the tenant, and
1 for the insurance company.
Premium Amounts Tab
This form is used to review the insurance premium amounts in your WinSen Property Manager
system, if you have your insurance program setup through Bob Bader. The information is for
viewing only and cannot be edited. If you are using Bob Bader, changes to your insurance
configuration can only be accomplished with the approval of Bob Bader working in conjunction with
SSC.
To review your insurance premium amount information, select the Premium Amounts tab from the
Site Setup form to display the following form:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 165
Single Rate Setup
If checked, this box indicates the premium is to be charged on a “per thousand” dollars of coverage
basis, e.g. the premium is a rate per thousand dollars of coverage.
Coverage, Premium, and Percentage Theft
The Coverage Amount and Premium Amount fields define the amount of Contents Insurance and the
associated premium your tenant will pay for the coverage. The Percentage Theft column designates
whether coverage is for 50% or 100% of a loss due to burglary.
166 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Other Tab
This tab contains a Configure Sounds button which allows you to define your Windows sounds.
For further information on configuring your Windows sounds, please consult your Windows
documentation.
This tab also contains the Default information for new moveins: the city, state, zip, area code, time
zone, access level, and billing status. The data specified here is automatically assigned to all new
tenants in the assign tenant screen, which can then be changed as necessary during the movein
process. Fill in the most common city, state, zip, etc., where your tenants are from. If you normally
bill your tenant’s each month, you can fill in the default billing information as well.
Configure Word Letters
This button brings up the Word Letter Configuration Options screen:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 167
This screen allows you to choose which letter will use the Word format when printed with the Daily
Charger or through Late Letters & Mailings. Any letter not checked here will be printed using the
Crystal Reports formatted letter.
If you have checked the TMSA Forms box, upon assigning a tenant and printing a contract, WinSen
will export the movein information into the Blue Moon Software where you will then go to print the
movein contract on a TMSA form. This box should only be checked if you are using Blue Moon
software with TMSA Contracts.
Configure EMail
Click the Configure EMail button on the Other tab of Site Setup to configure the EMail settings in
Winsen. The EMail Setup form is displayed.
168 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Connection Settings
If you are using a dial-up connection to access the Internet, Winsen can automatically use that
connection when e-mails need to be sent. Check the Use dial up connection checkbox. The list of
dial-up networking connections that are defined for your computer will be shown in the drop-down
list; select or type in the name of the dial up connection to use. Then fill in the User Name and
Password needed for this dial-up connection. The credentials may or may not be the same as the
username/password for your e-mail account.
To configure your dial-up networking connections, click on the Start button and select Control
Panel|Network Connections. You should have a functioning connection with your ISP and be able
to send and retrieve regular e-mail before you try to send e-mail messages with WinSen.
Note that Winsen will use this information to connect to the Internet if configured, but at this time, it
does not automatically disconnect.
If you have a high speed Internet connection or are manually connecting to the Internet no
configuration is needed in this section.
E-Mail Settings
Mail System: This dropdown list allows you to use different mail systems. The default protocol is
normally Internet/SMTP. If MAPI is selected, the system uses functionality in the default email
client on the machine to send email.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 169
MAPI Profile Name: If you are using MAPI for your mail system, you can type in the name of the
default mail profile here. If this is not filled in and your default e-mail client is not running, you may
receive a prompt from your e-mail program asking which profile to use. Fill in the default profile
name to avoid this prompt. To determine the mail profiles that are defined on your computer click on
the Start button. Then select Settings|Control Panel|Mail.
If you are using Internet/SMTP for your mail system, you will need to fill in the remaining
information as appropriate. If you are using MAPI or Active Messaging, these settings are
configured in your default e-mail client.
Server Information
Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) should be able to provide you with the following information.
Some ISPs use case sensitive systems so make sure the data is entered exactly as it is shown on the
information received from the ISP. Passwords are usually case-sensitive even if the username is not.
Incoming Mail Server: Enter the name of your incoming (POP3) mail server.
Outgoing Mail Server: Enter the name of your outgoing (SMTP) mail server.
If your SMTP server requires authentication, click the More Settings button to display the following
form:
My outgoing server (SMTP) requires authentication: If your SMTP server requires
authentication, check this box, and fill in the other fields as explained.
Use same settings as my incoming mail server: This will cause Winsen to use the same username
and password for the outgoing mail server as your incoming mail server.
Log on using the following credentials: If you need to use a different username and password than
your incoming mail server, select this option. Then fill in the username and password to use for your
outgoing mail server.
Log on to incoming mail server before sending mail: Some ISPs require that before an e-mail is
sent through the SMTP server, a successful login to the incoming (POP3) server must occur first.
Select this option if this is the case with your ISP.
When finished, click OK to close the Outgoing Server Settings form and return to the E-Mail Setup
screen. Click Cancel if you wish to close without saving.
Logon Information
170 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
This is the user name and password for your incoming (and possibly outgoing, see above discussion
on SMTP authentication) mail server.
User Information
This is the name and e-mail address that will appear in the “From” field of outgoing e-mails.
OK/Cancel
When finished configuring your e-mail settings, click OK to save your changes, close this form, and
return to the Site Setup screen. Click Cancel if you wish to close without saving.
Configure EMail Letters
This option allows you to setup the E-mailing of letters and receipts. For tenants who have valid Email addresses, and the EMail Notices checkbox is selected in Assign Tenant or View/Edit, the
system can E-mail them billing notices, late notices, and all other notices, as well as receipts.
Additionally, you can specify if such tenants should also receive printed notices, except in the case
of delinquent notices. Delinquent notices are always printed even if e-mails are sent, to ensure
compliance with legal requirements.
Click the Configure EMail Letters button on the Other tab of Site Setup to configure the EMail
letter settings in Winsen. The EMail Letters Configuration form is displayed:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 171
Letters for Tenants with E-Mail Addresses
For tenants who have valid E-mail addresses, and the EMail Notices checkbox is selected in Assign
Tenant or View/Edit, this section lets you designate if notices should be printed and/or E-mailed.
For each different type of notice, check the appropriate option to Email and/or print that notice type.
For example, if you would like to E-mail, but not print, billing notices and other non-delinquent
mailings, you would check the box in the E-Mail column and uncheck the one in the Print column
for the Non-Delinquent Letters option.
Note that Delinquent Letters are always printed even if e-mails are sent, to ensure compliance with
legal requirements.
You can also have a copy of all tenant notices sent to a designated e-mail address. Place a check in
the Send a copy of all tenant E-Mails to, then fill in the desired E-mail address where a copy of the
notices should be sent. Multiple E-mail addresses can be used if you separate them with a semicolon (;) character.
E-Mail Options
This allows you to send tenant E-mails in one of two ways: as An attachment in RTF format, or
In-line as text only. The RTF format allows the use of formatted letters, e.g. bold text, different
fonts, italics, underlining, and so on. The e-mail will have an RTF attachment that must be opened
with another program capable of reading RTF formatted documents, such as Microsoft Word. In this
case the system will use the configured Email Body (explained below) for the message body of the
letter.
If you use the In-line as text only option, the text of the notice will be “in-line” as plain text, which
does not support formatting such as bold, italics, different fonts, etc. In this case no external program
will be required to read the text of the notice but it may not look quite as nice as the RTF format.
Also the the configured Email Body is not used as the text of the notice becomes the body of the
message.
Testing Options
This allows you to redirect all tenant E-mails to a designated address for testing purposes. This is a
workstation-specific setting; having it in effect on this workstation does not affect others on your
network. This is very useful for when you are testing your E-mails and do not want test emails to be
sent to your tenants. When test mode is enabled, various screens used to e-mail notices will note this
fact in their title bars.
To enable E-mail test mode, check the Redirect all tenant E-Mails to: box, then fill in the desired
testing E-mail address where the notices should be sent. Multiple E-mail addresses can be used if
you separate them with a semi-colon (;) character.
When finished testing, uncheck the Redirect all tenant E-Mails to: box.
E-Mailed Notices Configuration
This grid allows you to specify the Crystal and Word filenames to use for creating E-mailed
documents to send to your tenants, whether to use Word to produce them, and the Email Subject
Line and Email body on a letter by letter basis. Note that the options in this grid are only for Emailed documents; they do not affect printed documents.
The grid has the following columns:
Description: shows the read-only description of the letter.
Crystal File Name: the filename to produce the letter when using Crystal Reports. You can type in
the filename, or select it by clicking the ... button that becomes visible when you select this cell.
172 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Word File Name: the filename to produce the letter when using Microsoft Word. You can type in
the filename or select it by clicking the ... button that becomes visible when you select this cell.
Use Word: if you wish to use Microsoft Word to produce the document, check this box. Otherwise,
the system uses Crystal Reports to produce it.
Email Subject Line: The subject line for e-mailed notices of this letter.
Email Body: The body text for e-mailed notices of this letter. As explained above, this does not
apply if the In-line as text only option is in use.
OK/Cancel
When finished configuring your e-mail letter settings, click OK to save your changes, close this
form, and return to the Site Setup screen. Click Cancel if you wish to close without saving.
Enable IDScan Interface
This option enables the interface with the Scanshell 800 Driver’s License Scanner, from Card
Scanning Solutions (http://www.card-scanner.com/). When enabled, the system can interface with
the Scanshell 800 to obtain customer data from a scan of their driver’s license, as well as
automatically store an image of the driver’s license, and/or just the face image, in the Winsen
database.
To enable this option, you must first be licensed for it. Please call Sentinel Systems for a license key
to use the ScanShell 800 driver’s license scanner with WinSen. After entering the new license key,
and restarting Winsen, check this option to enable the scanner.
Scanner Options
The scanner options for the ScanShell 800 are described in “Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup &
Operation with WinSen” on page 239.
Kiosk Options
Click this button to display the Kiosk Options form. These are the available options when WinSen is
interfaced with an INSOMNIAC™ Kiosk.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Site Setup • 173
When A New Tenant Is Added
This option controls how a new customer name is formatted in WinSen. When the Put last name
first, then use the following character to delimit it checkbox is selected, and the delimit character
“~” is used, the name John Smith would be added into WinSen as “Smith~ John”. This is the
recommended format. The delimiter character can be selected from the drop down list or can be
typed directly in.
POS Credit Card/ACH Processing Options
This setting controls whether the kiosk interface uses OpenTech Alliance or Winsen Credit Card
Processing.
If the kiosk interface should use OpenTech Alliance Credit Card Processing, select the “Use
OpenTech Credit Card Processing” option. Otherwise, the kiosk interface will process credit card
payments using the Winsen settings: None (manual processing), ICVerify, or PCCharge.
Minimum Number Of Movein Prorate Days
This is the minimum number of movein prorate days to be assessed on a movein when using the First
of Month rate charge method. It allows you to assess an extra month’s rent if the tenant moves in
near the end of the month. For an example, assume it is set to 5 days, and a tenant moved in on
1/28/2007. Then the system would charge an extra month’s rent in addition to the 4 remaining days
in January, and the tenant’s paid to date would be 3/1/2007. Otherwise the system would allow them
to move in with just the 4 days rent, and their paid-to-date would be 2/1/2007.
Set this number to 0 if you do not wish to use this feature. The maximum setting is 30. Also note that
it has no effect if you are not using the First of Month rate charge method.
OK/Cancel Buttons
Clicking on the OK Button saves the settings and closes the form, while the Cancel Button closes
the form without saving any changes.
Prospective Tenant Followup Actions
This option allows you to configure the list of available Prospective Tenant Followup Actions,
which are used in the Prospective Tenants functions. You can add new ones or delete ones that you
do not use.
Click the Prospective Tenant Followup Actions button on the Other tab of Site Setup to configure
the prospective tenant followup actions. The following form is displayed:
174 • Site Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Click Add to add a new record, Delete to delete the currently selected record.
The Followup Action column describes the action.
The Followup Method column specifies how the selected followup action is to be performed. The
options are Print Letter, Send E-Mail, Phone Call, Send Mail, and Other. The system can handle
the first two followup methods for you, but the rest, if used, will need to be done manually.
The Letter column allows you to specify what letter should be used for that followup action. It only
applies for the Print Letter and Send E-Mail followup methods. All installed prospective tenant
letters will be shown; choose the appropriate one for this followup action.
The Display Order column allows you to specify the order the list of followup actions will appear in
the Edit Prospective Tenant screen.
When finished with your changes, click Close to close this form and return to the Site Setup screen.
Accounts Setup
The Accounts Setup form is used to setup miscellaneous charge, credit, monthly charge, inventory,
and system accounts. It is also where the type of tax to be charged on these accounts is designated.
To setup your accounts select the “Accounts Setup” option from the Site Information menu. The
following form will appear:
The “Accounts” drop down list allows selection of the type of accounts to be edited, added, or
deleted.
After selecting the type of accounts to work with, use the Data Control Bar to navigate to the
desired account. If you select System Accounts, only the tax information can be modified.
Otherwise, you can add, edit, and delete accounts as necessary.
Account types are explained below.
Charge Accounts
These accounts are used for one-time charges to a tenant’s account. They are used for one time
charges such as cleaning fees, garbage disposal fees, lock cut fees, etc.
Credit Accounts
These accounts are used for one-time credits to a tenant’s account. Coupons for rent discounts, nonprofit discounts, employee discounts, etc., are examples.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Accounts Setup • 175
Monthly Charge Accounts
These accounts are used for recurring charges, to be billed and due with the rent, on a tenant’s
account. Electricity, late access, billing fees, etc., are examples.
Inventory Accounts
These accounts are used in conjunction with inventory items for inventory control. Inventory items
are linked to inventory accounts. When an inventory item is sold, the description for the linked
account will be printed on the receipt and the transaction log, and the sales amount is allocated to the
specified account. This allows you to have as little or as much inventory item detail as you need on
the closing reports. For example, you could have five different types of boxes specified as inventory
items, and have all five of them linked to an inventory account named “boxes”. Then when any of
those items are sold, “boxes” will be printed on the receipt and on the transaction log. You could
also setup an account for each type of box if you need that much detail on the closing reports.
Notes: Specific details on all inventory transactions are available through the Inventory Control
Reports regardless of how many inventory accounts have been set up.
Inventory sales will be listed on the site summary report under “miscellaneous charges”. For
specific inventory account amounts, refer to the trial balance report.
Inventory accounts can have an account number ranging from 7001 to 7999. The default inventory
account is #7001 – Merchandise Sales. Thus, if you add no more inventory accounts, all inventory
items sold will be allocated to this account.
System Accounts
The System Accounts are used to specify the type of tax to be charged on rent, transfer fees, NSF
fees, late fees, lien charges, auction revenue, insurance premiums, and administration fees. When
editing System Accounts, only the type of tax may be edited; the account numbers and descriptions
may not be changed. Future versions of WinSen will allow the chart of accounts to be completely
customized.
Acct #
In this field, enter the account number for the selected account. Valid account numbers depend on
the type of accounts being edited as follows:
Charge Accounts: 3001 to 3999.
Credit Accounts: 6001 to 6999.
Monthly Charge Accounts: 2001 to 2999.
Inventory Accounts: 7001 to 7999.
System Accounts: Not editable.
Description
Enter a description for the account, e.g., “Cleaning fee”, “Trash disposal”, “Billing fee”, “Rent
discount”, “Locks”, “Boxes”, etc.
Tax
From the drop down list, choose the type of tax to be charged during a transaction involving this
account. The choices are No Tax, Sales Tax (PST in Canada), Use Tax (GST in Canada), Both
176 • Accounts Setup
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Taxes, or Tax on Tax (applicable in Canada, this option will cause the system to charge PST on the
sum of sale + GST).
Advertising Categories
The Advertising Effectiveness categories are used to help you track your advertising and other
marketing programs at your facility. An unlimited number of categories are provided.
Advertising effectiveness categories are displayed in the Assign Tenant function and the information
recorded by the system is entered there on a tenant by tenant basis at move-in. They can also be
edited in the “View/Edit” function.
To setup your Advertising Categories select that option from the Site Information menu. The
following form will appear:
ID # and Description
Enter an optional ID# in the ID# field. In the description field, enter a brief description of this
advertising category, e.g. “Alarm system”, “Radio advertising”, “Billboard”, etc.
Demographic Categories
The Demographic Categories are used for collecting information on what type of tenants rent from
you. They are used to capture such information as renter sex, type of account (commercial or
individual), type of dwelling, etc. The information gathered can be of great value in your marketing
programs and is available in the Demographic reports & graphs on the Report Menu.
The Demographic categories are displayed in the Assign Tenant function and the information
recorded by the system is entered there on a tenant by tenant basis at move-in. They can also be
edited in the “View/Edit” function.
To setup your Demographic categories select that option from the Site Information menu. The
following form will be displayed:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Advertising Categories • 177
The upper portion of the form shows the Demographic Categories, while the lower part shows the
Demographic Items for the selected category.
Select the Demographic Category you wish to edit. You can modify the category by typing a new
description for it. You can add, edit, and delete Demographic Items for the selected category.
Click Add to add a new demographic item. Click Delete to delete the item; the system will confirm
your choice. If you answer yes, the item is deleted. To edit a demographic item, select it, then type
in the new description. You can also specify the Display Order for each item; this is the order the
items will appear in the demographic category drop-down lists on the View/Edit, Assign Tenant,
and Edit Prospective Tenant forms.
Inventory Control
This Feature is not available in WinSen Lite
The Inventory Control form is used for several inventory control functions. It is used to add, edit,
and delete inventory items; to print reports on inventory items; and to make adjustments to the
quantities on-hand.
You can setup an unlimited number of inventory items. To access Inventory Control, select that
option from the Site Information menu. The following form will appear:
178 • Inventory Control
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
The form has three tabs: Inventory Adjustments, Reports, and Inventory Items. Click the tabs
with your mouse or use <Ctrl+Tab> to configure inventory items as explained in the following
sections.
Inventory Adjustments
This tab is used to adjust the quantity on hand for inventory items when a delivery is received or a
discrepancy is found during a physical inventory.
All adjustment transactions entered will be printed on the Inventory Transaction reports.
Item
Select the inventory item you wish to adjust from the drop down list.
Type
Select “Delivery” if you have received a delivery of this item. Select “Adjustment” if you need to
adjust the quantity on hand due to a discrepancy after a physical inventory.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Inventory Control • 179
Quantity
Enter the adjustment quantity. If this is an adjustment transaction, enter a positive number to
increase the quantity on hand, or a negative number to decrease the quantity on hand. For deliveries,
enter the number of items delivered.
On Hand
This field is for reference only and cannot be edited. It shows the number of units currently on hand
for the selected item. It will be updated after completing the adjustment transaction.
Record
Click the Record button to record your adjustment. The system will display a confirmation
message, and the On Hand field will be updated to reflect the change.
Reports
The Reports tab allows you to print Inventory Control reports.
Report & Report Options
Report: From the drop down list, select the report you would like to print. The available reports are:
•
Inventory Items – provides the item #, description, vendor, vendor part number, reorder
point, quantity on hand, linked account number, tax type, and the retail price for each
inventory item in the database. This report is used for an overview of your inventory items.
•
Inventory Stock Status – shows the item #, description, vendor, vendor part number,
reorder point, quantity on hand, and a “reorder now” column. The reorder now column will
show “***” for any items that need to be reordered now. The report is used to indicate
which inventory items should be ordered. The report is sorted by item #.
•
Inventory Stock Status By Vendor – this report is the same as the Inventory Stock Status
report but is sorted by vendor instead of item #.
•
Inventory Transaction Detail – provides details on all inventory transactions for the time
period selected in Report Options. Information shown is the item #, description,
transaction date, transaction type (delivery or adjustment), transaction number, amount,
quantity in, quantity out, and on hand. The report is sorted by item #. Note that the
transaction number corresponds to transactions generated in association with selling
180 • Inventory Control
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
inventory. Since sales transactions are not generated by adjustments, adjustments will not
have a transaction number. Also note that the same transaction number could appear
multiple times because a given sales transaction could involve more than one inventory item.
•
Inventory Transaction Detail by Date – this is the same report as the Inventory
Transaction Detail report but is sorted by date instead of item #.
•
Inventory Transaction Summary – provides summaries of all inventory transactions for
the time period selected in Report Options. Information shown is the item #, description,
quantity in, quantity out, and on hand. The report is sorted by item #. It gives you
information on which inventory items are the best and worst sellers. It assists you in
deciding if slow-selling items should no longer be sold, or faster-selling ones ordered in
greater quantities.
•
Physical Inventory Worksheet – this report can be used to reconcile the quantities on hand
in the system with the quantities actually on hand. Print this report, then perform a physical
inventory and write the quantities in the Physical count column. Any discrepancies are then
corrected by posting adjustment transactions.
Report Options: the report options apply to the inventory transaction reports. If one of these
reports is selected, you can choose to include transactions for week-to-date (WTD), month-to-date
(MTD), or year-to-date (YTD).
Output Options
You can choose to have the selected report printed to your Printer, to a Window, or to a file by
clicking the appropriate choice.
•
Output to Printer: the report will be sent to the currently selected printer. To change the
destination printer, choose the “Printers” button and the Printers form will appear. For more
information on the Printers form, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
•
Output to Window: the report will be printed to a window. After the window appears,
allowing you to view the report on the screen, you will have a number of options. For
information on these options, see “Report Viewing Form” on page 18.
•
Output to File - the report will be printed in RTF format to a file named XXXXXXXX.RTF
where XXXXXXXX is the name of the original report file. For example, “invtrans.rpt” is used
to print the Inventory Transaction Detail report. If you output this report to a file,
“invtrans.rtf” will be created in the same folder where WinSen is installed. These files can
then be loaded into Microsoft Word or any other program capable of reading .rtf format files.
Print Report
Click the Print Report button to print your selected report.
Printer
Click this button to change the destination printer. The Printers form will appear. For more
information on the Printers form, see “Select Printer ” on page 16.
Add Inventory Reports to Main Report Menu
Click this button to add the inventory reports to the main report menu. They will be listed under the
“Inventory Reports” section and can be emailed from there if desired.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Inventory Control • 181
Inventory Items
The Inventory Items tab is used to add, edit, and delete inventory items.
To edit existing inventory items, use the data control bar to move from record to record. Then make
any required changes. To save your changes, move to another record or click the Close button to
save and exit from this form.
Click the Add button to add a new inventory item. Click the Delete button to delete the current
inventory item.
Item #
Use the item # field for your internal item number. You can use any number you wish. Note that
when a new record is added the system will assign a unique item number, which you can change if
you need to. Many of the inventory reports are sorted by this field.
Description
Enter a description of this inventory item.
Vendor
Enter the name of the vendor who supplies you with this inventory item.
Part Number
Enter the vendor part number for this inventory item.
Reorder
Enter the reorder point for this inventory item. Lead times and sales volume will need to be taken
into account to obtain the proper reorder point number. You can obtain sales volume information by
printing the Inventory Transaction Summary report.
182 • Inventory Control
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Price
Enter the retail price for this item.
Account
From the drop down list, select the linked account. As explained in “Inventory Accounts” on page
176, all sales transactions involving this inventory item will be allocated to the selected account.
Only inventory accounts (7001 to 7999) will appear in the list.
On Hand
This field is for reference only and cannot be edited. It shows the current on hand quantity for the
selected inventory item.
Cost
This field is where you can enter the actual wholesale cost of the item
Size Codes
The Size Codes option is used to add, delete or change the size codes at your facility. It is also used
to change the standard rate and standard deposit for one or more size codes. To access this option,
select Size Codes from the Maintenance menu. The following window will appear:
Size
The Size column designates a code which represents a specific size unit at your facility. They can be
up to two characters in any combination you desire.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Size Codes • 183
Description
This field is used to describe the dimensions of the units of this Size Code. You can type the data in
any desired format. For example, the entry might be “10 X 10 AC” indicating that the unit is 10’ by
10’ in size and is air conditioned.
Rate
This is the standard rate for this size unit. An individual tenant’s rate can be changed in the Assign
Tenant or View/Edit forms (if permitted) but the change will appear on the “Non Standard Rates
Detail Report”.
Deposit
The amount the system will charge for a security deposit for a unit of this size. The deposit can be
changed during Assign Tenant if need be but will show up on the “Non Standard Rates Detail
Report”.
Tax Rate
This is the tax rate charged on rent for units of this size code. This field is provided for cases where
different tax rates are assessed on different types of storage. The system will use this tax rate if
configured to do so in Site Setup.
Area
The area for units of this size code. The number may represent square feet, square meters, etc. This
information is required for calculations performed in the “Square Footage Rental Analysis Report”.
Note: The area must be input for all size codes, including outside storage, e.g., RV’s, boats, trailers,
etc. If this information is not in the system, the information on the “Square Footage Rental
Analysis” report will be incorrect.
Display Order
This field is the “display order” for each size and is used to specify what order the list of sizes should
appear in on various screens, for example the Find Vacant Unit dialog.
For each size, fill in the appropriate display order number so the list of sizes will appear in the
desired order.
Changed
The date on which this size code record was last edited. This date will be filled in by the system and
cannot be edited.
# Units
The number of installed units of this size is shown for reference purposes.
Online / Minimum
If the Online checkbox is selected, this size will be uploaded to the Winsen Online service and will
be available for online reservations, as long as the number of vacant units of this size is greater than
or equal to the number in the Minimum column.
184 • Size Codes
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Prelease Deposit
The amount required to prelease (reserve) a unit of this size on the Winsen Online service, or in the
Assign Tenant screen.
Editing a Size Code
To edit size code data, merely click on the desired field with your mouse, and type the new data.
Note: You can edit the description, rate, deposit, tax rate, and area information for a given size code.
Changing the rate or the deposit will only change rates and deposits on vacant units. Occupied units
will retain their current rate and deposit.
Adding a Size Code
Press the Add button to add a new size code. The cursor will move to the end of the list, allowing
you to type in the information as specified above.
Deleting a Size Code
Deleting a size code is accomplished by displaying the desired code and pressing the Delete button.
Note: Size codes cannot be deleted if there are units in the system currently assigned to that size
code. You must first delete those units or assign them a new size code.
Add/Remove Units
This option is used to add or remove units, change the size code of a unit, rename a unit, change the
“walk order” number of a unit, or change the “access interface” number of a unit.
To access this option, select Add/Remove Units from the Maintenance Menu. The following form
will be displayed:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Add/Remove Units • 185
Unit
The unit number. An entry in this field is required, and each one must be unique (you cannot have
duplicated unit numbers).
Site Prefix
If you are using WinSen Electronic Manager, each unit must also include the site prefix: the site
number (with a leading zero if it is less than 2 characters), and a “-” (a dash). The site prefix is used
by the system to determine which site you are working with when you make payments, assign
tenants, etc. For example, if your site #1 has a unit number 00101, the site prefix is “01-”, for a
completed unit number of 01-00101. Site Prefixes should start at 01- and go up sequentially. The
highest allowed site prefix is 99.
You can use the same unit number in two different sites. For example, you can have 01-00101 and
02-00101 in the same database.
Size
The size code for that unit as defined in the “Size Codes” selection under the Maintenance menu. An
entry in this field is required. You must assign a valid size code to each unit. If you attempt to
assign a size code that does not exist in the size codes for your site, the system will display an error
message and will not let the cursor leave the Size Code field.
Interface
This column is the Interface Number: the unit number that will be sent to most gate controller
systems (if you have a compatible gate access system) anytime there is a transaction on this unit
affecting the gate, e.g. move-in, move-out, make late, pay-up, etc. Normally, it should be exactly the
same as the unit number (minus the site prefix if you are using WinSen Electronic Manager) unless
you have alpha-numeric unit numbers. If the unit number contains alpha-numerics, there are two
options for assigning the interface number:
1. The alpha character can be substituted with its numeric position in the alphabet. Thus, unit
A01 would have an interface number of 101, B01 would be 201, D99 would be 499, and so
on.
2. It can be only the numeric portion of the unit number. For example, unit A01 could be
assigned an interface number of 1. However if you also have a unit B01 this scheme will not
work, because the interface number for that unit would also be 1, and the interface numbers
must be unique.
We highly recommend that you fill in the interface number for each unit, even if you do not have a
compatible gate access system. Also, the interface numbers should be unique.
Note: This field is NOT for the tenant’s passcode.
WalkNo
This field is the “walk order” - the order that you would “walk the site” when doing a “walkthrough” each morning. This field should not be left blank, since the “Lock/Unlock Report” is
sorted by walk order number.
186 • Add/Remove Units
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Display Order
This field is the “display order” for each unit and is used to specify what order the list of units should
appear in on various screens. This field is also available as a sort option in the report menu. This
field can be useful in certain cases. For example, suppose you have alpha-numeric unit numbers A1
to A9, A10 to A50, B1 to B9, and B10 to B50. A sort by unit number will result in B1 following A9,
when you would probably rather have A10 listed after A9. The display order field allows you to
specify how the units should be listed so that A10 would follow A9, B10 would follow B9, and so
on.
For each unit, fill in the appropriate display order number so the list of units will appear in the
desired order.
Status
The status of the unit. This field cannot be edited; the system will fill it in according to the unit
status. In the case of a new unit, the status will be “E0” (the unit is empty).
Rate
The rate for this unit. This field cannot be edited; the system will fill it in according to two
conditions:
1. If the unit is vacant, the “standard rate” for the unit’s size code will be displayed.
2. If the unit is occupied, the actual unit rate will be displayed. This may not necessarily be the
“standard rate” for that unit size.
Deposit
The deposit for the unit according to the conditions shown above for the “Unit Rate”. This field also
cannot be edited.
Type
The number that specifies the type of unit. This field can be edited to a number that has been defined
in Maintenance|Unit Types.
Type Description
This is the description of the unit type selected for the unit. This field cannot be edited as it displays
the description from the unit type selected.
Adding Units
It is important to realize that all new units are added to the end of the list, regardless of the unit
number, and the system will sort the units into ascending order when you save your changes.
There are two ways to add new units:
1. Press the Add button. The system will add a new unit number with the same size code as
the last one displayed, and a unit number, interface number, and walk number incremented
by one. Then the cursor will move to the newly added unit where you edit the unit number,
size code, interface number, and walk number to match the unit you are adding.
2. Check the “Auto Adding” box. If the “Auto Adding” box is checked, the system will add a
new unit each time the cursor is on the unit number field in the last row of the list of units,
and you press the down arrow key to move to a new row. The unit that is auto-added by the
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Add/Remove Units • 187
system will have the same size code as the last one displayed, and a unit number, interface
number, and walk number incremented by one. You then edit this information as necessary
to match the unit you are adding.
Continue adding new units using either of the above methods until all units have been installed.
Then press the Close button to save your changes and exit.
Deleting Units
To delete a unit, place the cursor on the row which contains the unit you want to delete and press the
Delete button. The system will verify that you want to delete the unit. If you choose Yes the unit
will be deleted. Note that the system will only allow a unit to be deleted if it is vacant.
Renaming a Unit
To rename a unit, place the cursor on the unit you want to rename, and then type the new unit
number. When you save your changes, the system will detect that the unit number was changed. It
will then have to go through the transactions, notes, reminders, and lien record for that unit (if any),
and change the unit number in each of those records. Therefore, it will take longer for your
computer to save your changes if you have renamed units.
Changing a Unit’s Size Code
To change the size code of a unit, place the cursor on the size code field of the unit, then type in the
new size code. Note that the unit rate and deposit will only change if the unit is vacant.
Changing Interface Number and Walk Order Number
You can edit the interface number and walk order number for a unit by typing over the old
information.
Unit Types
This option is used to add, edit or remove Unit Type records. To access this option, select Unit
Types from the Maintenance Menu. The following form will be displayed:
188 • Unit Types
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Unit Type
The numeric value that represents the individual Unit Type. This value will be set by the program
automatically when adding Unit Type records and cannot be edited.
Description
The description for the Unit Type. It can be any alphanumeric value up to 50 characters in length
and may be edited at any time.
Enable Gate Interface
When this option is checked for the Unit Type, passcodes for units assigned to this Unit Type will
operate the gate system. This would normally be checked, but if the unit type in question is mobile
storage it can be unchecked so that tenants renting mobile storage units do not have access to the
storage facility. Or you might have post office box type units that do not require gate access. In this
case the box would not be checked.
Enable Locations
When this option is checked for the Unit Type, there will be additional fields to enter location
information for units of this type on the Other tab on the View/Edit Tenant and Assign Tenant
forms.
Add
When this button is clicked a new Unit Type record will be added to the list. It will automatically
number the added record in sequence with any existing records. If there is a gap in the number
sequence it will fill the number gap so that the numbers will be in sequence. As mentioned above,
the Unit Type number can not be edited.
Delete
This button deletes the currently selected record from the list, as long as there are no units using this
unit type. The record cannot be deleted if there are current units assigned that unit type.
Apply
This button becomes active if any changes to the data have been made. Click this button to save any
changes you have made without closing the form.
OK
Click this button to save any changes and close the form.
Cancel
Clicking on this button cancels any changes you have made and closes the form.
Rate Change Options
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Rate Change Options • 189
The Rate Change Option is used for most system rate changes. To setup rate changes, access the
Rate Change option from the Maintenance Menu. The following form will be displayed:
Entering the Rate Change information
Following is an explanation of each data field and control found on the Rate Change form.
Size Code & New Size Code
The Size Code field is used to specify which size of unit should be changed to the new rate. From
the drop down list, choose the appropriate size. The Standard Rate for units of that size will then
be displayed for reference purposes.
The New Size Code field is used if you need to change the size code for units that are going to be
affected by this rate change. For example, let’s suppose you have two size codes, A1 and A2, which
are the same size units but have different rates. You want this rate change to change the units that
are a size code A1 to size code A2. To do this, you would select size code A1 from the Size Code
field, and then select size code A2 from the New Size Code field. Then all units that are affected by
the rate change as specified in the Units to be affected field (explained below) will be changed to
the new rate, and changed to a size code A2 on the Date of Change.
If the above paragraph doesn’t apply you can ignore the New Size Code field.
190 • Rate Change Options
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Units to be affected
This field is used to specify the units to be affected by this rate change. Note that the “standard rate”
in the below choices refers to the standard rate for that particular unit size as shown in the Size
Codes option under Maintenance on the day the rate change takes effect.
Note: The Automatic Rate Change check box in the Unit Status tab of the “View/Edit - Form” form
must be checked for a tenant to have their unit rate changed by automatic rate changes.
Select the desired option from the drop down list. The choices are:
•
Only unoccupied units: the rate change will affect vacant units only. An alternative to this
type of rate change is to go into the Size Codes option in Maintenance and change the
standard rate for the size code. Then the vacant units will be updated with the new rate
during the next Daily Charger.
•
Occupied units below the standard rate: the rate change will affect all occupied units that
are below the standard rate.
•
Occupied units with the standard rate: the rate change will affect all occupied units that
are at the standard rate.
•
Occupied units above the standard rate: the rate change will affect all occupied units that
are above the standard rate.
•
All occupied units: the rate change will affect all occupied units.
•
All units below the standard rate: the rate change will affect all units that are below the
standard rate.
•
All units with the standard rate: the rate change will affect all units that are at the standard
rate.
•
All units above the standard rate: the rate change will affect all units that are above the
standard rate.
•
All units: the rate change will affect all units.
Type of Rate Change
This field is used to specify if this record is a One Time Only, Rotating or When occupancy
percent is reached rate change. When you change this option you’ll note that the corresponding
data entry fields immediately to the right of this field will change accordingly as follows:
1. If it is One Time Only, the rate change will be performed by the Daily Charger on the Date
of Change, and then deleted. For this type of rate change, you will need to specify the
Notice Date, and the Date of Change. Then on the Notice Date the system will
automatically print a rate change notice to all affected tenants (in Late Letters & Mailings),
and on the Date of Change the Daily Charger will perform the actual rate change.
2. If it is an Rotating rate change, the rate change is time based, meaning that the unit rate will
be changed on all affected units every n days, where n is the number of days between rate
changes. This type of rate change is very useful if you raise the rate on a unit a certain
amount of time after move-in.
For this option, you will need to enter the Notice Days and the Days Since Last Change.
The Notice Days specifies how many days before the rate change is scheduled to take effect
to print a rate change notice for the tenant (in Late Letters & Mailings). The Days Since
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Rate Change Options • 191
Last Change number tells the system how many days since the last rate change to raise the
rate again.
To effectively use the Rotating rate change option, you should be aware that it is based on
the number of days since the last rate change, not the number of months. Therefore, if you
normally raise rates on a unit six months after it has been assigned, you should specify a
number somewhat less than exactly six months worth of days (but not less than five months
worth) such as 170. This would raise the rate after 170 days, thus assuring that the new rate
will have taken effect before the rent is charged on the sixth anniversary of the move-in.
3. If choosing the When this Occupancy percent is reached option you will need to specify
the Notice Days and Days after % is reached. Then when the target % of occupancy is
reached, the rate change will be scheduled to take effect after the number of days specified in
the Days after % is reached field, with notices to be printed after the number of days
specified in Notice Days.
New Rate
This area is used to specify the new rate, and the method to use to calculate it. The options are as
follows:
Specific Dollar Amount: the rate will be raised to the specified amount. For example, entering
150.00 in the rate field would set the new rate to that amount.
Dollar Amount Increase: the rate will be increased by the amount specified. For example, entering
10.00 will raise the rate by that amount. You can also designate the Maximum Rate for this rate
change. When a value is entered in this field, a given unit will not be increased to more than the
Maximum Rate. For example, if a unit of the selected size is currently renting for 110.00, and the
rate change specifies to raise all units below the standard rate by 10.00, and the standard rate is
115.00, the unit rate would be raised to 115.00, not 120.00. If you enter 0 in the Maximum Rate
field, no maximum rate will be observed. In this case, the unit in the above example would be raised
to 120.00.
192 • Rate Change Options
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Percentage Increase: the rate will be increased by the specified percentage. If you choose this
option, you also need to specify the Rounding Method. You can specify to have the new rate
rounded to the nearest Penny, Nickel, Dime, Quarter, Half-Dollar, or Dollar. The Maximum Rate
field can be specified as in the above discussion.
New Standard Rate
Check this box if you want this rate change to be the new standard rate for units in this size. If this
option is checked, the system will update the standard rate shown in the Size Codes option with the
rate from this rate change record.
New Deposit
To change the security deposit on vacant units, enter the new security deposit in this field. Note that
this will only apply to vacant units.
Editing and Removing Rate Change records
To edit a previously entered rate change, first select the record that you wish to change using the
Data Control Bar. You can then make any required changes to the rate change record and press the
Save button to save your changes and exit.
Removing a rate change is accomplished by first selecting the proper record using the Data Control
Bar, then pressing the Delete button. The system will verify that you really want to delete it.
Choose OK to delete the rate change.
Tax Rate Changes
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
The Tax Rate Change option allows scheduling of automatic tax rate changes. To setup tax rate
changes, select “Tax Rate Change Options” from the Maintenance menu. The following form will
be displayed:
Site
If you are using WinSen Electronic Manger, this drop down list allows you to select the site for
which you wish to schedule tax rate changes. Otherwise, the Site drop down list will only show one
site and can be ignored.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Tax Rate Changes • 193
Tax
Select the type of tax to be changed: Use Tax (GST in Canada), or Sales Tax (PST in Canada).
New Rate
Enter the new tax rate.
Effective Date
Enter the effective date of the tax rate change. When the system charger is run on the effective date,
the designated tax rate will be changed automatically.
Password Maintenance
This option provides the site with the ability to add, delete, and change the system passwords. The
system will allow you to have up to eight different “password levels”, and as many passwords as you
may need. You can also use no passwords at all if you prefer.
To access this function, select Password Maintenance from the Maintenance Menu. The following
form will be displayed:
ID
Enter an ID number for this password record.
Name
Enter a name for this password record. For example, the name of the person who will be using this
password.
Level
From the drop down list, choose the level for this password record. The level setting for each
password in the system is used in “Password Access Levels” on page 195 to designate which menu
items are accessible to which password. The choices are:
1. Guest
194 • Password Maintenance
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
2. Operator
3. Operator level II
4. Manager
5. Manager level II
6. Area Manager
7. Area Manager level II
8. Owner
Password & New Password
These two fields are for entering or changing the password for the currently displayed password
record. Note that the actual password cannot be seen, instead the system will display “*” for each
character in the password for security reasons.
In the Password box, type in the new password. Then type in the same new password in the New
Password box. You must enter the new password twice to verify that the password you typed in is
what you thought you did. If the same password is not entered twice, the system will not allow you
to save your changes.
Password Access Levels
This option is used to define which menu items are accessible to which of the eight password levels
available. For example, if a menu selection is defined to be available only to a password which is
Manager Level, a manager level or higher password must be entered to access that function. A
password level which is defined as Guest, Operator, or Operator Level II would not be allowed
access.
To access this option, select it from the Maintenance menu. The following form will appear:
In addition to the normal OK, Cancel, and Help buttons, this form has two buttons that perform the
following actions:
Defaults
The Defaults button will set up the password access levels to the “factory defaults”. The factory
defaults are:
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Password Access Levels • 195
•
No password required for all selections under the Main menu.
•
Manager level or higher password required for all Site Setup options.
•
Manager level or higher password required for Rate Change options, Change Due Day,
Change Tenant Passcode, Set Lock/Unlock, Cancel Transaction, Lien Processing,
Change Unit Status, and Insurance options.
•
Owner level password required for Size Codes and Add/Remove Units, Password
Maintenance, and Restore Database.
Set All
This button will set all options in the Operation box to the currently highlighted password level. For
example, if Manager is currently highlighted in the Level Required box, and you press the Set All
button, all options would require a Manager level or higher password.
Operation and Level Required
The Operation box shows the various functions in WinSen Property Manager. To set an access
level, use your mouse to highlight the desired operation. Then choose the password level required to
access that operation in the Level Required box.
Repeat this procedure for each system operation that you wish to be password protected, then press
“Close” to save your changes and exit.
Database Operations
The Database Operations option under Maintenance allows you to perform the following operations
on your WinSen Property Manager database:
1. Restore Database: restores a backup of your database. CAUTION: use this option
carefully, since it will overwrite the current data with the data from the backup. Do not
confuse this option with the “backup all data” option in End of Period Processing. If you
were to accidentally restore an old backup it could be a disastrous situation.
2. Rebuild and Compact Database file: repairs your database if it has become damaged.
CAUTION: you should backup your data before using this option.
3. Compact Database file: compacts your database. This is desirable from time to time due to
the nature of the database format. CAUTION: you should backup your data before using
this option.
4. Verify Database: verifies your database. This option will check your database for invalid
or “null” values. Use this option if you are receiving “invalid use of null” error messages
when operating the program.
To access these options, select Database Operations from the Maintenance menu. A sub-menu will
appear with the options. Select the desired operation and proceed as explained in the following
sections.
Restore Database
This will restore your database from a set of backup disks. It is the opposite of backing up and will
overwrite the database on the hard disk with the data contained on the diskette(s). It is normally only
done in unusual circumstances, e.g. a hard drive failure.
196 • Database Operations
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Place your disk containing your backup data into the source drive. Then select this option from
Maintenance|Database Operations to display the following dialog:
Source Path / Backup Sets
This is the path to the backup set(s) and the list of backup sets found on that path. If you back up to
a floppy drive, this will normally be A:\. In the example, we have been backing up to the F:\ drive,
which is a ZIP drive. Therefore the list in “Backup Sets” shows 4 different backup sets, from the
previous 4 days. The backup sets are listed in date/time order. Select the backup you wish to restore
from the list. Normally this will be the most recent one.
Automatically overwrite existing files
Select this option to automatically overwrite files on the hard drive with files on the backup set. If
this option is not selected, the system will prompt if you wish to overwrite files during the restore
procedure.
Restore
After selecting the desired source path, backup set, and overwrite option, click the Restore button to
perform the restore procedure.
Test/Fix Zip
This button allows you to test and/or repair the ZIP files on the backup media. It should not
normally be necessary to use this feature. If you suspect a corrupted backup set, highlight the ZIP
file in the backup sets list, then click this button to test the ZIP file. If the system detects that the
ZIP file is damaged, you will be prompted if you wish to try to repair it. First ensure that you have a
backup copy of the file, then select Yes, and the system will attempt to repair the damaged ZIP file.
Note that if a ZIP file has been spanned across floppy disks, the system will not be able to repair it.
Note: When you restore a backup, it will put your database back to the state it was in when you
made the backup. If you accidentally restore an old backup, the current data will be overwritten.
This is a potentially disastrous situation. Therefore, use EXTREME CAUTION with this option.
Do not confuse this option with the “Backup all Data” option in the “End of Period Processing”
menu. They are opposite processes. “Backing up” copies the database from your hard disk to a
removable diskette as a backup in case of hard disk failure or similar problem. “Restoring” is the
opposite; it will copy the data from the removable diskette to your hard disk, thus restoring it to the
state it was in when the backup was made.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Database Operations • 197
Rebuild and Compact Database File
This option rebuilds and compacts your WinSen Property Manager database. We recommend that it
is run approximately once per week, or anytime a serious database error has occurred. It should be
used if your database has become corrupted due to a power outage, power surge, hard drive failure,
etc.
Note: We recommend that you backup your data before performing this procedure.
When you select this option the following form will be displayed:
File Name
Enter the file name of the database you wish to rebuild. By default, “manager.mdb” will be
highlighted, since that is the database file for WinSen Property Manager. Then choose OK to rebuild
the database.
Compact Database File
Due to the nature of the database format used by WinSen Property Manager, the database file can
tend to become fragmented and larger than necessary after a time. This option will compact the
WinSen Property Manager database, making it smaller and access to it faster.
Note: We recommend that you backup your data before performing this procedure.
When you select this option the following form will be displayed:
198 • Database Operations
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
File Name
Choose the file name of the database you wish to compact. “Manager.mdb” will already be
highlighted, since that is the database file for WinSen Property Manager. Then choose OK to
compact the database.
Verify Database Consistency
This option verifies your WinSen Property Manager database. It will check all of the database fields
for valid data, and for “nulls”. “Null” values in the database can sometimes cause an “invalid use of
null” error message to be generated by the program. If you see this error message, use the “Verify
Database” option to remove the “null” values in your database.
Note: We recommend that you backup your data before performing this procedure.
When you select this option you will see the following form:
Choose “OK” to perform the database consistency check. The program will display status messages
as it processes your database. When it is finished, note that the “OK” button has changed to a
“Print” button. To print a report of any discrepancies encountered, click the “Print” button.
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Database Operations • 199
Purge Old Information
This option allows old information to be purged from the WinSen databases. When you select this
option you will see the following form:
Five categories are provided: old closing information, old unit information, transactions, inactive
customers and old Sentinel activity. After first backing up the data, these selections can be invoked
singly or all at once. To purge information, place a checkmark in the box to the left of the desired
selection then enter the cutoff date. Then click Process. It is recommended to retain at least one
year’s worth of data for any selections, although the cutoff date can be as early as the first of last
month.
200 • Database Operations
Chapter 6 - Maintenance
Utilities
Daily Charger
This option under the Utilities menu will allow you to run the Daily Charger for the day if it has not
already been run. For example, let’s say you came in this morning to find a number of payments
dropped off by tenants during the night. You want to post them before running the Daily Charger to
avoid the possible charging of late fees to the tenants. You would accomplish this by choosing
Cancel to skip the Daily Charger when it is displayed, then posting the payments, then going back to
the Daily Charger by selecting this option from the Utilities menu.
Calendar
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
The rental office often needs access to dates of the month and year. Occasionally, they will also
need access to future or previous years. The Calendar function under the Utilities menu provides
access to a calendar without leaving WinSen Property Manager.
When you select this option the following calendar will be displayed:
After the calendar is displayed you can use the following keys to scroll the date:
Utilities
Daily Charger • 201
•
Left Arrow: moves the highlighted month back by one.
•
Right Arrow: moves the highlighted month forward by one.
•
Clicking on the name of the month or year allows changing.
.
Change Date/Time
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
This option allows you to change the date and/or time in your computer system, and therefore in
WinSen Property Manager. Select this option from the Utilities Menu or double click on the clock in
your taskbar to show the following form:
Enter the new date and/or time, then choose OK to exit.
This provides an easy method to “catch up” for days on which the rental office was closed. Change
the computer date, access the Daily Charger option under Utilities menu and proceed with the Daily
Charger, printing of any required notices for the day, and running the Daily Close.
The Change Date option might also be used if the site wishes to run the Daily Charger (for the next
day) after the Daily Close is done in the evening. Moving the date forward will allow this to be
accomplished. You would need to make sure to set the date back when finished.
Note: Use of the Change Date/Time options requires that you be thoughtful with their use. If you
elect to use them for evening processing, make sure you set them back to the correct date and time
when you are finished.
202 • Change Date/Time
Utilities
System Information
This option will display a summary of important information about your computer and Windows
installation. When you select it from the Utilities Menu an information box similar to the following
will appear:
This information can be useful to check things such as the free space on your hard drive, the amount
of system resources available, number of ports installed, etc.
Show Vacant Units
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
This convenient feature allows you to quickly check your vacant units. It can be accessed from
anywhere in the program. You can access it in two ways: select it from the Utilities menu, or press
<Ctrl-U> (the Ctrl key and the U key at the same time). The following dialog box will be
displayed:
Utilities
System Information • 203
Size Code
In the list of size codes, click the desired unit size. The system will then show all vacant units of that
size, how many were found, the rate, and the deposit.
Waiting List
Click the Waiting List button to display any vacant units that are desired by tenants on the waiting
list. For example, if a tenant on the waiting list has indicated that they would like a 5 x 5 unit, and
there is vacant 5 x 5 units, clicking the waiting list button will display that tenant’s name and indicate
that a 5 x 5 is available.
Quick View
This feature is not available in WinSen Lite
This option is a convenient feature which allows you to quickly view the status of any unit. It can be
accessed from anywhere in the program. You can access it in two ways: select it from the Utilities
menu, or press <Ctrl-Q> (the Ctrl key and the Q key at the same time). The following information
box will be displayed:
204 • Quick View
Utilities
Information shown is unit number and tenant name, balance information, Unit Status, Size, Rate,
Deposit, Rent Due Day, Paid to Date, and the last receipt date.
Once the box is displayed you have two ways to view other units:
1. Use the data control bar to scroll through the units.
2. Press the Find button to search for a unit as detailed in “Find Unit Function” on page 101.
WinSen Online
This option opens the Winsen Online form and causes the WinSen Online interface to connect to the
internet and update customer and payment information. The WinSen Online form should be opened
and refreshed at least once a day to ensure the online data is synchronized with the WinSen program.
Having The Run with Daily Charger option selected will ensure this happens when you run the
charger. The online data can also be refreshed at any time by opening the WinSen Online Form from
the Utilities menu.
Please see “Appendix R – WinSen Online Service” on page 246 for more information on Winsen
Online.
Utilities
WinSen Online • 205
Appendices
Appendix A - System File Names
WinSen Property Manager requires certain, specified files to process your data, configure your
system, generate tenant notices, etc. Following are the names and descriptions of these files.
Late Letters & Notices File Names
Following is a list of the files used as templates for printing late letters, contracts, billing notices, etc.
Appendices
•
LATE1.LET.................First late notice.
•
LATE2.LET.................Second late notice.
•
LATE3.LET.................Third late notice.
•
LATE4.LET.................Fourth late notice
•
LATE5.LET.................Fifth late notice
•
CONTRACT.LET.......Template for printing of contracts.
•
LIEN.LET....................Final lien notice
•
MBILL.LET ................Monthly billing notice.
•
PARTIAL.LET ...........Partial pay notice.
•
PREFOR.LET .............Pre-lease forfeiture notice
•
PRELEASE.LET ........Pre-Lease contract.
•
PRELIEN.LET............Pre-lien notice.
•
QBILL.LET.................Quarterly billing notice.
•
RATECHG.LET .........Rate change notice.
•
RCHECK.LET............Returned check notice.
•
SBILL.LET..................Semi-annual billing notice.
•
THANKYOU.LET ......“Thanks” letter.
•
TRANSFER.LET........Transfer contract.
•
WELCOME.LET........“Welcome” letter.
Appendix A - System File Names • 207
•
YBILL.LET .................Annual billing notice.
In addition, there will be a number of files that have extensions of .2nd and .rem. The files with a
.2nd extension (for example, late1.2nd) are used for printing a duplicate notice to the second contact
party listed for a unit. The files with an .rem extension (for example, 1atel.rem) are used for
printing notices to tenants whose late status is set to “reminders”, and are worded differently from
the standard late notices. Files with the .DOT file extensions instead of the .LET file extensions are
the Microsoft Word templates.
These files must only be used for their specific purpose. Do not assign these names to other
documents in the system. Your facility may not use all notices generated by the system (for example
the 4th late notice LATE4.LET). If the notice is not used by your site, it does not have to be
included in your database.
General File Names
Following is a list of file name extensions used by the system.
•
*.CAT ....... Catalog files, used to specify which files are to be backed up by MSBACKUP
when you backup your system.
•
*.CSV........ Files containing data that has been exported from reports.
•
*.DLL ....... “Dynamic Link Library” files. These files contain routines used at run time by
the system for various purposes.
•
*.DOC....... Document files. Letters, contracts, etc. to be printed as a Word document.
•
*.DOT…… Document Template file.
•
*.EXE ....... Executable files.
•
*.HLP ....... Help files. These files contain the “on-line” help used by the system.
•
*.LET........ Letter files, templates used to print late letters, contracts, billing notices, etc.
•
*.MDB ...... Database files. All data relating to customers, transactions, accounts, etc., are
stored in files with this extension. The data file for WinSen is “Manager.mdb”.
•
*.RPT........ Report files, templates used to generate reports.
•
*.VBX ....... VBX files, used by the system for certain controls on various forms.
•
*.WAV...... Wave files. These files are used to generate various sounds, for example when
certain events occur a wave file will be played.
208 • Appendix A - System File Names
Appendices
Appendix B - Explanation of Transaction Codes
WinSen Property Manager utilizes transaction codes to identify the type of each transaction
generated by the system. The transaction codes always consist of three characters. A specific
transaction can be identified as follows:
The first character (reading left to right) identifies the transaction type:
0 ................... Move in
1 ................... Move out
2 ................... Transfer
3 ................... Pre-lease
4 ................... Charge
5 ................... Notice
6 ................... Change to account
7 ................... Lien Process
8 ................... Payment
The second character identifies the method of payment for the transaction:
0 ................... No payment received
1 ................... Cash
2 ................... Check
3 ................... Credit card
4 ................... Combination
5 ................... Credit (misc. credit or prior credit)
The third character is used to provide additional description of the transaction. This digit is
only used in selected cases. These entries are associated with a specific Transaction Type as listed
above (the first character in the code).
Transaction types 0 and 1 (movein and moveout) will always have a zero (0) as the third digit.
Transaction type 3 (prelease) will have one of the following for the third character:
0 ................... Prelease transaction.
1 ................... Prelease forfeit transaction.
Transaction type 4 (charge) will have one of the following for the third character:
0 ................... Rent charged
1 to 5 ............ Late fee charged (e.g., “403” means 3rd late fee charged).
6 ................... Returned check posted.
Transaction type 5 (notice) will have one of the following for the third character:
0 ................... Billing
1 to 5 ............ Late letter #n (e.g., “502” means second late letter sent).
C................... Returned check letter
6 ................... Pre-lease forfeiture letter
7 ................... Rate change letter
8 ................... Pre-lien letter
9 ................... Final lien letter
A ................... Special mailing
B ................... Welcome letter
Appendices
Appendix B - Explanation of Transaction Codes • 209
Transaction type 6 (change to account) will carry one of the following as the third character:
0.................... Add charges
1.................... Drop Charges
2.................... Unit overlocked by system operator
3.................... Unit unlocked by system operator
4.................... Due day change
5.................... Status change
6.................... Canceled transaction
7.................... Add insurance
8.................... Change insurance coverage
9.................... Cancel insurance
A ................... View/Edit rate change
B ................... Change tenant passcode
C ................... Rate change
D ................... Insurance policy forfeit
E ................... Unit overlocked by Daily Charger
F ................... Unit unlocked by the system (usually from a delinquent tenant paying in full)
Transaction type 7 (Lien Process) will carry one of the following as the third character:
0.................... Initiate lien process or change in lien charge amounts
1.................... Automatic lien process (generated by system charger)
3.................... Lien completed
Transaction type 8 (Payment) will normally carry a zero (0) as the third character. The exceptions
to this are “autobill” transactions, which are type “831” or “832”, and multiple unit payments, which
are explained further in the following section.
Examples of transaction codes
020................ A move in paid by check.
010................ A move in paid by cash.
220................ A transfer paid by check.
310................ A pre-lease deposit paid by cash.
401................ First late fee charged.
591................ Late letter #1 printed by system.
604................ Rent due day changed.
700................ Initiate lien process.
810................ A payment made in cash.
820................ A payment made by check.
A table of transaction codes can be found in “Appendix C - Transaction Code Table” on page 211.
210 • Appendix B - Explanation of Transaction Codes
Appendices
Appendix C - Transaction Code Table
Move In Transaction Codes
000 ............... No payment received
010 ............... Cash payment
020 ............... Check payment
030 ............... Credit card payment
040 ............... Combination payment or move-in transaction for complimentary unit
050 ............... Payment by miscellaneous credit (no monies received)
099 ............... Install Customer - generated by the Startup program
Move Out Transaction Codes
100 ............... No payment received
110 ............... Cash Payment
120 ............... Check Payment
130 ............... Credit Card payment
140 ............... Combination Payment
150 ............... Move Out Zero Balance
160 ............... Move Out Refund
Transfer Transaction Codes
200 ............... No payment received
210 ............... Cash payment
220 ............... Check payment
230 ............... Credit card payment
240 ............... Combination payment
260 ............... Transfer Refund
Pre-Lease Transaction Codes
300 ............... No payment received
301 ............... Pre-lease forfeit
310 ............... Cash payment
320 ............... Check payment
330 ............... Credit card payment
334 ............... Online pre-lease
340 ............... Combination payment
Charges to Account Transaction Codes
400 ............... Charge for rent, monthly charges, tax and insurance
401 ............... Charge 1st late fee
402 ............... Charge 2nd late fee
403 ............... Charge 3rd late fee
404 ............... Charge 4th late fee
405 ............... Charge 5th late fee
406 ............... Returned check posted
Appendices
Appendix C - Transaction Code Table • 211
E-Mailed Notice Transaction Codes
541................ Reminder #1
542................ Reminder #2
543................ Reminder #3
544................ Reminder #4
545................ Reminder #5
55A ............... Special mailing...second contact
55B ............... Welcome Letter...second contact
55C ............... Returned check notice...second contact
550................ Billing notice...second contact
551................ Late notice #1...second contact
552................ Late notice #2...second contact
553................ Late notice #3...second contact
554................ Late notice #4...second contact
555................ Late notice #5...second contact
556................ Pre-Lease forfeiture notice...second contact
557................ Rate change notice...second contact
558................ Pre-lien notice...second contact
56A ............... Special mailing
56B ............... Welcome letter
56C ............... Returned check notice
56D ............... Partial payment notice
56E ............... Notice of pending insurance cancellation due to non-payment of premium
56F ............... Thanks letter
559................ Final lien notice...second contact
560................ Billing
561................ Late notice #1
562................ Late notice #2
563................ Late notice #3
564................ Late notice #4
565................ Late notice #5
566................ Pre-lease forfeiture notice
567................ Rate change notice
568................ Pre-lien notice
569................ Final lien notice
212 • Appendix C - Transaction Code Table
Appendices
Printed Notice Transaction Codes
571 ............... Reminder #1
572 ............... Reminder #2
573 ............... Reminder #3
574 ............... Reminder #4
575 ............... Reminder #5
58A ............... Special mailing...second contact
58B ............... Welcome Letter...second contact
58C............... Returned check notice...second contact
580 ............... Billing notice...second contact
581 ............... Late notice #1...second contact
582 ............... Late notice #2...second contact
583 ............... Late notice #3...second contact
584 ............... Late notice #4...second contact
585 ............... Late notice #5...second contact
586 ............... Pre-Lease forfeiture notice...second contact
587 ............... Rate change notice...second contact
588 ............... Pre-lien notice...second contact
59A ............... Special mailing
59B ............... Welcome letter
59C............... Returned check notice
59D............... Partial payment notice
59E ............... Notice of pending insurance cancellation due to non-payment of premium
59F ............... Thanks letter
589 ............... Final lien notice...second contact
590 ............... Billing
591 ............... Late notice #1
592 ............... Late notice #2
593 ............... Late notice #3
594 ............... Late notice #4
595 ............... Late notice #5
596 ............... Pre-lease forfeiture notice
597 ............... Rate change notice
598 ............... Pre-lien notice
599 ............... Final lien notice
Changes to Account Transaction Codes
60A ............... View/Edit rate change
60B ............... Change tenant passcode
60C............... Rate change by Daily Charger
60D............... Insurance policy forfeit pending due to non-payment (created by Daily Charger)
60E ............... Unit overlocked by Daily Charger
60F ............... Unit unlocked by system (usually from a delinquent tenant paying in full)
600 ............... Adding a charge
601 ............... Dropping a charge
602 ............... Unit overlocked by operator
603 ............... Unlocking a unit
604 ............... Due day change
Appendices
Appendix C - Transaction Code Table • 213
Changes to Account Transaction Codes Continued
605................ Status Change
606................ Insurance policy canceled by closer for non-payment of premium
607................ Add insurance
608................ Change insurance
609................ Insurance policy canceled by operator
666................ Canceled transaction
676................ Canceled transaction pointer
677................ Modified transaction pointer
680................ Editor change
Lien Process Transactions
700................ Initiate lien process or change in lien charge amounts (manual lien process)
701................ Automatic lien process (generated by Daily Charger)
703................ Lien completed (no payment)
713................ Lien completed, paid by cash
723................ Lien completed, paid by check
733................ Lien completed, paid by credit card
743................ Lien completed, paid by combination
Payments
800................ Charge to account
810................ Cash payment
815* .............. Multiple unit payment, primary transaction, paid by cash
820................ Check payment
821................ Autobill transaction
825* .............. Multiple unit payment, primary transaction, paid by check
830................ Credit card payment
831................ Autobill payment (generated by Daily Charger)
832................ Autobill payment failure due to expired credit card
833................ Autobill payment failure due to denial by credit card company
834................ Online transaction.
835* .............. Multiple unit payment, primary transaction, paid by credit card
836................ Online payment failure
840................ Combination payment
845* .............. Multiple unit payment, primary transaction, paid by combination
850................ Credit used for entire payment (no payment received)
860................ Refund paid by cash
870................ Refund paid by check
880................ Refund paid by credit card
890* .............. Multiple unit payment, secondary transaction
Operations
900................ Successful Backup
901................ Successful Restore
* Denotes transaction codes no longer used as of WinSen version 3.10 rev. 30 and above.
214 • Appendix C - Transaction Code Table
Appendices
Appendix D – Unit Status Codes
The system uses the following Unit Status Codes to designate the status of units. These codes appear
on various reports and tenant forms in the “Unit Status” field.
Appendices
•
A0 – Access only unit. The unit is not an actual physical unit; it is used only for access to
the facility by entities such as the fire or police departments, garbage collection truck, etc.
•
C0 – Complimentary unit.
•
E0 – Vacant unit.
•
R0 – Rented unit.
•
P0 – Preleased unit.
•
U0 – Unrentable unit.
•
D1 to D5 – Delinquent, but not overlocked unit. The numbers 1 to 5 indicate what phase of
the late cycle process the tenant is in. For example, the number 1 indicates the first phase of
the late cycle process, e.g., the tenant has been charged the first late fee.
•
O1 to O5 - Delinquent, overlocked unit. The numbers 1 to 5 indicate the late cycle phase as
described above.
•
L0 – Lien status unit.
•
L1 – The lien on the unit has been completed, but the tenant was not retained. The system
will vacate the unit during the daily close.
•
L2 – The lien on the unit has been completed, and the tenant was retained. The system will
put this unit back to status “R0” during the daily close.
Appendix D – Unit Status Codes • 215
Appendix E - Gatetest Program
The Gatetest program is used to configure and test the interface between WinSen Property Manager
and your access control system. To run the Gatetest program:
1. Select the Windows “run” option from the Start button.
2. You will be asked for the “Command line”. Type in c:\WinSen\gatetest then click OK.
The following form will be displayed:
Action
From the drop down list, select the interface action to be performed. The choices are:
•
Assign Tenant - performs a move-in transaction.
•
Moveout Tenant - performs a move-out transaction.
•
Change Passcode - performs a change passcode transaction.
•
Lockout Tenant - performs a lockout transaction.
•
Re-admit Tenant - performs a re-admit transaction.
•
Test Function - tests the interface. This function is not supported by all gate systems.
Gate Interface
Select the desired gate interface from the drop down list.
216 • Appendix E - Gatetest Program
Appendices
Parameters
This field is used to enter the communication parameters when your access control system is
connected to the computer through a COM port. The program will ignore this field if interfacing to
WinSen Sentinel.
The currently configured communications parameters will be shown. In the example above they are:
COM2:9600, N, 8, 1
This means the access control system is connected to COM2 on the computer, the baud rate is 9600,
there is no parity checking, there are 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. Consult the documentation for your
access control system for the proper parameters.
Unit Number, Passcode & Card Number
Enter the unit number, passcode, and card number to be transmitted to the access control system.
Note that this information defaults to the values shown in the example, but you can change it if
desired.
Time Zone & Access Level
Enter the time zone and access level to be transmitted to the access control system. The program
defaults to “0” for both but you can change these if desired.
Use DDE
This checkbox is only visible when the Gate Interface is set to Winsen Sentinel or Winsen Sentinel
(passcode only keypads).
If this checkbox is unchecked, Winsen will use COM/DCOM (“Component Object Model” or
“Distributed Component Object Model”) to interface with Winsen Sentinel. Otherwise, it will use
DDE/NetDDE (“Dynamic Data Exchange” or “Network Dynamic Data Exchange”) to interface.
DDE/NetDDE is an older technology but is still supported for sites that wish to use it, or are running
older operating systems. COM/DCOM is the recommended method for PC’s running Windows
2000 or later (the box is unchecked).
For instructions on how to setup DCOM or NetDDE to allow Winsen Property Manager or Sentinel
to interface with Sentinel over a network, see the following section, “Appendix F – Network
Interface Setup”.
Computer Name, DDE Link Field
These fields are displayed only if you have the network version of WinSen Property Manager.
These two fields are used when WinSen Property Manager is interfacing to WinSen Sentinel over a
LAN (Local Area Network). To successfully link from WinSen Property Manager on one
workstation to WinSen Sentinel on another, you must enter the Computer Name where WinSen
Sentinel is running. For operating systems prior to Windows 2000, the Computer name is found in
the Windows Control Panel|Network dialog. For later systems, it is found on the Network
Identification or Computer Name tab in the properties for My Computer.
The DDE Link Field does not need to be filled in. When you transmit a test transaction to WinSen
Sentinel as explained in the next section, this field will show the data sent to, then returned by the
program.
Appendices
Appendix E - Gatetest Program • 217
Customer Information Fields
These fields contain information relating to the sample customer for testing purposes. The
information is used only with certain systems. If desired, you can edit the information if you select
an access control system from the Gate Interface field that uses it.
Transmit Button
Click the Transmit button to test the interface. The program will attempt to interface to the
currently selected gate system with the options you have chosen. If an error is encountered it will
display an error message as appropriate.
Close Button
After successfully configuring your gate interface, click the Close button to save your changes and
exit from the Gatetest program.
218 • Appendix E - Gatetest Program
Appendices
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup
Note: You must have the network version of WinSen Property Manager to enable network
functionality. Call Sentinel Systems for more information.
Winsen Property Manager and Sentinel can interface over a network with Winsen Sentinel running
on a different machine. This is done using either DCOM (the “Distributed Component Object
Model”), or NetDDE (“Network Dynamic Data Exchange”). NetDDE is an older technology but is
still supported for sites that wish to use it, or are running older operating systems. DCOM is the
recommended method for PC’s running Windows 2000 or later.
This section explains how to configure the two interface methods.
DCOM Setup
Note: Winsen version 3.10 or later must be installed to use DCOM for the interface method.
On the machine that is controlling the access control system:
Windows XP
1. Ensure that you are logged on to the PC with administrative privileges.
2. From the Start menu, select the “Run” option. Then type in “dcomcnfg” (do not include the
quotes) and click OK or press Enter. The Component Services dialog will be displayed:
3. In the right hand pane, double click Component Services, then Computers. Right click on My
Computer and choose Properties to display the My Computer Properties dialog:
Appendices
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup • 219
4. Click on the Default Properties tab and ensure that the options are setup as shown above.
5. Click on the COM Security tab and adjust the security settings as explained below.
220 • Appendix F – Network Interface Setup
Appendices
6. For Access Permissions, click the Edit Limits button, if present. The Access Permission dialog
will be displayed. If not already present, add Authenticated Users and grant Local and Remote
Access. Then click the Edit Default button and repeat the procedure.
7. For Launch and Activation Permissions, click the Edit Limits button, if present. The Launch
Permission dialog will be displayed. If not already present, add Authenticated Users and grant
Local and Remote Launch, as well as Local and Remote Activation. Then click the Edit
Default button and repeat the procedure.
8. Click OK to close My Computer Properties.
9. In the right hand pane of Component Services, double click on My Computer, then DCOM
Config, then scroll to the Sentinel.PSInterface entry:
Appendices
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup • 221
10. Right click on the Sentinel.PSInterface entry, then select Properties from the context menu.
11. Click on the Identity tab, and select The interactive user as shown:
12. Click OK to save your changes and return to Component Services. Then close Component
Services.
222 • Appendix F – Network Interface Setup
Appendices
Windows 2000
1. Ensure that you are logged on to the PC with administrative privileges.
2. From the Start menu, select the “Run” option. Then type in “dcomcnfg” (do not include the
quotes) and click OK or press Enter. The Distributed COM Configuration Properties dialog
will be displayed:
3. Click on the Default Properties tab and ensure that the options are setup as shown above.
4. Click on the Default Security tab and adjust the permissions as explained below.
Appendices
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup • 223
5. For Default Access Permissions, click the Edit Default button. The Registry Value
Permission dialog will be displayed. If not already present, add Domain Users and allow
access.
6. Repeat the procedure in step 5 for Default Launch Permissions.
7. Click the Applications tab, then scroll down to the Sentinel.PSInterface entry. Then click the
Properties button to display the Sentinel.PSInterface Properties dialog. Then click on the
Identity tab, and select The interactive user as shown:
224 • Appendix F – Network Interface Setup
Appendices
8. Click OK to close the Sentinel.PSInterface Properties dialog and return to the Distributed
COM Configuration Properties dialog. Then click OK to close it.
Network Setup Procedure
1. Install WinSen on all applicable workstations. When installing on a workstation, make sure
it is installed to the network drive. On the file server for a peer-to-peer network, it is
installed to the local hard drive.
2. Run WinSen Sentinel on the target workstation. This will be the workstation that is hooked
up to the access control/alarm system.
3. On the source workstation(s), run the gatetest program. Set the interface to WinSen
Sentinel. Ensure the “use DDE” checkbox is not checked. In the Computer Name field,
enter the name of the workstation where WinSen Sentinel is running. The name cannot
contain spaces.
4. Try a test transmission to verify that the interface works.
NetDDE Setup
On the machine that is controlling the access control system:
The NETDDE program or service, depending on the operating system, must be running on both
computers. If you are running Windows 98 and are interfacing over a network, you must place a
shortcut to “NETDDE.EXE” in your “Startup” folder.
Appendices
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup • 225
For Windows NT, 2000, XP, or 2003 Server, the NetDDE service should be setup to run
automatically. This is found in Control Panel|Administrative Tools|Services. Click on Network
DDE, start the service if it is stopped, and ensure that it is set to run automatically at startup.
DDE Share Setup
If the computer that Winsen Sentinel is running on has Windows NT, 2000, XP, or 2003 Server, it is
necessary to setup a trusted DDE share to allow interfacing over the network as follows:
1. Go to the Start menu and select the Run option.
2. Type DDEShare and click OK.
3. The DDEShare dialog will be displayed. Choose the DDE Shares option from the Shares
menu to display the following form:
4. If the WinsenSentinel$ share is not present, click the Add a Share button. If it is present
click on it, then click the Properties button. The DDE Share Properties dialog will appear
and should be filled out as shown:
226 • Appendix F – Network Interface Setup
Appendices
5. Next, click the Permissions button to display the permissions dialog. Then highlight
Everyone and ensure that “full control” is selected in Type of Access as shown:
6. Click OK to close the DDE Share Name Permissions dialog and return to the DDE Shares
Properties dialog. Then click OK to close the DDE Share Properties dialog and return to
the DDE Shares dialog. Then, ensure the WinsenSentinel$ share is selected, and click the
Trust Share button to display the Trusted Shares Properties dialog. Fill it out as shown:
Appendices
Appendix F – Network Interface Setup • 227
7. Click OK when finished. This completes the DDE Share setup procedure.
Network Setup Procedure
1. Ensure that NetBIOS is enabled on all workstations. NETBIOS is built into Microsoft
TCP/IP and NETBEUI, but has to be specifically enabled if you are using the IPX/SPX
protocol.
2. Ensure that all workstations are running NETDDE as described above.
3. Install WinSen on all applicable workstations. When installing on a workstation, make sure
it is installed to the network drive. On the file server for a peer-to-peer network, it is
installed to the local hard drive.
4. Run WinSen Sentinel on the target workstation. This will be the workstation that is hooked
up to the access control/alarm system.
5. On the source workstation(s), run the gatetest program. Set the interface to WinSen
Sentinel. Ensure that the “use DDE” checkbox is checked. In the Computer Name field,
enter the name of the workstation where WinSen Sentinel is running. The name cannot
contain spaces.
6. Try a test transmission to verify that the interface works. Note: the Microsoft Hearts game
uses a similar NetDDE connection; if you can get MSHearts to work, the network interface
to WinSen Sentinel should also function correctly.
228 • Appendix F – Network Interface Setup
Appendices
Appendix G – The Timezone.txt File
The “timezone.txt” file is normally found in the \WinSen folder (or whatever folder you installed
WinSen into), and contains the time zones and the access levels used by WinSen when a non-SSC
gate system is in use. By editing the file with a text editor (such as notepad), you can add or remove
time zones and access levels, and change their descriptions. This section explains the format of the
timezone.txt file so that you can modify it as required for your facility.
The default timezone.txt file is shown below:
4
Normal Hours;0
24 Hour Access;1
TimeZone #2;2
TimeZone #3;3
4
Normal Access;0
Complete Access;1
Access Level #2;2
Access Level #3;3
The data format is as follows:
The first line contains the number of time zones defined. In the example, there are 4 time zones,
which mean that the next four entries are the time zone definitions. Each time zone definition
contains the description of the time zone, followed by the time zone number, separated by a semicolon (;). Thus, in the above example, time zone 1 is called “24 Hour Access” in WinSen.
The line immediately following the time zone definitions is the number of access levels. In the
example, it is 4, meaning that the next 4 lines are to be treated as access level definitions. Each
access level definition contains the description of the access level, followed by the access level
number, separated by a semi-colon (;). Thus, in the above example, access level 1 is called
“Complete Access” in WinSen.
To modify the entries, make the appropriate changes to match your gate system, and then save the
file. For example, if time zone 1 is defined in the gate system as “normal hours”, merely change the
description for time zone 1. Be sure to keep the semi-colon separator. If you do not need all four
time zones or access levels, delete the unneeded entries and change the appropriate number. For
example, if you need only 2 time zones, delete the lines containing the 3rd and 4th time zone entries,
and then change the number on line #1 to say 2 instead of 4. You can insert extra time zones or
access levels if need be, as long as you change the “number of time zones” or “number of access
levels” lines appropriately.
Here is an example of a timezone.txt file that has been modified to show 2 time zones and 1 access
level:
2
Normal Hours;0
24 Hour Access;1
1
Complete Access;0
Appendices
Appendix G – The Timezone.txt File • 229
Appendix H – Initialization File Variables
This section is for system administrators and advanced users only.
WinSen Property Manager has a number of options that can only be changed by editing the
winsen.ini file. The winsen.ini file is normally located in your C:\Windows directory (C:\Winnt for
Windows NT users). The file will contain a number of sections, denoted by []. For example, the
section used by WinSen Property Manager to store most of its settings is the [Manager] section.
Within the sections are variable names followed by an equals sign, then the value of the variable.
For example, the entry InstallDir=C:\WINSEN means the variable called InstallDir has a value of
“C:\WINSEN”.
The following table lists options supported by WinSen that cannot be changed through normal
program operation. They are found in the designated section of winsen.ini. If a given variable is not
present, add it to the given section with the desired value. Before changing anything in this file, be
sure you have a backup copy of it, in case of problems. Do not change any variable not listed in this
table. For a change to take effect, close WinSen and reopen it.
Section Variable
Value
Comments
[Manager]
30DayProrate
Any value. “True” is
suggested.
If present, WinSen will always use a 30 day month for
figuring the daily unit rate during prorate calculations.
Otherwise, the number of days in the month is used.
[Manager]
Backup
Name of program used to
perform database backups.
If set, WinSen will use this program to do backups.
Otherwise the built-in backup procedure is used.
[Sentinel]
ComputerNamen
Name of computer running
WinSen Sentinel for a
specific site.
Applies to network multi-site (EM) version only and only
necessary if you have multiple copies of WinSen Sentinel
each controlling a different site. n should be equal to the site
number for the workstation computer running WinSen
Sentinel for that site. For example:
ComputerName1=Server1 means when a transaction
occurs on site #1, communicate the change to WinSen
Sentinel running on the computer named Server1.
[Sentinel]
ConfigSounds
Any valid program name
When set, the system will use this program to configure the
system sounds. Otherwise the standard control panel applets
are used.
[Manager]
Langn
Name of language, e.g.,
“English”, “Spanish”, etc.
n = language number. For example, Lang0=English means
the first language defined is English. Lang1=Spanish
denotes that the second language defined is Spanish. Use as
many entries as are required to make the complete language
list.
[ICVerify]
RequestDir
Name of folder to create
request files for ICVerify
credit card processing.
It is normally unnecessary to set this variable. If not set,
WinSen will use its installation folder for the request file. If
set, it should be the same value as the “Request Directory”
setting in the ICVerify software.
[Manager]
Restore
Name of program used to
perform database restores.
If set, WinSen will use this program to do restores.
Otherwise the built-in restore procedure is used.
[ICVerify]
Station
The “station number” of this
computer. Used by the
network version of ICVerify
to identify the workstation
submitting the request.
If not set, station 001 is assumed.
230 • Appendix H – Initialization File Variables
Appendices
[Manager]
ErrorLogPath
Location of error log file
(Errorlog.txt)
Normally Winsen will use the Winsen installation folder for
this file. This value can be used to change the location of
this file if desired.
[Manager]
ReportDBDriver
DAO or ADO
Can be used to cause reports to be printed using either DAO
(Data Access Objects, an older data access technology) or
ADO (Activex Data Objects). The default is ADO but if
ADO is not working correctly this setting can be used to
change to DAO.
[Manager]
ACHProgram
Name of program to launch
when ACH transactions
occur.
Appendices
Appendix H – Initialization File Variables • 231
Appendix I – Adding Reports to the Report Menu
This section is for system administrators and advanced users only.
This appendix explains how to add customized reports to the WinSen report menu. It involves
adding entries to the [Reports] section of the Winsen.ini file. The winsen.ini file is normally located
in your C:\Windows directory (C:\Winnt for Windows NT users). The file will contain a number of
sections, denoted by []. The section used by WinSen Property Manager to store the report
definitions is the [Reports] section. This section contains separators that appear in the report menu,
e.g., “financial reports”, “tenant reports”, and so on. Within these separators will be a number of
lines in the format
Report File Name=Report Description
For example, the entry MTDBank=Bank Deposit Log (MTD) in the “Financial Reports” separator
means that the file called “MTDBank.rpt” (the .rpt extension is assumed and will be appended if it is
not present) will be used to print the MTD Bank Deposit Log.
To add a customized report to the report menu, find the place in the list of reports where you wish
the report to appear. Then insert a line in the above format. For example, let’s suppose you have a
custom delinquency status report and the filename is “overdue2.rpt”. We wish to add this report
immediately above the standard delinquency status report. We open the Winsen.ini file in a text
editor such as notepad, and then use the find feature to find the line that says “delinquency”. Within
the “Management Reports” separator, Notepad finds a line that says:
OverDue=Delinquency Status Report
This is the standard delinquency report definition. To add our custom report, insert a line that says
OverDue2=Customized Delinquency Status Report
immediately above the standard delinquency status report entry. The description can be whatever
you want. The next time you open the report menu, your customized report should appear in the list.
232 • Appendix I – Adding Reports to the Report Menu
Appendices
Appendix J – Using WinSen with ICVerify
This section explains how WinSen interfaces with ICVerify and what to check if the interface does
not work correctly.
WinSen v2.70 and greater, now allows the first address field and the zip code field to be included in
the processing of the purchase. This allows the WinSen user to get a better rate from the credit card
processor.
WinSen v2.00 and higher has the ability to interface with ICVerify to obtain credit card authorization
numbers. Before proceeding, make sure that ICVerify is installed and that it has been configured
properly.
Tips for Using WinSen with ICVerify
1. Install and setup ICVerify so that it can process test transactions successfully. Installation
and setup questions should be directed to ICVerify technical support and/or your credit card
provider as required.
2. Make sure the “request directory” in the ICVerify multiuser program is the same folder
where WinSen is installed. In most cases this will be C:\Winsen.
3. Use “/O” in the initialization string in the ICVerify multiuser program. This tells ICVerify
to return answers in a “short format”, which is what WinSen is expecting.
4. Create a shortcut to the ICVerify multi user program and place it into the start up folder.
Use the /a command line switch (auto initialize) and set the window to run minimized. This
will cause the program to run automatically upon boot.
5. If you have the multi-user version of ICVerify, make sure it is configured and running
properly before ICVerify is configured as a remote station, otherwise ICVerify may hang.
6. Before attempting to use ICVerify through WinSen, process test transactions with the
ICVerify main program to be sure that ICVerify is working correctly.
7. Verify that ICVerify is selected in the POS Software settings in the POS Processing
Configuration screen.
8. ICVerify will not share a modem with fax or remote control software such as WinFax or
PCAnywhere, or answering machine software.
9. If the card reader is purchased, be aware that the keyboard interface version comes with
IBM-AT type keyboard connectors. Since most new computers use the PS-2 style keyboard
connectors, it may be necessary to purchase a PS2 to AT adapter and an AT to PS2 adapter.
10. If you are using the card reader, place the cursor on the credit card number field (in the Paid
By window, Assign Tenant form, or View/Edit forms), then scan the card. WinSen will fill
in the credit card type, number, and expiration date automatically.
11. If you are using the single user version of ICVerify, do not process transactions through
ICVerify at the same time as processing a transaction through WinSen.
12. Be sure to have the tenants address filled in as WinSen looks for that information for AVS.
Supported Card Readers
WinSen supports the “Dual Track Keyboard Card Reader”. The ICVerify part number for this card
reader is 140. The serial port interface card reader (ICVerify part number 141) is not supported.
Appendices
Appendix J – Using WinSen with ICVerify • 233
Troubleshooting
1. Make sure that ICVerify is configured properly and will process test transactions. Setup
questions should be referred to ICVerify support.
2. Make sure that the ICVerify option has been enabled in Site Setup (General tab).
3. Make sure that the ICVerify Multi User program is running.
4. Make sure that WinSen and ICVerify are using the same directory for the request files.
Details of the Interface
The interface to ICVerify is outlined below:
1. WinSen creates a request file (normally icver001.req) and waits for the answer file.
2. ICVerify detects the request file and processes the information.
3. After obtaining a response from the credit card processor, ICVerify creates an answer file
(normally icver001.ans).
4. WinSen reads the answer file and continues based on whether the transaction was approved
or denied.
234 • Appendix J – Using WinSen with ICVerify
Appendices
Appendix K – Using WinSen with PCCharge
This section explains how WinSen interfaces with PCCharge and what to check if the interface does
not work correctly.
Before proceeding, make sure that PCCharge is installed and that it has been configured properly.
Tips for Using WinSen with PCCharge
1. Install and setup PCCharge so that it can process test transactions successfully. Installation
and setup questions should be directed to PCCharge technical support and/or your credit card
provider as required.
2. Make sure the “Request Folder” in the POS Processing Configuration screen is the same
folder where PCCharge is installed. In most cases this will be C:\Program
Files\PCCharge.
3. Before attempting to use PCCharge through WinSen, process test transactions with the
PCCharge main program to be sure that PCCharge is working correctly.
4. Verify that PCCharge is selected in the POS Software settings in the POS Processing
Configuration screen.
5. If the card reader is purchased, be aware that the keyboard interface version may come with
IBM-AT type keyboard connectors. Since most new computers use the PS-2 style keyboard
connectors, it may be necessary to purchase a PS2 to AT adapter and an AT to PS2 adapter.
6. If you are using the card reader, place the cursor on the credit card number field (in the Paid
By window, Assign Tenant form, or View/Edit forms), then scan the card. WinSen will fill
in the credit card type, number, and expiration date automatically.
7. Do not process transactions through PCCharge at the same time as processing a transaction
through WinSen.
8. Be sure to have the tenants address filled in as WinSen looks for that information for AVS.
Supported Card Readers
WinSen supports the “Dual Track Keyboard Card Reader”.
Appendices
Appendix K – Using WinSen with PCCharge • 235
Appendix M - WinSen Lite Reports Listing
Following is a list of reports available in WinSen Lite. Refer to the Report & Graphs chapter for
complete report descriptions.
♦ Financial Reports
¾ Operating Income and Rental Analysis
¾ Proof Edit Report
♦ Tenant Reports
¾ Insured Tenant Report
¾ Tenant Status Report
♦ Management Reports
¾ Aged Receivables
¾ Current Bad Check Report
¾ Delinquency Status Report
¾ Lien List
¾ Month to Date Insurance Report
¾ Month to Date Rental Activity
¾ MTD Editor Change Report – by Date
¾ MTD Editor Change Report – by Unit
¾ Unit Listing Report
¾ Vacancy Report
236 • Appendix M - WinSen Lite Reports Listing
Appendices
Appendix N – Editing Microsoft Word Documents
1. We strongly suggest making backup copies of letters prior to editing.
2. Use Windows Explorer to find the Document template to be edited. The default location is
c:\winsen folder. I.E. C:\WINSEN\GENERIC.DOT.
3. Right click on the file with the DOT file extension and select Rename to change the files
extension to “.DOC”. This will allow the document to be opened in Microsoft for editing.
4. The document can now be opened in MS Word for editing by double clicking on the new file
name created.
5. Make changes as desired. Fields in square brackets “[]” are auto-populated by WinSen. The
field names must remain unchanged. These fields can be moved anywhere or removed from
the document. All other text in the document may be edited at this time. Save the document
in its current location.
6. Use Windows Explorer to rename the document back to its original file extension I.E.
C:\WINSEN\GENERIC.DOT.
7. At this time all changes will be permanent and in use by the system.
Appendices
Appendix N – Editing Microsoft Word Documents • 237
Appendix O – WinSen Passcodes / Maximum Digits
Interface Selection
None
Property Sentinel
Remote Sentinel
Remote Keypads/Card readers
Remote PS3
WinSen Sentinel
WinSen Sentinel (Passcode only
keypads)
WinSen RSCM
Universal Interface
Wham - Apple
Wham - PC
Old PTI Falcon
PTI Falcon
Remote PTI Falcon
Touchcode
Digigate 102
Digigate 700
Digigate 700 (Long Passcodes)
Remote Digigate
Demco
238 • Appendix O – WinSen Passcodes / Maximum Digits
(Range) Maximum Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-65535) 4 or 5 Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-99999999) 8 Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-99999999) 8 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-2147483647) 9 or 10 Digits
(0-9999) 4 Digits
Appendices
Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with
WinSen
Installing the ScanShell 800
Start by closing all open programs.
Plug the USB interface cable into the USB port on the computer.
After the Add new hardware wizard dialog box appears, click next until you are asked to set the
driver for the scanner. You’ll find the driver on the installation CD that came with the scanner.
After you specify the driver click Next until the installation is complete.
Driver’s License Scanner Options
The screen below shows the options for the ScanShell 800 scanner. This screen can be accessed in
three ways: using the Scanner Options button on the Other tab in Site Setup, or by right clicking on
the Scan button in Assign Tenant or the View/Edit Tenant – Form.
To enable the driver’s license scanner option, you must be licensed for it. If you are not currently
licensed for it, please call Sentinel Systems for a new license key.
Appendices
Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen • 239
Scan Automatically
When this box is checked, the scanner will start scanning automatically when any type of card or
document is placed into the scanner. If the box is unchecked, the scanner starts scanning when you
click on the scan button that is displayed on the appropriate screen when performing the actual scan.
When this setting is not checked, be sure to place the item to be scanned in the scanner before
clicking the scan button.
Calibrate
Before the scanner is used for the first time, it should be calibrated. Further, it is recommended to
calibrate the scanner from time to time to maintain good scan quality. To calibrate the scanner click
the Calibrate button. You will be prompted to insert the calibration paper (supplied with the
scanner) into the scanner. Insert the calibration paper and click OK. It may take a few seconds to
complete the calibration procedure.
Clean
This button is used to clean the scanner. It is recommended to clean the scanner from time to time to
maintain good scan quality. To clean the scanner click the Clean button. You will be prompted to
240 • Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen
Appendices
insert the cleaning paper (supplied with the scanner) into the scanner. Insert the cleaning sheet, then
click OK. The sheet will be fed back and forth through the scanner a few times, cleaning the scanner
lens. Optionally you may want to put a few drops of alcohol on the cleaning paper for better results.
It may take a few seconds to complete the cleaning procedure.
Autodetect State
When this box is checked, the scanner OCR software will attempt to identify which State the driver’s
license that is being scanned is from. When this box is unchecked, the Country and State will have
to be manually set. This option is preferred because if the State is not recognized for some reason
(dirty, torn, distorted, etc.) you’ll have to repeat the process. You can select the Country and State
from the dropdown list.
Use OCR
With this option set, the scanner software will attempt to read the text on the driver’s license and
populate the tenant information fields. In this mode you can select to have an entire image of the
driver’s license added to the picture file of the unit within WinSen, just the face image on the
driver’s license, both, or none. Place a check mark in the box next to the preferred options.
Use 2D Barcode
The scanner has the ability to read a 2D barcode on a driver’s license when this option is checked.
Not all State driver’s licenses have 2D barcodes. The scanner can be set to use OCR or 2D barcode.
Populate Assign Tenant/View Edit Fields
These two checkboxes allow you to designate if the name, address, and other information read from
the scanned license should be transferred to the appropriate screen or not. If the option is checked,
then the data will be copied to the appropriate fields on the designated screen. For example, you
might not want the name & address fields changed if you are in the View/Edit screen and scan a
driver’s license; in this case you would uncheck the Populate View/Edit Fields checkbox.
Include middle name
If this option is checked, Winsen will include the middle name (if present) from the driver’s license.
Put last name first, then use the following character to delimit it:
This choice allows the name from the driver’s license to be entered on the form as: last name ~ first
name, which is the recommend format for WinSen.
Data Format
This option allows you to select whether the information from the driver’s license scanned into
WinSen is all upper case, lower case, proper case or none.
Scanner Test
This screen allows you to scan a driver’s license and will display the scanned information and
picture image on the test screen. This test allows you to check and test the operation of the scanner
without actually scanning information into a unit record in WinSen.
Appendices
Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen • 241
Updating the ID scanner driver files
The manufacturer of the drivers license scanner, Card Scanning Solutions frequently updates the
device drivers for the Drivers License scanner. These file updates can be obtained from over the
internet, by closing the WinSen program and running the program called IDScanUpdate.exe which
can be found in the WinSen installation directory. To use it, you must first input your email address
and the license key from the ScanShell 800 box into the Registration screen, and you must have an
active internet connection. After registering with your email address and ScanShell 800 license key
you then can check for and download updated files.
242 • Appendix P – ScanShell 800 - Setup & Operation with WinSen
Appendices
Appendix Q – WinSen MapPoint Interface
Introduction
Microsoft® MapPoint® is business mapping software that combines powerful mapping and analysis
tools with the simplicity of Microsoft Office. Designed for everyday business use, MapPoint allows
users to easily locate and illustrate points on maps, integrate maps into Microsoft Office documents,
and quickly identify business trends on a map, with either the user’s own data or up-to-date, detailed
demographic information.
The WinSen MapPoint® Interface allows you to export customers name and address to a Microsoft
MapPoint map. This interface has the ability to export current customers or all customers to a map
displaying pushpins with the customers name and address. A pushpin can be selected to display
customer information such as name address and unit number.
System Requirements
In addition to the minimum system requirements required by WinSen the following is also required.
410 MB of available hard disk space (1.02 gigabytes for full configuration)
Users without Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, or Office 2000 Service Release 1 (SR-1)
require an extra 50 MB of hard disk space for System Files Update
Licensing
Microsoft® MapPoint® is a licensed Microsoft® Product and may require activation by the
Microsoft Corporation. To use this product you must agree to the terms included in the package
your software was received in.
The WinSen MapPoint® interface is created and distributed by Sentinel Systems. It is licensed as an
option of the WinSen program. To use the program a valid license key must be issued by Sentinel
Systems. Please contact your sales representative for additional information. Prior to licensing, the
interface will run in a demonstration mode displaying an image of a map with customer data.
Installation
The interface is installed from the WinSen setup program by selecting WinSen MapPoint interface
from the setup menu. A “WinSen MapPoint Interface” menu item will be added to the Special Menu
of the WinSen Property Manager. After the installation is complete you can install the Microsoft®
MapPoint® software. To install Microsoft® MapPoint® insert the MapPoint® CD and follow the
on screen instructions.
Operation
To export Customer Data to the WinSen MapPoint® interface, select WinSen MapPoint Interface
from the WinSen Special Menu.
Appendices
Appendix Q – WinSen MapPoint Interface • 243
Microsoft® MapPoint will be opened displaying current customers.
Viewing
To toggle viewing between Current Tenants and All Tenants select All Customers from the View
menu. Microsoft® MapPoint determines the best view based on the addresses of all customers
currently in WinSen. A site pin will be displayed for each site listed in the Site Information, Site
Setup section of WinSen. Using options in MapPoint the view can be adjusted as needed.
Toolbars
Toolbars available for editing the map can be selected via the toolbars selection of the View menu.
Radius Rings
Parameters for radius rings can be set using the Options selection of the View menu. The Radius is
set in miles and ring rotation is set in degrees.
244 • Appendix Q – WinSen MapPoint Interface
Appendices
Printing
Selecting print from the File Menu will display the print dialog allowing selection of system printers
to print the current map displayed on the screen.
Saving
Selecting Save from the File Menu will save the current map displayed on the screen. Save As can
be used to select the destination file name and folder location the map is to be saved as.
Help
Selecting Contents from the help menu displays Helpful information for Using Microsoft®
MapPoint. Selecting About Displays Version information for the MapPoint Interface.
Appendices
Appendix Q – WinSen MapPoint Interface • 245
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Introduction
This service gives Self Storage facilities and their tenants the ability to view payment status, make
credit card payments, and prelease (reserve) units online.
This system consists of two major components.
1. The online component consists of web pages that can be accessed via any web browser.
This allows the facility to log in and view online info and tenants to log in, view payment
info, make payments and prelease units.
2. The WinSen interface which interfaces WinSen with the online functions. This synchronizes
the Online Payment / Prelease information with the data in the WinSen database.
Tenants can go directly to www.ministoragepayments.com to make payments or can be directed to
the Online Payment system by placing a link on the facilities web site. There is a unique URL
provided to support customization of the online payment and prelease web pages. The site can have
a unique logo displayed on all pages to give them the site’s look and feel. The unique URL must be
used to activate the Enroll button and allow tenants to enroll online. There is also a separate unique
url provided to prelease units online.
This service is provided by Sentinel Systems Corporation, please contact Sentinel Systems
Corporation for setup information and fees that may apply.
Online Payment / Prelease System
O
i
Storage Facility
WinSen transfers basic
payment info to the
Online Payment
System.
WinSen processes and
applies payments made
online.
WinSen updates
available sizes online.
Sentinel Systems
Provides secure website
and hosting of Online
Payment System.
Logs in using email
address and Sentinel
pass code.
Provide secure login for
site manager and
tenants.
Views last payment /
date due date / amount
due.
Tenants view payment
status and make
payments online.
Submits credit card
payment online.
Prelease Wizard
reserves units online.
246 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Tenant
Prints payment
confirmation page.
Appendices
Security
All internet communications are handled via SSL(128) bit Encryption. Users are ensured that they
are connected to a secure web site by connecting to an https web address which displays the
Verisign™ seal. In some browsers a padlock is displayed to reassure the user they are connected to a
secure web site. Only the last four digits of credit card numbers are displayed and for increased
security credit card numbers are encrypted and stored in a secure database.
Tenant Online Experience
Online Payment
Tenant Online Payment Flow of Events
Tenant is directed
to secure website
from facility web
site.
Login using email
address and pass
code.
View online
account
information.
Enter credit card
billing
information and
submit payment.
View and print
online payment
confirmation.
Logout and return to facilities website
Tenants of the storage facility have the ability to log into a secure web site using their personal email
address and pass code. These items are assigned to them at the time of move in. After they have
logged in they can view their most recent amount paid and when it was applied, the next amount due
and the next due date. This information is displayed for each unit the tenant occupies. Tenants
choosing to make an online payment click the Make a Payment button and are directed to the
payment page. This page allows the tenant to select the amount they wish to pay by either selecting
the number of months to pay or entering any other amount in the amount to pay field. This page
requires the tenant to enter a credit card number and valid billing information for the card. Once the
tenant clicks the Submit button they are directed to the confirmation page which can be printed for
their records. When the tenant is finished viewing the Confirmation page and clicks on the Logout
button they return to the facility’s web site.
If a tenant does not have a valid email address entered into WinSen they can submit one online by
clicking on the Enroll button and entering the required information. This information will be used to
update the tenants email address in the WinSen database.
Tenant payment information will be added to the tenant’s record in WinSen the next time the site
manager runs the WinSen Online interface.
Appendices
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service • 247
Online Prelease
Tenant Online Prelease Flow of Events
Tenant is directed
to secure website
from facility web
site.
Chose unit size.
and move in date
Provide contact
information
Enter Credit card
information
Print a
confirmation.
Logout and return to facilities website
Prospective tenants or anyone wishing to reserve a unit online has the ability go to the storage
facilities web site and be directed to www.ministoragepayments.com where they will be able to
complete the prelease wizard. The prelease wizard allows the prospective tenant to select a unit size,
provide address, contact information and pay a deposit with a credit card. After the prelease wizard
is completed the user is prompted to print the confirmation page and a notification is sent to the
facility manager. After the user completes this process they are returned to the facilities web site.
Manager Online Interface
Manager Login
At the www.Ministoragepayments.com Login page the manager can log in using their email address
and password. This email address and password can be changed at any time using the Site
Configuration page. When a valid login is entered they will be directed to the Configuration page.
Configuration
The Site Configuration page contains customizable information used to set up site specific details.
On this page information is grouped by Site Name and Address info, Credit Card Types and Login
Info. There is also an option for allowing partial payments. At the top there are buttons for viewing
online transaction history.
Site Info
This section contains the site contact information displayed on the tenant confirmation page that is
available for printing while a tenant is submitting a payment.
The Redirect Address field contains the web site address the tenant will be directed to after
completing a payment or any time the Logout button is clicked. This can be used to return the tenant
to your facility web site.
The Logo File contains the common image displayed at the top of all web pages. This is used to
brand the site to give it your customized look. The height of the image can be up to 150 Pixels and
the width can be set according to your needs. If the image exceeds these limits it will be resized for
a best fit to maintain the original aspect ratio. To upload a Logo File the following procedure is
provided.
1. Create a jpg, gif or other image using the image editor of your choice and save it on your
local hard drive.
248 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Appendices
2. Click the <Browse…> Button on the Site Info web page to browse for the file you created.
3. After the file is selected the file name and local path will appear in the Logo File field.
4. Click the <Upload> button to upload the new logo file. After the file transfer is complete
the new logo file will be in place.
Login Info
This section allows the manager to change and modify their login information. If the fields are left
blank, no changes will be made when saving site information. When changing login information the
manager is required to enter a valid email address and type the password two times to ensure
accuracy.
Credit Card Types Accepted
Placing the check in the box to the left of the card name causes the card type to be selectable by
tenants while they are making a payment. Only check the card types that your facility accepts.
Allow Partial Payments
Placing a check in the box to the left of Allow Partial Payments gives the tenant the ability to make a
partial payment. Removing the check forces tenants to select the number of months they wish to pay
and a rent is paid in full for the selected period.
View Customers
Displays a list of tenants currently uploaded to the system. Once a valid email address and pass code
are added to a tenant’s record they will be included in this list.
View Payments
Displays a list of the status’s of all payments that have been made online.
View Enrollments
Displays a list of tenant’s that have completed the online enrollment process.
View Preleases
Displays a list of tenant’s that have pre-leased units online.
Appendices
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service • 249
WinSen Online Manager Flow of Events
Directed to secure
website from
facility website
Login using email
address and pass code
View Site Configuration Page..
View list of
online tenants.
View list of
online
payments
View List of
online
enrollments
View List of
online
preleases
Logout and return to facility website.
WinSen Interface
The WinSen Online menu option has been added to the Utilities menu of the main WinSen menu
bar. Clicking on <WinSen Online> causes the interface to connect to the internet and update
customer and payment information. The following form is displayed during the update process. See
figure 1 for a description of items on this form.
250 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Appendices
Figure 1
Appendices
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service • 251
The following Diagram describes the features of the WinSen Online form.
252 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Appendices
Security Info
Web Service URL
The address on the internet that the program communicates with to transfer customer login payment
and prelease information to and from the internet. You will not be required to change this unless
directed to by Sentinel Systems.
Password
The password is used by the program to connect to the internet. This is the same password the
manager uses to login to the Site Configuration on the internet. Note: If the Site Managers password
is changed on the Site Configuration Page of www.ministoragepayments.com this password will also
need to be updated in WinSen.
Online Status
Tenant View
View Tenants displays a list of tenants that have a valid email address and pass code. The tenants
that appear in this list have been uploaded to the internet and can login using their email address and
pass code.
Payments View
After tenants have made payments online, the payment information will appear in view area. Each
payment has a status, shows the unit number and the name and address for the credit card used to
submit the payment. This information is displayed until the payment has been imported and applied
in WinSen.
Enrollments View
Existing tenants have the ability to enter their email address and billing address on the enrollment
web page. The Import Enrollment button will add the email address to the WinSen Database so their
payment information will be available online.
PreLease View
When there is a pending online prelease the PreLease View button will be visible and enabled. Any
pending preleases will be displayed in the view area and can be imported into WinSen by clicking
the Import button.
View Buttons
There is a view button for each of the online functions. Selecting a view button will display the
tenant, payment, enrollments and prelease units that are waiting to be processed.
Import Buttons
Payments Enrollments and Preleases have Import buttons which become enabled when there are
payments, enrollments or preleases that require processing. The Import buttons will not be visible if
the number displayed on the left is zero there are no pending transactions that require processing.
Appendices
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service • 253
Print Button
The Print button located on the lower right corner of the WinSen Online form will become visible
while viewing the Tenants, Payments Enrollments or Prelease list. The list that is currently being
viewed will be printed to the window if the output to Window check box is checked, if unchecked
the default printer will be used.
Options
Show Trans on Import: Selecting this option causes the Daily Transaction form to be displayed
while importing transactions. This can be used for modifying the payment amount or applying
payments to handle special cases. If this option is not selected, payments will automatically be
applied with no manager intervention. If the amount does not match a multiple of monthly payments
a message will be displayed and the Daily transaction form will be displayed.
Print Receipts: If Print Receipts is selected the user will be prompted to print receipts while
importing payments. This option provides the ability to print receipts when Show Trans on Import is
turned off.
AutoPrint Payment List: Select this option to automatically print a report containing the Unit /
Tenant billing information for the payments that have been submitted online. This report can also be
printed manually by selecting the print button on the lower right corner of the form.
Run from Charger: Selecting this option causes the WinSen Online form to be displayed during the
daily charger. When this option is turned off the manager will be required to run this form from the
Utilities menu on a regular basis. The WinSen Online Form must be opened daily to update Tenant
Online information and download payments that may have been submitted.
Prelease Online: Selecting this option allows units configured for online pre-lease to be uploaded to
the internet and available for pre-lease online. Units can be configured for online pre-lease using the
size codes table.
Setup Procedure
Online Payments
Contact Sentinel Systems to activate your WinSen Online account. We will need some basic site
information to set up your account. At this time we will provide you with a unique web site address
and login information. The following information will be requested.
•
Site Id, this will be your Sentinel Systems customer number
•
Site name, address and contact information
•
Manager or Contact person’s name and email address
•
Credit card types to accept
•
Your Web Site’s Address
•
The email address and password to be used for logging into the web site
Using the Site URL received you can log into the Site Manager web page and set the configuration
options to suit your needs. This would also be a good time to change your password. Your
password should be something that is easy to remember but hard for somebody to guess. We
recommend inserting some numbers or non Alpha characters to make it more secure.
An active internet connection is required to complete the following steps.
254 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Appendices
Open the WinSen Online form by selecting WinSen Online from the Utilities Menu. Click on the
<Configure> button to enable the configuration of Security info. Enter the password that was
created in the Online Site configuration web page and save your changes by clicking the <Save>
button. Then click the <Refresh> button and your online data will be refreshed. If all of this works
correctly you will not need to change your settings again unless the online password is changed or
you receive specific instructions from Sentinel Systems.
Have your web developer or person that maintains your web site add a payment button to your
website with a hyperlink to the unique URL received from Sentinel Systems and your tenants will be
able to make payments and Submit Enrollment information directly from your website.
Online Preleases
Unit Sizes that are to be available are configured using the Size Codes Form. This is done by
selecting Size Codes from the Maintenance Menu and setting the following fields as described for
each unit size that is to be available online.
Online: Placing a checkmark in this field indicates that you would like this size code to be available
online.
Minimum: Setting this value tells the systems that there must be more vacant units than the number
specified to make them available online. Setting this value to zero(0) indicates that they will still be
available even if there are no remaining units in the size code.
Prelease Deposit: This is the amount of the deposit you wish to collect when preleasing a unit online
or in the Assign Tenant screen.
Have your web developer or person that maintains your web site add a prelease button to your
website with a hyperlink to the unique URL received from Sentinel Systems and your units
configured for online prelease will be available to the Online Prelease wizard.
General Instructions
Daily Update
The WinSen Online form should be opened and refreshed once a day to ensure the online data is
synchronized with the WinSen program. Having the Run with Daily Charger option selected will
ensure this happens when you run the charger. The online data can also be refreshed at any time by
opening the WinSen Online Form from the Utilities menu.
Applying Payments
When the WinSen Online form is refreshed the number of online payments waiting to be processed
will be displayed in the online section. If there are payments to be processed the View button will
become enabled. Clicking the View button will display the payment details of payments to be
processed. After reviewing payment details click the import button to import and process them into
WinSen.
Credit Card Processing
Credit card charges will be processed using the same card processing POS you have configured for
processing credit card transactions in the WinSen Property Manager program. While the card is
being processed the progress will be displayed at the bottom of the daily transaction form, if the
daily transaction form is not visible it will be displayed on the bottom of the WinSen Online form.
Credit Card Processing can be cancelled by clicking either one of the cancel buttons. If the Credit
Appendices
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service • 255
card transaction is successful the Authorization code from the card processor will be displayed in the
status field. If card processing fails the reason for the failure will be displayed in the status field.
If your facility does not have automatic credit card processing enabled the system will display a
message reminding you to process the charges manually. You can also print the online transaction
report and process the card charges at a later time. This report can be printed automatically by
selecting the AutoPrint Payment list option.
Applying Enrollments
If there are enrollments that require processing, click the view button to display the list of tenants
that have requested to update their email address. The Import button will become enabled, click the
Import button and the Import Email form will appear. This form displays the tenant’s name and
address that has been entered Online, this form will also display a list of tenants with a matching last
name. If the name of the tenant being imported is not found, a list of all tenants will be displayed.
Select the tenant that you would like this email address added to and click the Update button to
import the email address. This process will be repeated for each new enrollment.
Applying Preleases
If there are preleases that require processing, click the view button to display the list of pending
preleases. The list will display the status, size code requested pre-lease till date, tenant contact info
and credit card billing information. Click the Import button to begin the import process. The import
prelease form will be displayed. The unit list will be populated with the units currently available in
the size code requested. If no units are available in the size code requested the find vacant unit
dialog will be available to select a unit as a different size code if desired. This form will also
display Tenant, contact and credit card info. After the information displayed is verified click the
import button to pre-lease the unit to this tenant. At this time the prelease deposit will charged to
the credit card, a confirmation email message will be sent to the tenant and their credit card will be
charged. If print receipts is enabled a receipt will automatically be printed.
When it is time to actually move the tenant into the unit, they should present a copy of the online
prelease confirmation to the manager. At this time the manager can complete the move in
transaction in WinSen using the following procedure.
1. Open the Assign Tenant form.
2. Click the Find Prelease button.
3. Select the name of the tenant moving in and the unit information will be displayed.
4. Select the desired unit and click the OK button, this will return you to the Assign Tenant
form to complete the move in transaction as you would for a normal move in.
Email Notification
The system automatically sends an email message to the site manager for the following conditions.
1. An Online Enrollment has been submitted by a tenant.
2. An Online payment has been submitted by a tenant.
3. An online Prelease has been submitted.
Then the system automatically sends an email message to the Tenant for the following conditions.
1. The online enrollment has been imported into WinSen and their online account has been
activated.
256 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Appendices
2. If an online enrollment can not be imported a notification will be sent to inform the tenant
that their login has not been activated.
3. The online payment has been imported into WinSen and their account information has been
updated.
4. An online payment failure occurred.
5. The online prelease has been processed and a unit is ready for them to move in to.
6. The online prelease was unable to be processed as requested.
URL Configuration
Payments
This is the URL your payment button should link to:
https://customer.ministoragepayments.com/login.aspx?XXXX
Preleases
This is the URL your prelease button should link to:
https://customer.ministoragepayments.com/PreleaseWizard.aspx?XXXX
Web Service
This is the internal URL used by WinSen Online and should not be changed unless directed to by
Sentinel Systems.
https://customer.ministoragepayments.com/winsenPayments.asmx?wsdl
Where XXXX = your Sentinel Systems Site Id.
System Requirements
A licensed version of WinSen that supports the online functions.
Your system must meet the minimum system requirements required by WinSen(See your WinSen
user manual for more info).
An active Internet connection or the ability to connect to the Internet on an as needed basis is
required for the transfer of data from WinSen to the Online Payment / Preleasee system. Update
speeds vary greatly depending on the speed of Internet connection available.
IC Verify or PCCharge using Internet connectivity is required for real time credit card processing.
Trouble Shooting Tips
Transferring Data
Most common problems may be caused by not having an active Internet connection while trying to
update customer payment information. Follow these steps to verify your internet connection and that
you can connect to the WinSen Online web service.
Appendices
•
Have you set up your WinSen Online account? If not, contact Sentinel Systems to activate
your WinSen Online account.
•
Verify your Internet connection is working by opening your web browser and going to
www.Google.com.
Appendix R – WinSen Online Service • 257
•
Verify that the web service URL is correct on the WinSen Online form by copying and
pasting the web address directly into your web browser. You should see an xml web page
with “targetNamespace=http://www.ministoragepayments.com”.
•
Verify the site login password matches the password entered into the Security info section
the WinSen Online form.
Importing Payments
•
If a tenant questions if a payment was applied and they printed the online confirmation page have
them fax a copy of it to you. This will provide important details about the transaction.
•
If importing a payment fails for any reason the reason will be displayed in the Status section of the
Import Payment view on the WinSen Online form. A history of payment status is also stored in the
WinSen Online log. The “Online.log” file is stored in the WinSen folder of your computer.
•
Login to the manager web site using your login email address and site manager password,
•
Click on the Payments button to find the matching transaction. Use the payment ID to verify there is
a matching payment. You can then look up this payment in the “Online.log” to find the reason for
the failure.
If these steps do not resolve the issues that you are having, please contact Sentinel Systems for
additional troubleshooting procedures.
Tenants can not login to the website
•
Verify their Email address and pass code and refresh the WinSen Online form.
•
Login as the Manager and verify the tenant is in the Tenant List.
Not all tenants show up on line
•
In order for tenant info to be uploaded they must have a valid email address and security code. You
can check their security code by finding the tenant in the View / Edit Tenant form and clicking the
security Icon. Also check the Unit Status. The following Unit status’s can not make payments
online. (A0 - Access Only, C0 - Complimentary, E0 - Vacant, P0 – Preleased, U0 - Unrentable, L0 Lien, L1 - Lien, L2 – Lien)
258 • Appendix R – WinSen Online Service
Appendices
Startup
Startup Procedure
Before You Start
This section of the manual explains how to customize the program for your facility, install your
existing customers and go “on-line” with the program.
It is necessary to have all of your tenant data current the day you go “on-line” with the system. This
will assure a smooth operation and maintain the integrity of your financial data.
You will need to establish a procedure for capturing transactions that occur between the time you
begin entering your current tenant data until you are completed. Attempting to keep current with the
day to day activity can be disruptive, confusing and non-productive. We recommend that you enter
your tenant data without regard to the activity that occurs during the input period. Once completed,
you can update your tenant data to reflect the activity that occurred during the primary tenant input
period.
Our Recommended Steps
1. Using the supplied demonstration database as explained in “The Demonstration Database”
on page 20, take the time to become familiar with the operation of WinSen Property
Manager and the operations manual. This step is highly recommended.
2. Fill out the Site Customization Guide provided with your software as detailed in “Site
Customization Guide and Site Setup” on page 20. This document will contain details on
your site setup, size codes, and units. It also contains explanations of the purpose of the
various options. If you have WinSen Electronic Manager, you should fill one out for each
site. Make a note of which site customization guide goes with which site, e.g., “site #1”,
“site #2”, etc. Note that the size codes are not site-specific; the list of size codes is used for
all sites.
3. The data on the Site Customization Guide will need to be entered into your computer. You
can do this yourself, or you can have Sentinel Systems Corporation perform the data entry.
If you elect to do the data entry yourself, follow steps 4 through 18 below. If you decide to
have Sentinel Systems input the data, mail or fax the completed Site Customization Guide to
us. We will send you back a Site Customization Disk containing the data and an installation
program which performs steps 4 through 10 automatically. In this case, follow the supplied
instructions for installing the Site Customization Disk, then skip to step #11. Instructions for
Startup
Startup Procedure • 259
installing this disk may also be found in “Site Customization Guide and Site Setup” on page
20.
4. Once you have become familiar with the program and are comfortable with its use, you must
delete the demonstration database and create a “blank” database. This step is VERY
IMPORTANT. To do this, choose the “Create blank WinSen database” program from the
WinSen program group. This program will create a blank database, overwriting the
demonstration database.
5. Run WinSen Property Manager by double clicking on its icon.
6. From Site Information under the Maintenance Menu, choose the Site Setup option.
7. Input the information from the Site Customization Guide relating to your site, e.g., name,
address, late cycle schedule, lien charges, etc. For WinSen Electronic Manager, configure
the main office first, and then add one or more site records for each site. For details on Site
Setup, see “Site Setup” on page 145.
8. Access Size Codes from the Maintenance Menu and input the information from the Site
Customization Guide relating to your unit sizes, rates, and security deposits. For details on
entering your size codes, see “Size Codes” on page 183.
9. Access Add/Remove Units from the Maintenance Menu and install your units. See
“Add/Remove Units” on page 185. For WinSen Electronic Manager, be sure to include
the site prefix in the unit number as explained in “Site Prefix” on page 186.
10. Exit from WinSen Property Manager.
11. Using the Install Customer and the Editor programs, install your existing tenants as
detailed in “Installing Your Existing Tenants” on page 261. During the installation of your
tenants, we recommend that you BACKUP YOUR DATA each day as detailed in “Backing
up Your Database” on page 77.
12. Update your customer data to reflect activity that has occurred during the primary tenant
input process. Customers who have moved in should be installed through the Install
Customer and Editor programs. Changes to existing tenants are accomplished by using the
Editor program as detailed in “The Editor Program” on page 263. Moveouts and transfers
should be handled via their respective menu selections with your computer date set to the
date the moveout or transfer occurred.
Your tenant data should accurately reflect the status of each of your tenants as of the day you
are going to go “on-line”. For example, let’s suppose that today is the 1st of January, 2000
and you are ready to go “on-line”. Let us further suppose that one of your tenants is paid to
January 1, 2000, and their unit rate is $50 per month. This tenant’s record should show a
paid to date of 01-01-2000 and a rent balance of 50.00. If a tenant is delinquent, that
tenant’s record should show all past due charges, e.g., rent, late fees, taxes, etc. This is
necessary because the system will not “back charge” rent and late fees. If a tenant is
prepaid, their balance should be 0.00 (including credits). It does not show a credit balance
for tenants with prepaid rent; this is not how the system operates. It only shows credits for
tenants when they have made an under or over payment, or some other unusual circumstance
exists.
13. Once all tenant data entry is completed, access the Report & Graph Menu and print the
“Tenant Status”, “Aged Receivables”, and “Unit Listing” reports. Compare the data
provided on these reports with your manual system to assure that all information is entered
correctly. If corrections need to be made, make them using the procedures in step 12 as
necessary.
260 • Startup Procedure
Startup
14. Next, access Site Setup and click the System Dates tab. Change the “Last Charge Date” to
today’s date, the “Next Daily Close” date to today’s date, the “Next Monthly Close” date to
the end of the month, and the “Next Yearly Close” date to the end of the year. The Weekly
and Quarterly Close dates are optional, and can be filled in if your facility is planning on
doing these closes regularly. Click the Close button to exit from Site Setup.
15. Check your computer date and time to be sure they are correct. The date and time are
displayed in the upper right corner of the WinSen Property Manager main menu. If you
need to make changes to the date and/or time settings you can do this by double clicking the
date display in the main menu or by selecting “Change Date/Time” from the Utilities menu.
16. It is now time to perform your first ever Daily Close. Select End of Period Processing from
the Main Menu, and click the Daily Close button. The system will process your database
and print out the closing report. This “first ever” close will probably be quite lengthy, since
it will include every transaction entered during the Startup phase.
17. BACKUP YOUR DATA by clicking the Backup All Data button in End of Period
Processing.
18. You are now officially “on-line”. The next day, the Daily Charger window will be displayed
the first time you start WinSen Property Manager, and you will then run the system from day
to day as described in “Daily Operations” on page 25.
Installing Your Existing Tenants
Installing your existing customers is a one or two step process, depending on your preferences and
the tenant status, accomplished using the “Install Customer” and the “Editor” programs. The process
is normally only used once...to initialize your WinSen Property Manager system. Once you have
begun normal operations, all transactions should be accomplished using the normal program options.
All tenant data such as the date of move-in, current balance and paid-to-date, 2nd contact
information, etc. are entered in these steps. Since tenants can be moved in with no payment, the two
programs are “password protected” - you must enter a manager level or higher password to access
either program (unless this has been changed in the “Configure Access Levels” option).
To access the Install Customer Program, click it’s icon in the WinSen group. The following form
will be displayed:
Startup
Installing Your Existing Tenants • 261
The Install Customer form is essentially the same as the “View/Edit Tenant - Form”, with some
additional buttons. At the top is the Toolbar, which allows you to perform various tenant operations
as described in “The Toolbar” on page 27 (during the Install Customer process, the Toolbar
functions are limited to entering Notes, entering Reminders, and using the Calculator).
Immediately below the Toolbar is found the Unit #, Size, Customer ID, and Status of the unit.
Below this line is a series of Tabs that you click with your mouse to enter, edit and display specific
information about your existing tenant.
Since this form is the essentially the same as the “View/Edit” form, please see “Using the
“View/Edit Tenant-Form” Window” on page 30 for explanations of how to select the correct unit
and the purpose of each tab.
After choosing the correct unit, fill out the information on each tab as appropriate for the customer
being entered. You can enter the customers in any order you desire, but it may be best to enter them
in unit number order since this would make it easier to keep track of where you are in the Startup
process.
Please note that while the paid-to-date can be entered in the Install Customer program, the move-in
date and current balance information cannot be. The Install Customer program will set the movein
date to the date you installed the tenant, and the balance to zero. Thus, if the customer is current
with their rent, and you don’t mind that the movein date may not be accurate, installing the customer
is a one step process. For past due tenants, or tenants whose true movein date must be recorded, this
information must be filled in after you have installed the customer using the Editor Program as
detailed in “The Editor Program” on page 263.
262 • Installing Your Existing Tenants
Startup
When you have finished filling in all relevant information for this customer, press the Save button to
save your work and move on to the next tenant. Repeat this process for each occupied unit. When
you have finished entering your existing customers, continue with step #12 in “Startup Procedure”
on page 259.
The Editor Program
The Editor Program is used to make changes to your WinSen Property Manager database. It can be
used to change the balance due, the paid to date, the rent due day, the movein date, the unit rate, and
other fields on any occupied unit. Since this program can be used to make changes to your database
outside of normal system operations, it is password protected, and requires an owner level password
to be entered to access it (unless this has been changed in the “Configure Access Levels” option).
To access the Editor, double click it’s icon in the WinSen program group. The following form will
be displayed:
After selecting the proper unit in the usual way (see “Find Unit Function” on page 101 for an
explanation of how to select a unit), you can move to any of the fields and type in the corrected
information. When you have made all necessary changes, you can either press the Save button to
save your changes and close the Editor, or you select another unit using the Find button or the Data
Control Bar. You can press Cancel or <Esc> to abort your changes if necessary.
Startup
The Editor Program • 263
Special Note: Rent Due Day and the Paid To Date
The “day value” of the paid to date must always match the rent due day. For example, if your
tenant’s rent is due on the first of the month, and they are paid up for the month of April, the “Rent
Due Day” would be “1” and their “Paid to Date” would be “05-01-96” NOT “04-30-96”. This is
VERY IMPORTANT. If the rent due day does not agree with the “day value” of the “Paid to
Date”, the “Paid to Date” will not be advanced properly when you make a payment on that unit.
264 • The Editor Program
Startup
Glossary of Terms
Access Level
Access levels allow you to restrict tenant’s access to certain parts of your storage facility, for
example you can designate that the “RV storage area” is only accessible to certain tenants. Access to
the area must be controlled by a keypad or card reader.
Backup
This process creates a backup copy of your database by copying it to a removable disk drive, for
example a 3.5" disk. It is insurance against data loss caused by computer problems such as hard
drive failures.
Child Window
A window opened by an application. For example, when you open the Site Setup window, it is a
child window of WinSen Property Manager.
Customer ID Number
A unique number that is automatically assigned by the system to each customer, normally during the
move-in process. The system uses this number to link unit records to customer records. It cannot be
changed once it has been assigned.
Daily Charger
The Daily Charger performs numerous important functions in the program. It charges rent, use tax if
appropriate and monthly charges on the tenant’s Rent Due Day. It also charges late fees to
delinquent tenants and locks them out on the day specified in Site Setup. It also queues up notices
(late letters, rate change letters, billing letters, etc.) to be printed according to your Late Cycle
Schedule. It is also responsible for initiating scheduled rate changes on the effective date of the rate
change.
DLL
“Dynamic Link Library” - a file containing various run-time routines that may be used by many
different applications. Since a DLL can be used by many applications, hard drive space and memory
is conserved.
Focus
Focus refers to the foreground application or the active control in a dialog. For example, when
WinSen Property Manager is running in the foreground, it is said to “have the focus”. When
referring to a dialog, it means the selected field, button, drop down list, or other data item on a form
is the active field.
Glossary of Terms • 265
Late Cycle Schedule
A table containing information on when the system should charge late fees, and print late notices to
your tenants when they are late paying the rent. It is defined in Site Information - Site Setup.
Permanently Disabled Alarm (PDA)
An alarm that has been permanently disarmed for some reason, e.g., excessive false alarms due to
faulty wiring or door switch, etc.
Preleased Unit
When a unit is preleased, it is being held for the tenant until a certain date, usually by a prelease
deposit. It is not considered a rented unit and the gate code will not be activated by a prelease
transaction. If the unit is not rented by the prelease date, the prelease deposit will be forfeited. A
prelease date can be extended in one of the tenant forms.
Rent Due Day
The specific day of each month when rent is due, e.g., 15 means the rent is due on the fifteenth of
each month.
Restore
This is the opposite of a backup. It takes a copy of your database on a removable diskette and
restores it to your hard drive, thus overwriting the current data with the backup copy of the data. It is
normally only done in unusual situations, e.g., a hard drive failure.
Time disabled alarm (TDA)
An alarm that is disabled according to the stop and start times of a designated time zone. For
example, an alarm that is disarmed at 7 am and rearmed at 11 pm.
Time Zone
Time zones allow you to define your tenants gate hours. The actual hours for a time zone are
specified in WinSen Sentinel. Each tenant is assigned a time zone, for example “Time Zone 0”,
after which that tenant can only use the gate during the hours specified for his/her designated time
zone.
Tracking Number
A number that is associated with a specific unit. It can be used for various purposes such as the
social security number, lease number, etc. Any combination of letters and characters is allowed.
ZIP file
A file which contains one or more compressed files. ZIP files are created using a compression
algorithm which can reduce the size of files by as much as 90%, depending on the type of file being
compressed. Compressing the WinSen database files can reduce the size of a backup by 80% or
more.
266 • Glossary of Terms
Billing 33, 58
Advancing next bill date 159
Billing Information 32
Index
2
2nd contact letter 158
2nd contact parties 32
A
Access interface number 186
Access Level
Changing 91
Access levels
Password 195
Accounts
Inventory 176
Miscellaneous Charge 175
Miscellaneous Credit 175
Monthly Charge 176
Setting up 175
System 176
Additional Card Numbers 90
Additional Passcodes 90
Administration fee
Assessing 65
Configuring 154
Advertising Effectiveness Categories 177
Alarms
Disabling 91
Time Disabled (TDA’s) 37
Alternate bank deposit log 158
Appendices 207
Assign Tenant 53
Autobill feature 58
Automatic lien process, configuring 163
B
Backups
Performing 77
Recommendations 23
Requiring before the close 159
Restoring 196
C
Calendar 201
Canceled transaction pointer 43
Canceling transactions 42
Card Number
Changing 90
Change Due Day 86
Charger 25
Comments 41
Compact Database 198
Credit Card Information 33
Credit Cards
Automatic Processing 101, 161
Information 58
Credit used for payments 48
D
Daily Charger 22, 25
Daily Close 75
Daily Transactions See Payments
Data control bar 16
Data entry forms 15
Database
Restoring 196
Database Operations 196
Compact 198
Rebuild 198
Verify Consistency 199
Date
Changing computer 202
Days to overlock 153
Demonstration database 20
Detail miscellaneous accounts 158
Documentation help file 20
Driver’s License Scanner 173, 239
Duplicate Notices 32
E
Electronic Manager
And site setup 146
And the report menu 118
Closing report selections 81
Closing reports 76
Startup procedure 259
Unit numbers 186
EMail
Configuring letters and receipts 171
Configuring settings 168
Enabling test mode 172
Index • 267
SMTP Authentication 170
End of Period Processing 75
Expected Vacancy 59
Expected Vacancy Date 38
F
Find Preleased Tenant Function 103
Find Tenant Function 103
Find Unit Function 101
Find Vacant Unit Function 103
G
Gate Interface 149
Configuring (Appendix E) 216
General options 156
Giving credit to be used at a future time 48
H
Help
How to get additional help 23
I
ICVerify 101
Automatic credit card processing 58
Enabling interface to 161
Interfacing with 233
Supported card readers 233
Initialization file variables 230
Installation 5
Insurance
Carrier information 164
Changing for current tenants 43
Issuing during move-in 61
Rate table 165
Interface 149
Interface number 186
Inventory Control
Adjustments 179
Inventory items 182
Reports 180
Inventory Items
Selling 99
Invoicing 33, 58
K
Kiosk Interface Options 173
L
Late charge type
Allowing View/Edit change 159
268 • Index
Late Fee Cycle 34, 59, 153
Late Letters & Mailings 71
Late Type 34, 59
Ledgers
Moveout 80
Options 157
Tenant 84
Letters
Special mailings 73
Licensing 7
Lien status
Placing tenants into 92
Removing tenants from 92
Lock/Unlock a tenant 91
M
MapPoint Interface 243
Menus
Making selections from 14
Organization of 9
Miscellaneous account windows 99
Miscellaneous Charges
Assessing during payments 50
Mobile Storage Units
Location tracking 41, 63
Monthly charges
changing 38
Move-ins 53
Moveout Ledgers 80
Multiple Units
Important Considerations 88
Payments 51
N
Networks
Installing WinSen on 6
Interface Setup (DCOM method) 219
Interface Setup (NetDDE method) 225
Interfacing over 219
Notes 106
P
Paid By Window 100
Passcodes
Changing 90
Random passcode option 158
Passwords
Access levels 195
Changing system 194
Factory Defaults 15
Payments
In full 45
Partial 45
PCCharge
Enabling interface to 235
Supported card readers 235
Permanently Disabled Alarms (PDA’s) 91
Pictures 96
Preleased units
assigning 64
extending prelease date 38, 64
Preleasing a unit 64
Printer setup 154
Printing a single letter 85
Proof edit
Requiring before the close 159
Prospective Tenants 110
Adding, editing, and deleting 110
Configure followup actions 174
Importing into Assign Tenant 103
Mailings 113
Reports 115
Purge Old Information 200
Q
Quick View 204
R
Random passcodes 158
Rate changes 189
After rent has been charged 46
Allowing during move-in 159
Allowing in View/Edit 159
Rate Charge Methods 66, 148
Rebuild Database 198
Receipts
Alternate format 158
Formfeed after 155
Printing tracking number on 158
Reprinting 84
Selecting printer 155
Reminders 107
Rent Due Day
Changing 86
Rent payments and the paid to date 46
Reports
Adding reports to the report menu 232
Advertising effectiveness 128
Aged receivables 129
Auto-bill (credit card) 125
Bad check 130
Census tract 130
Complete Lock/Unlock 130
Customer credit 130
Delinquency status 131
Demographic - residential 131
Editor Change 132
Expected vacancy 132
Lien list 133
Lock/Unlock Recommendations 133
Month to date rental activity 134
Move-in and move-out summary 135
MTD bank deposit summary 121
Non-standard rates detail 135
Operating income & rental analysis 122
Pre-leased unit 136
Proof edit 76
Proof Edit 122
Reminders 136
Rent coming due 137
Rent roll 125
Report & Graph Menu 117
Report menu 117
Security deposit 129, 137
Site exception 137
Site Summary 78
Size and rate 138
Square Footage Income Analysis 123
Tenant balance 126
Tenant billing 126
Tenant cross reference 127
Tenant longevity 139
Tenant Passcode 127
Tenant status 127
Trial balance 123
Unit listing 139
Vacancy 140
Vacancy Statistics 140
WTD & MTD Bank Deposit Log 120
WTD & MTD Transaction Log 121
Zip code analysis 141
Reserving units See Preleasing a unit
Returned Check Rollback 156
Returned checks
Automatic lock-out 96
Options 159
Posting 95
Returned check window 95
Viewing information 39
S
ScanShell 800 See Driver’s License Scanner
Second month prorate 149
Select printer 16
Set Lock/Unlock 91
Site customization 20
Site Information 145
Demographic Categories 177
Site Setup 145
Site prefix 186
Size codes
Adding, editing or deleting 183
Index • 269
Renaming 188
Utilities menu 201
Display order 184
Sorting
Late letters 73
Special mailings 73
Startup 259
Status Codes
Table of Unit (Appendix D) 215
System file names (Appendix A) 207
V
T
W
Tax
Automatic rate changes 193
Business Tax No. 150
Exempt status 33, 58
Setting rates 150
Type to be charged on revenues 175
Tenant history 84
Tenant operations 27
Thanks letter 154
Time
Changing computer 202
Time Disabled Alarms (TDA’s) 37, 91
Time Zone
Changing 91
Time Zones 36
TMSA Contract
Enabling 168
Reprinting 85
Toolbar 27
Training database See Demonstration Database
Transaction codes
Explanation of (Appendix B) 209
Table of (Appendix C) 211
Transactions
Canceling 42
Viewing 83
Transfer fee
Charging 70
Configuring 154
Transfers
Transferring a delinquent tenant 70
Transferring a tenant 69
Tutorial 20
Twenty-eight day cycle 148
Waiting list 108
Walk order number 186
Welcome letter 154
WinSen Lite Report Listing 236
WinSen Online 205, 246
U
Unit Status
Changing 87
Unit Types 188
Units
Adding, editing or removing 185
Changing size 188
Changing type 187
Display order 187
270 • Index
Vacant units
Showing 203
Verify Database Consistency 199
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising